ARCH 331

A R C H IT E C T U R A L
STRUCTURES
LECTURE NOTE SET
Summer 2015

by
Anne Nichols
Associate Professor of Practice
Department of Architecture
A413 Langford
Texas A&M University
College Station, TX 77843-3137
(979) 845-6540
fax: (979) 862-1571
http://faculty.arch.tamu.edu/anichols
[email protected]
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Syllabus
Student Understandings
List of Symbol Definitions
Structural Glossary
Note Set 2.1 ..........Structural Systems
Note Set 2.2 ..........Structural Planning
Note Set 2.3 ..........Math for Structures
Note Set 2.4 ..........Numerical Computations
Note Set 2.5 ..........Problem Solving, Units and Numerical Accuracy
Note Set 3.1 ..........Forces and Vectors
Note Set 3.2 ..........Moments
Note Set 4.1 ..........Point Equilibrium and Truss Analysis
Note Set 4.2 ..........Truss Analysis Using Multiframe
Note Set 5.1 ..........Equilibrium of Rigid Bodies
Note Set 5.2 ..........Method of Sections for Truss Structures
Note Set 6.1 ..........Mechanics of Materials
Note Set 6.2 ..........Stress and Strain - Elasticity
Note Set 6.3 ..........Thermal Effects and Indeterminacy
Note Set 6.4 ..........Sustainability Considerations of Materials
Note Set 7 .............Beam Structures and Internal Forces
Note Set 8.1 ..........Beam Analysis Using Multiframe
Note Set 8.2 ..........Beam Diagrams and Formulas
Note Set 9.1 ..........Centers of Gravity - Centroids
Note Set 9.2 ..........Moments of Inertia
Note Set 10.1 ........Beam Bending Stresses and Shear Stress
Note Set 10.2 ........Introduction to Beam Stress Analysis and Preliminary Design
Note Set 11 ...........Pinned Frames and Arches
Note Set 12.1 ........Rigid and Braced Frames
Note Set 12.2 ........Columns and Stability
Note Set 12.3 ........Frame Analysis Using Multiframe
Note Set 13.1 ........Common Design Loads in Building Codes

i
Note Set 13.2 ........Structural Load Requirements
Note Set 13.3 ........Design Wind Pressures Envelope Procedure
Note Set 13.4 ........Earthquake Ground Motion
Note Set 13.5 ........Building Code Requirements by Construction
Note Set 13.6 ........SEI/ASCE 7-10: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures
Note Set 14 ...........System Assemblies & Loads Tracing
Note Set 15.1 ........Wood Design
Note Set 15.2 ........Beam Design and Deflections
Note Set 18 ...........Steel Design
Note Set 22.1 ........Reinforced Concrete Design
Note Set 22.2 ........Steel Reinforcement Charts (Appendix E)
Note Set 24 ...........Torsion
Note Set 25.1 ........One-Way Frame Analysis
Note Set 25.2 ........Thickness and Cover Requirements for Fire Protection
Note Set 25.3 ........Openings in Concrete Slab Systems
Note Set 27.1 ........Foundation Design
Note Set 27.2 ........Design of Isolated Square and Rectangular Footings
Note Set 28.1 ........Masonry Design
Note Set 28.2 ........BIA Technical Notes: Reinforced Brick Masonry Beams
Note Set 28.3 ........NCMA Tek Notes: Concrete Masonry
Appendix ..............Table of Reference Figures and Charts

ii
 Dd DEPARTMENT OF ARCHITECTURE
SYLLABUS

Course title and number ARCH 331 Architectural Structures (section 100)
Term Summer 2015
Meeting times and location Lecture/Lab: 2 - 4 pm M,T,W,R, F in 118 Civil Engineering

Course Description and Prerequisites

Architectural Structures. (2-2). Credit 3. Physical principles that govern statics and strength of materials through
the design of architectural structures from a holistic view, in the context of architectural ideas and examples;
introduction to construction, behavior of materials, and design considerations for simple and complex structural
assemblies; computer applications. Prerequisites: Junior or senior classification in environmental design;
MATH 142 or equivalent; PHYS 201.

Learning Outcomes or Course Objectives

The student will be able to read a text or article about structural technology, identify the key concepts
and related equations, and properly apply the concepts and equations to appropriate structural
problems (relevance). The student will also be able to define the answers to key questions in the
reading material. The student will be able to evaluate their own skills, or lack thereof, with respect to
reading and comprehension of structural concepts, clarity of written communication, reasonable
determination of precision in numerical data, and accuracy of computations.
The student will be able to read a problem statement, interpret the structural wording in order to identify
the concepts and select equations necessary to solve the problem presented (significance). The
student will be able to identify common steps in solving structural problems regardless of the
differences in the structural configuration and loads, and apply these steps in a clear and structured
fashion (logic). The student will draw upon existing mathematical and geometrical knowledge to gather
information, typically related to locations and dimensions, provided by representational drawings or
models of structural configurations, and to present information, typically in the form of plots that graph
variable values. The student will be able to draw representational structural models and diagrams, and
express information provided by the figures in equation form. The student will compare the
computational results in a design problem to the requirements and properly decide if the requirements
have been met. The student will take the corrective action to meet the requirements.
The student will create a structural model with a computer application based on the concepts of the
behavior and loading of the structural member or assemblage. The student will be able to interpret the
modeling results and relate the results to the solution obtained by manual calculations.
The student will be able to articulate the physical phenomena, behavior and design criteria which
influence structural space and form. (depth) The student will be able to identify the structural purpose,
label, behavior, advantages and disadvantages, and interaction of various types of structural members
and assemblies. (breadth) The student will create a physical structure or structures using non-
traditional building materials, considering material and structural behavior, in order to demonstrate the
behavior and limitations of a variety of structural arrangements. The student will produce proper
documentation and drawings of the size, spacing, location and connection of parts for the construction
of the structure.
The student will interact and participate in group settings to facilitate peer-learning and teaching. In
addition, the student will be able to evaluate the comprehension of concepts, clarity of communication
of these concepts or calculations, and the precision and accuracy of the data used in the computations
in the work of their peers.

Instructor Information
Name Dr. Anne Nichols, Associate Professor of the Practice
Telephone number (979) 845-6540
Email address [email protected]
Office hours 11 am-12 pm MWF, 12-1:30 pm TR (and by appointment)
Office location A435 Langford

1
 Textbook and/or Resource Material
Required Text:
Statics and Strength of Materials Foundations for Structural Design, Onouye, (2005) Pearson -
Prentice Hall, ISBN 0-13-111837-4
Recommended Texts:
A Structures Primer, Kaufman, (2010) Prentice Hall, ISBN 978-0-13-230256-3
Understanding Structures, Moore, (1999) McGraw-Hill, ISBN 9780070432536
References:
ACI 318-14 Code and Commentary
AISC 14th ed. Steel Construction Manual
Masonry Joint Structural Code
National Design Specifications for Wood

Grading Policies
Students should refer to the Academic section in Student Rules and Regulations
http://student-rules.tamu.edu.

Assignments: Format:
Due as stated on the assignment statements.
Only one assignment without University excuse may be turned in for credit Date Name Course
no later than two lectures after the due date and before final exams begin. Given:
Find:
All other assignments will receive no credit if late without a recognized Solution:
excuse or after final exams have begun. :
Assignments with incorrect formatting will be penalized.
Quizzes:
Quizzes will be given at any time during the class period. Make-up quizzes without an excuse will not
be given.
Practice quizzes will be posted electronically.
No quiz scores will be dropped.
Use of cell phones with a calculator application during quizzes and exams is prohibited.
Final Exam:
The final exam will be comprehensive and is officially scheduled for
3:30-5:30 PM Monday, July 6.
Teaching Assistant:
n/a ()
Structures Help Desk:
n/a ()
n/a 845-6580 Posted Hours: http://faculty.arch.tamu.edu/anichols/schedule/
Other Resources:
The Student Learning Center provides tutoring in math and physics. (http://slc.tamu.edu/tutoring.shtml)
Other tutoring services are listed at http://scs.tamu.edu/sites/default/files/tutoring.pdf The Academic
Success Center offers workshops at http://us.tamu.edu/Undergraduate-Studies/Academic-Success-
Center
Grievances:
For grievances other than those listed in Part III in Texas A&M University Student Rules: http://student-
rules.tamu.edu/ the instructor must be the first point of contact.

2
 Grading Information and Rubric
The levels listed for graded work (projects, quizzes, exams) and pass-fail work (assignments) must both be
met to earn the course letter grade:

Letter Grade Graded work Pass-Fail work

A A average (90-100%) Pass for 90 to 100%of assignments
B B average (80-89%) Pass for 80 to 100% of assignments
C C average (70-79%) Pass for 72 to 100% of assignments
D D average (60-69%) Pass for 62 to 100% of assignments
F F average (<59%) Pass for 0% to 100% of assignments

Graded work: This typically constitutes 6 quizzes, a learning portfolio (worth 1.5 quizzes) and a final exam
(worth 3 quizzes). This equates to proportions of approximately 57% to quizzes, 14% to the learning portfolio,
and 29% to the final exam.

Pass/fail work: This constitutes all practice assignments and projects, each with a value of 1 unit. Criteria for
passing is at least 75% completeness and correctness along with every problem attempted. Percent effort
expected for a problem in a practice assignment is provided on the assignment statement. This is considered a
lab course and the assignments are required work with credit given for competency. The work is necessary to
apply the material and prepare for the quizzes and exam. It is expected that this work will be completed with
assistance or group participation, but all graded work is only by the individual.

Attendance Policies
The University views class attendance as the responsibility of an individual student. Attendance is essential to
complete the course successfully. University rules related to excused and unexcused absences are located on-
line at http://student-rules.tamu.edu/rule07 Students who request an excused absence are required to uphold
the Aggie Honor Code and Student Conduct Code (See TAMU Student Rule 24)

Project due dates will be provided in the project statements. Students should contact the instructor if work is
turned in late due to an absence that is excused under the Universitys attendance policy. In such cases the
instructor will either provide the student an opportunity to make up any quiz, exam or other graded activities or
provide a satisfactory alternative to be completed within 30 calendar days from the last day of the absence.
There will be no opportunity for students to make up work missed because of an unexcused absence.

Other Pertinent Attendance Information

Absences related to illness or injury must be documented according to http://shs.tamu.edu/attendance including

the Explanatory Statement for Absence from class for 3 days or less. Doctor visits not related to immediate
illness or injury are not excused absences.
Lecture, Lab, and Textbook:
The lecture slides should be viewed prior to class. Class will be reserved for review of the lectures.
Lab will consist of problem solving requiring the textbook. The lecture slide handouts are available on
the class web page and eCampus.
Lecture and lab are consecutive (and not separate).
Use of electronic devices during lecture and lab is prohibited.
Notes:
The notes and related handouts are available on the class web page at
http://faculty.arch.tamu.edu/anichols/courses/architectural-structures/, or on eCampus. A bound set
can be purchased from the Notes-n-Quotes at 701 W. University, directly across from the Mitchell
Physics Building in the Northgate Neighborhood.
eCampus:
eCampus is the on-line course system useful for downloading files, uploading assignments, reading
messages and replying, as well as posting scores; and is accessed with your NetID. This will be used
to post class materials, questions and responses by class members and the instructor, and scores. It
can be accessed at http://ecampus.tamu.edu/

3
 Course Topics, Calendar of Activities, Major Assignment Dates
Tentative Schedule (subject to change at any time throughout the semester)
*Note: Materials in the Class Note Set not specifically mentioned above are provided as references or aids.
Week Topic Required Reading/Problems
1 1. Design Loads and Structural Read*: Ch. 1, 5.1, Appendix B; note sets 2.1, 2.2,
Performance Requirements + 2.3 & 2.4
Structural Systems, Planning and Reference: note set 2.5
Design Solve: Assignment 1 (start)
2. Forces and Moments Read: Ch. 2; note sets 3.1 & 3.2
Due: Assignment 1 over material from lectures 1
3. Equilibrium of a Point & Analysis of Read: 3.1, pg. 89-95; note set 4.1
Planar Trusses Reference: note set 4.2
4. Rigid Body Equilibrium & Analysis of Read: 3.2, 3.3, pg. 98-110; note sets 5.1 & 5.2
Planar Trusses Due: Assignment 2 over material from lectures 2 & 3
5. Mechanics of Materials Read: Ch. 6; note sets 6.1, 6.2 & 6.3
Reference: note set 6.4
Due: (Cardboard Couch Swing Design) Project
2 6. Beam Shear and Bending & Diagrams Read: 8.1-8.4, note set 7
Reference: note sets 8.1 & 8.2
Quiz 1 over material from lectures 1-3
7. Beam Section Properties Read: 7.1-7.4; note sets 9.1 & 9.2
Due: Assignment 3 over material from lectures 4 & 5
8. Beam Stresses Read: 9.1-9.4; note set 10.1
Reference: note set 10.2
9. Other Beams and Pinned Frames Read: 4.2, pg. 73; note set 11
Quiz 2 over material from lectures 4-6
10. Rigid Frames - Compression & Read: 10.1,10.2 & 10.5; note sets 12.1 & 12.2
Buckling Reference: note set 12.3
Due: Assignment 4 over material from lectures 6-8
3 11. Design Loads, Codes and Methodology, Read: 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 4.4; note set 13.1 & 14
System Assemblies and Load Tracing Reference: note sets 13.2, 13.3, 13.4, 13.5
12. Wood Construction Read: 9.5-9.6; note sets 15.1 & 15.2
Materials & Beam Design Due: Assignment 5 over material form lectures 9 & 10
13. Column Design Read: 10.4; note set 15.1
Quiz 3 over material from lectures 7-10
14. Joints and Connection Stresses Read: note set 15.1
15. Steel Construction Read: note set 18
Materials & Beam Design Due: Assignment 6 over material from lectures 11-13
4 16. Trusses, Decks & Plate Girders Read: pg. 98-110; note set 18
Reference: note set 5.2
17. Column Design & Read: 10.3; note set 18
Tension Members Quiz 4 over material from lecture 11-14
18. Bolted Connections & Welds Read: note set 18
Due: Assignment 7 over material from lectures 14-16
19. Concrete Construction Read: note set 22.1
Materials & Beam Design Reference: note set 22.2
20. T-beams & Slabs Read: note set 22.1
Due: Assignment 8 over material from lectures 17-18
5 21. Shear, Torsion, Reinforcement & Read: note sets 22.1 & 24
Deflection Quiz 5 over material from lectures 15-18
22. Floor Systems & Continuous Read: note sets 22.1, 25.1 & 25.3
Beams Reference: note set 25.2
Columns & Frames Due: Assignment 9 over material from lectures 19 & 20
23. Foundation Design & Footings Read: note sets 27.1 & 27.2
24. Masonry Construction Read: note set 28.1
Beams & Columns Reference: note sets 28.2 & 28.3
Due: Assignment 10 over material from lectures 21-23
and Learning Portfolio
FINAL: 3:30-5:30 PM Monday, July 6 (comprehensive) Quiz 6 over material from lectures 19-22

4
 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) is a federal anti-discrimination statute that provides comprehensive
civil rights protection for persons with disabilities. Among other things, this legislation requires that all students
with disabilities be guaranteed a learning environment that provides for reasonable accommodation of their
disabilities. If you believe you have a disability requiring an accommodation, please contact Disability Services,
in Cain Hall, Room B118, or call 845-1637. For additional information visit
http://disability.tamu.edu
Academic Integrity
An Aggie does not lie, cheat, or steal, or tolerate those who do.
Upon accepting admission to Texas A&M University, a student immediately assumes a commitment to uphold
the Honor Code, to accept responsibility for learning, and to follow the philosophy and rules of the Honor
System. Students will be required to state their commitment on examinations, research papers, and other
academic work. Ignorance of the rules does not exclude any member of the TAMU community from the
requirements or the processes of the Honor System. For additional information please visit:
http://aggiehonor.tamu.edu

Care of Facilities
The use of spray paint or other surface-altering materials is not permitted in the Langford Complex, except in
designated zones. Students who violate this rule will be liable for the expenses associated with repairing
damaged building finishes and surfaces. At the end of the semester, your area must be clean of all trash.

Studio Policy (required of all studios)

All students, faculty, administration and staff of the Department of Architecture at Texas A&M University are
dedicated to the principle that the Design Studio is the central component of an effective education in
architecture. They are equally dedicated to the belief that students and faculty must lead balanced lives and
use time wisely, including time outside the design studio, to gain from all aspects of a university education and
world experiences. They also believe that design is the integration of many parts, that process is as important
as product, and that the act of design and of professional practice is inherently interdisciplinary, requiring active
and respectful collaboration with others.

Students and faculty in every design studio will embody the fundamental values of optimism, respect, sharing,
engagement, and innovation. Every design studio will therefore encourage the rigorous exploration of ideas,
diverse viewpoints, and the integration of all aspects of architecture (practical, theoretical, scientific, spiritual,
and artistic), by providing a safe and supportive environment for thoughtful innovation. Every design studio will
increase skills in professional communication, through drawing, modeling, writing and speaking.

Every design studio will, as part of the syllabus introduced at the start of each class, include a clear statement
on time management, and recognition of the critical importance of academic and personal growth, inside and
outside the studio environment. As such it will be expected that faculty members and students devote quality
time to studio activities, while respecting the need to attend to the broad spectrum of the academic life. Every
design studio will establish opportunities for timely and effective review of both process and products. Studio
reviews will include student and faculty peer review. Where external reviewers are introduced, the design studio
instructor will ensure that the visitors are aware of the Studio Culture Statement and recognize that the design
critique is an integral part of the learning experience. The design studio will be recognized as place for open
communication and movement, while respecting the needs of others, and of the facilities.

Important Links Below

Department of Architecture Website http://dept.arch.tamu.edu/
Department Financial Assistance http://dept.arch.tamu.edu/financial-assistance/
Academic Calendar http://admissions.tamu.edu/registrar/general/calendar.aspx
Final Exam Schedule Online http://admissions.tamu.edu/registrar/general/finalschedule.aspx
On-Line Catalog http://catalog.tamu.edu
Student Rules http://student-rules.tamu.edu/
Aggie Honor System Office http://aggiehonor.tamu.edu/
American Institute of Architecture website http://www.aia.org/index.htm

5
DEPARTMENT OF ARCHITECTURE ARCH 331 SUMMER 2015
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30
last day
MAY

Memorial Day to register

31 1 2 Lect 1 3 Lect 2 4 Lect 3 5 Lect 4 6

session I #1 due #2 due

classes begin last day to add
7 8 Lect 5 9 Lect 6 10 Lect 7 11 Lect 8 12 Lect 9 13

project due Quiz 1 #3 due Quiz 2

14 15 Lect 10 16 Lect 11 17 Lect 12 18 Lect 13 19 Lect 14 20

#4 due #5 due Quiz 3

JUNE

21 22 Lect 15 23 Lect 16 24 Lect 17 25 Lect 18 26 Lect 19 27

last day to Q-drop
#6 due Quiz 4 #7 due
28 29 Lect 20 30 Lect 21 1 Lect 22 2 Lect 23 3 Lect 24 4
#10 and portfolio Ind.
#8 due Quiz 5 #9 due
due, Quiz 6 Day
5 6 Final Exams 7 8 9 10 11

3:30 - 5:30pm session II grades due

331 FINAL classes begin
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
JULY

19 20 21 22 23 24 25

26 27 28 29 30 31 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 Final Exam 12 13 14 15
end of
summer II term Commencement
AUGUST

16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29
last day
to register
30 31 1 2 3 4 5
last day to add
classes begin

7
ARCH 331 Su2014abn

ARCH 331. Student Understandings

1). I understand that there are intellectual standards in this course and that I am responsible for monitoring my
own learning.
2). I understand that the class will focus on practice, not on lecture.
3). I understand that I am responsible for preparing for lecture with the assigned reading and lecture show by
internalizing key concepts, recognizing key questions, and evaluating what makes sense and what doesnt
make sense to me.
4). I understand that I will be held regularly responsible for assessing my own work using criteria and standards
discussed in class.
5). I understand that if at any time in the semester I feel unsure about my grade, I may request an assessment
from the instructor.
6). I understand that there are 10 practice assignments, generally two due every week during the bulk of the
semester.
7). I understand that I will occasionally be required to assess the work of my classmates in an objective manor
using the same criteria and standards used to assess my own work.
8). I understand that there are 6 graded quizzes, generally one given every week during the bulk of the
semester.
9). I understand that there is a final exam in the course.
10). I understand that I must do a Learning Portfolio, which is a self-evaluation that makes my case for
receiving a particular grade using criteria provided in class and citing evidence from my work across the
semester.
11). I understand that the work of the course requires Consistent classroom attendance and active participation.

12). I understand that I will regularly be required to demonstrate that I have prepared for lecture.
13). I understand that the class will not be graded on a curve. I understand that it is theoretically possible for the
whole class to get an A or an F.
14). I understand the basis of the final grade as outlined in the syllabus.
15). I understand that since the final grade is based on percentages from graded work and competency on
assignments as outlined in the syllabus, that the minimum level of both must be satisfied to obtain the letter
grade. The criteria for assignments that are considered passing is outlined in the syllabus section on
Learning Objectives.

NAME DATE
signature

printed name

9
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

List of Symbol Definitions

a long dimension for a section subjected to torsion (in, mm);

acceleration (ft/sec2, m/sec2);
width of the base of a retaining wall for pressure calculation (ft, m);
equivalent square column size in spread footing design (in, ft, mm, m);
distance used in beam formulas (ft, m);
depth of the effective compression block in a concrete beam (in, mm)
a area bounded by the centerline of a thin walled section subjected to torsion (in2, mm2)
A area, often cross-sectional (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Ab area of a bolt (in2, mm2)
Ae effective net area found from the product of the net area An by the shear lag factor U (in2, ft2,
mm2, m2)
Ag gross area, equal to the total area ignoring any holes or reinforcement (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Agv gross area subjected to shear for block shear rupture (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
An net area, equal to the gross area subtracting any holes (in2, ft2, mm2, m2) (see Ae)
Anet net area, equal to the gross area subtracting any reinforcement (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Ant net area subjected to tension for block shear rupture (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Anv net area subjected to shear for block shear rupture (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Ap bearing area (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Areqd area required to satisfy allowable stress (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
As area of steel reinforcement in concrete beam and masonry design (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
As area of steel compression reinforcement in concrete beam design (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Ast area of steel reinforcement in concrete and masonry column design (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Athroat area across the throat of a weld (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Av area of concrete shear stirrup reinforcement (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
Aweb web area in a steel beam equal to the depth x web thickness (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
A1 area of column in spread footing design (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
A2 projected bearing area of column load in spread footing design (in2, ft2, mm2, m2)
ASD Allowable Stress Design
b width, often cross-sectional (in, ft, mm, m);
narrow dimension for a section subjected to torsion (in, mm);
number of truss members;
rectangular column dimension in concrete footing design (in, mm, m);
distance used in beam formulas (ft, m)
bE effective width of the flange of a concrete T beam cross section (in, mm)
bf width of the flange of a steel or concrete T beam cross section (in, mm)
bo perimeter length for two-way shear in concrete footing design (in, ft, mm, m)
bw width of the stem (web) of a concrete T beam cross section (in, mm)
11
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

B spread footing or retaining wall base dimension in concrete design (ft, m);
dimension of a steel base plate for concrete footing design (in, mm, m)
Bs width within the longer dimension of a rectangular spread footing that reinforcement must be
concentrated within for concrete design (ft, m)
B1 factor for determining Mu for combined bending and compression
c distance from the neutral axis to the top or bottom edge of a beam (in, mm, m);
distance from the center of a circular shape to the surface under torsional shear strain (in, mm, m);
rectangular column dimension in concrete footing design (in, mm, m);
the distance from the top of a masonry or concrete beam to the neutral axis (in, mm, m) (see x);
buckling and crushing interaction factor for wood columns (see Cp)
ci distance from the center of a circular shape to the inner surface under torsional shear strain (in,
mm, m)
co distance from the center of a circular shape to the outer surface under torsional shear strain (in,
mm, m)
c1 coefficient for shear stress for a rectangular bar in torsion
c2 coefficient for shear twist for a rectangular bar in torsion
CL, q center line
C compression label;
compression force (lb, kips, N, kN):
dimension of a steel base plate for concrete footing design (in, mm, m)
Cb lateral torsional buckling modification factor for moment in ASD & LRFD steel beam design,
Cb = 1 for simply supported beams (0 moments at the ends)
Cc column slenderness classification constant for steel column design;
compressive force in the concrete of a doubly reinforced concrete beam (lb, k, N, kN)
CC curvature factor for laminated arch design
CD load duration factor for wood design
Cf form factor for circular sections or or square sections loaded in plane of diagonal for wood
design
Cfu flat use factor for other than decks in wood design
CF size factor for wood design
CH shear stress factor for wood design
Ci incising factor for wood design
CL beam stability factor for wood design
Cm modification factor for combined stress in steel design;
compression force in the masonry for masonry design (lb, k, N, kN)
CM wet service factor for wood design
Cp column stability factor for wood design
Cr repetitive member factor for wood design
Cv web shear coefficient for steel design
CV volume factor for glue laminated timber design

12
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

Cs compressive force in the compression steel of a doubly reinforced concrete beam (lb, k, N,
KN)
Ct temperature factor for wood design
d depth, often cross-sectional (in, mm, m);
diameter (in, mm, m);
perpendicular distance from a force to a point in a moment calculation (in, ft, mm, m);
effective depth from the top of a reinforced concrete or masonry beam to the centroid of the
tensile steel (in, ft, mm, m):
critical cross section dimension of a rectangular timber column cross section related to the
profile (axis) for buckling (in, mm, m);
symbol in calculus to represent a very small change (like the greek letters for d, see & )
d effective depth from the top of a reinforced concrete beam to the centroid of the compression
steel (in, ft, mm, m)
db bar diameter of a reinforcing bar (in, mm);
nominal bolt diameter (in, mm)
df depth of a steel column flange (wide flange section) (in, mm)
dx difference in the x direction between an area centroid ( x ) and the centroid of the composite
shape ( x ) (in, mm)
dy difference in the y direction between an area centroid ( y ) and the centroid of the composite
shape ( y ) (in, mm)
D diameter of a circle (in, mm, m);
dead load for LRFD design
DL dead load
e eccentric distance of application of a force (P) from the centroid of a cross section (in, mm)
E modulus of elasticity (psi; ksi, kPa, MPa, GPa);
earthquake load for LRFD design
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete (psi; ksi, kPa, MPa, GPa)
Es modulus of elasticity of steel (psi; ksi, kPa, MPa, GPa)
f symbol for stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fa calculated axial stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fb calculated bending stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fc calculated compressive stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fc concrete design compressive stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fcr calculated column stress based on the critical column load Pcr (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fm calculated compressive stress in masonry (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fm masonry design compressive stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fp calculated bearing stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)

13
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

fs stress in the steel reinforcement for concrete or masonry design (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fs compressive stress in the compression reinforcement for concrete beam design (psi, ksi, kPa,
MPa)
ft calculated tensile stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fv calculated shearing stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fx combined stress in the direction of the major axis of a column (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
fy yield stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)

fyt yield stress of transverse reinforcement (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)

F force (lb, kip, N, kN);
capacity of a nail in shear (lb, kip, N, kN);
symbol for allowable stress in design codes (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa);
fluid load for LRFD design
Fa allowable axial stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fb allowable bending stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fb allowable bending stress for combined stress for wood design (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fc allowable compressive stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fc allowable compressive stress perpendicular to the wood grain (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fconnector resistance capacity of a connector (lb, kips, N, kN)
FcE intermediate compressive stress for ASD wood column design dependant on material (psi, ksi,
kPa, MPa)
Fcr flexural buckling (column) stress in ASD and LRFD (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fc allowable compressive stress for ASD wood column design (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
F* c intermediate compressive stress for ASD wood column design dependant on load duration (psi,
ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fe elastic critical buckling stress is steel design
FEXX yield strength of weld material (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fhorizontal-resist resultant frictional force resisting sliding in a footing or retaining wall (lb, kip, N, kN)
Fn nominal strength in LRFD steel design (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
nominal tension or shear strength of a bolt (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fp allowable bearing stress parallel to the wood grain (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fs allowable tensile stress in reinforcement for masonry design (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fsliding resultant force causing sliding in a footing or retaining wall (lb, kip, N, kN)
Ft allowable tensile stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fv allowable shear stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa);
allowable shear stress in a welded connection
Fx force component in the x coordinate direction (lb, kip, N, kN)
14
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

Fy force component in the y coordinate direction (lb, kip, N, kN);

yield stress (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fyw yield stress in the web of a steel wide flange section (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
Fu ultimate stress a material can sustain prior to failure (psi, ksi, kPa, MPa)
F.S. factor of safety
g acceleration due to gravity, 32.17 ft/sec2, 9.807 m/sec2;
gage spacing of staggered bolt holes (in, mm)
G shear modulus (psi; ksi, kPa, MPa, GPa);
gigaPascals (109 Pa or 1 kN/mm2);
relative stiffness of columns to beams in a rigid connection (see );
specific gravity (ie. factor multiplied by density of water to get density)
h depth, often cross-sectional (in, ft, mm, m);
height (in, ft, mm, m);
sag of a cable structure (ft, m);
effective height of a wall or column (see l e )
hc height of the web of a wide flange steel section (in, ft, mm, m)
hf depth of a flange in a T section (in, ft, mm, m);
height of a concrete spread footing (in, ft, mm, m)
H hydraulic soil load for LRFD design;
height of retaining wall (ft, m)
HA horizontal force due to active soil pressure (lb, k, N, kN)
I moment of inertia (in4, mm4, m4)
I moment of inertia about the centroid (in4, mm4, m4)
Ic moment of inertia of a component about the centroid (in4, mm4, m4);
Imin minimum moment of inertia of Ix and Iy (in4, mm4, m4)
Itransformed moment of inertia of a multi-material section transformed to one material
(in4, mm4, m4)
Ix moment of inertia with respect to an x-axis (in4, mm4, m4)
Iy moment of inertia with respect to a y-axis (in4, mm4, m4)
j multiplier by effective depth of masonry section for moment arm, jd (see d)
J, Jo polar moment of inertia (in4, mm4, m4)
k kips (1000 lb);
shape factor for plastic design of steel beams, Mp/My;
effective length factor for columns (also K);
distance from outer face of W flange to the web toe of fillet (in, mm);
multiplier by effective depth of masonry section for neutral axis, kd
kg kilograms
klf kips per linear foot (k/ft)
ksf kips per square foot (k/ft2)
ksi kips per square inch (k/in2)

15
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

kN kiloNewtons (103 N)
kPa kiloPascals (103 Pa)
K effective length factor with respect to column end conditions (also k);
masonry mortar strength designation
KcE material factor for wood column design
l length (in, ft, mm, m);
cable span (ft, m)
ld development length for reinforcing steel (in, ft, mm, m) (also Ld)
l dc development length for column dowels (in, ft, mm, m)
l dh development length for hooks (in, ft, mm, m)
le effective length that can buckle for wood column design (in, ft, mm, m) (also Le)
ln clear span from face of support to face of support in concrete design (in, ft, mm, m)
lsc lap splice length in compression for reinforcement (in, ft, mm, m)
lb pound force
L length (in, ft, mm, m);
live load for LRFD design;
spread footing dimension in concrete design (ft, m)
Lb unbraced length of a steel beam in LRFD design (in, ft, mm, m)
Lc clear distance between the edge of a hole and edge of next hole or edge of the connected steel
plate in the direction of the load (in, ft, mm, m)
Ld development length of reinforcement in concrete (ft, m) (also ld )

Le effective length that can buckle for column design (in, ft, mm, m) (also l e )
Lm projected length for bending in concrete footing design (ft, m)
Lp maximum unbraced length of a steel beam in LRFD design for full plastic flexural strength (in,
ft, mm, m)
Lr roof live load in LRFD design;
maximum unbraced length of a steel beam in LRFD design for inelastic lateral-torsional
buckling (in, ft, mm, m)
L length of an angle in a connector with staggered holes (in, mm);
length of the one-way shear area in concrete footing design (ft, m)
LL live load
LRFD Load and Resistance Factor Design
m mass (lb-mass, g, kg);
meters
mm millimeters
M moment of a force or couple (lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m);
bending moment (lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m);
masonry mortar strength designation

16
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

Ma required bending moment in steel ASD beam design (unified) (lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
MA moment value at quarter point of unbraced beam length for LRFD beam design (lb-ft, kip-ft,
N-m, kN-m)
MB moment value at half point of unbraced beam length for LRFD beam design (lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m,
kN-m)
MC moment value at three quarter point of unbraced beam length for LRFD beam design (lb-ft,
kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
Mm moment capacity of a reinforced masonry beam (lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
Mn nominal flexure strength with the full section at the yield stress for LRFD steel beam design
(lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m);
nominal flexure strength with the steel reinforcement at the yield stress and compressive stress
at the concrete design strength for reinforced beam design (lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
Moverturning resulting moment from all forces on a footing or retaining wall causing overturning (lb-ft,
kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
Mp (also Mult) internal bending moment when all fibers in a cross section reach the yield stress (lb-
ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
Mresist resulting moment from all forces on a footing or retaining wall resisting overturning (lb-ft, kip-
ft, N-m, kN-m)
Mu maximum moment from factored loads for LRFD beam design (lb-ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
Mult (also Mp) internal bending moment when all fibers in a cross section reach the yield stress (lb-
ft, kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
My internal bending moment when the extreme fibers in a cross section reach the yield stress (lb-ft,
kip-ft, N-m, kN-m)
M1 smaller end moment used to calculate Cm for combined stresses in a beam-column (lb-ft, kip-ft,
N-m, kN-m)
M2 larger end moment used to calculate Cm for combined stresses in a beam-column (lb-ft, kip-ft,
N-m, kN-m)
MPa megaPascals (106 Pa or 1 N/mm2)
n number of truss joints, nails or bolts;
modulus of elasticity transformation coefficient for steel to concrete or masonry
n.a. neutral axis (axis connecting beam cross-section centroids)
N Newtons (kg-m/sec2);
bearing-type connection with bolt threads included in shear plane;
normal load (lb, kip, N, kN);
masonry mortar strength designation;
bearing length on a wide flange steel section (in, mm);
number of stories
o point of overturning of a retaining wall, commonly at the toe
o.c. on-center
O point of origin;
masonry mortar strength designation

17
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

p pitch of nail or bolt spacing (in, ft, mm, m);

pressure (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa)
pA active soil pressure (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa)
plf pounds per linear foot (lb/ft)
psf pounds per square inch (lb/ft2)
psi pounds per square inch (lb/in2)
P force, concentrated (point) load (lb, kip, N, kN);
axial load in a column or beam-column (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pa allowable axial load (lb, kip, N, kN);
required axial force in ASD steel design (unified) (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pallowable allowable axial load (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pc available axial strength for steel unified design (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pcr critical (failure) load in column calculations (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pdowels nominal capacity of dowels from concrete column to footing in concrete design ((lb, kip, N,
kN)
Pe1 Euler buckling strength in steel unified design (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pn nominal column or bearing load capacity in LRFD steel and concrete design (lb, kip, N, kN);
nominal axial load for a tensile member or connection in LRFD steel (lb, kip, N, kN)
Po maximum axial force with no concurrent bending moment in a reinforced concrete column (lb,
kip, N, kN)
Pr required axial force in steel unified design (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pu factored column load calculated from load factors in LRFD steel and concrete design (lb, kip,
N, kN);
factored axial load for a tensile member or connection in LRFD steel (lb, kip, N, kN)
Pa Pascals (N/m2)
q shear flow (lb/in, kips/ft, N/m, kN/m);
soil bearing pressure (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa)
qallowed allowable soil bearing pressure (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa)
qg gross allowed soil pressure (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa)
qnet net allowed soil bearing pressure (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa)
qu ultimate soil bearing strength in allowable stress design (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m, Pa, MPa);
factored soil bearing pressure in concrete design from load factors (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m, Pa,
MPa)
Q first moment area used in shearing stress calculations (in3, mm3, m3):
generic axial load quantity for LRFD design (also see R)
Qconnected first moment area used in shearing stress calculations for built-up beams (in3, mm3, m3)
Qx first moment area about an x axis (using y distances) (in3, mm3, m3)
Qy first moment area about an y axis (using x distances) (in3, mm3, m3)
r radius of a circle or arc (in, mm, m);
radius of gyration (in, mm, m)

18
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

ro polar radius of gyration (in, mm, m)

rx radius of gyration with respect to an x-axis (in, mm, m)
ry radius of gyration with respect to a y-axis(in, mm, m)
R force, reaction or resultant (lb, kip, N, kN);
radius of curvature of a beam (ft, m);
rainwater or ice load for LRFD design;
generic load quantity (force, shear, moment, etc.) for LRFD design (also see Q);
radius of curvature of a laminated arch (ft, m)
Ra required strength (ASD-unified) (also see Va, Ma)
Rn concrete beam design ratio = Mu/bd2 (lb/in2, MPa)
nominal value for LRFD design to be multiplied by (also see Pn, Mn)
nominal value for ASD design to be divided by the safety factor
Ru design value for LRFD design based on load factors (also see Pu, Mu)
Rx reaction or resultant component in the x coordinate direction (lb, kip, N, kN)
Ry reaction or resultant component in the y coordinate direction (lb, kip, N, kN)
s length of a segment of a thin walled section (in, mm);
spacing of stirrups in reinforced concrete beams (in, mm);
longitudinal center-to-center spacing of any two consecutive holes (in, mm)
s.w. self-weight
S section modulus (in3, mm3, m3);
snow load for LRFD design;
allowable strength per length of a weld for a given size (lb/in, kips/in, N/mm, kN/m);
masonry mortar strength designation
Srequired section modulus required to not exceed allowable bending stress (in3, mm3, m3)
Sx section modulus with respect to the x-centroidal axis (in3, mm3, m3)
Sy section modulus with respect to the y-centroidal axis (in3, mm3, m3)
SC slip critical bolted connection
S4S surface-four-sided
t thickness (in, mm, m)
tf thickness of the flange of a steel beam cross section (in, mm, m)
tw thickness of the web of a steel beam cross section (in, mm, m)
T tension label;
tensile force (lb, kip, N, kN);
torque (lb-ft, k-ft, N-m, kN-m);
throat size of a weld (in, mm);
effect of thermal load for LRFD design;
period of vibration (sec)
Ts tension force in the steel reinforcement for masonry design (lb, kip, N, kN)
U shear lag factor for steel tension member design (see Ae and Anet)
Ubs reduction coefficient for block shear rupture
v shear force per unit length (lb/ft, k/ft, N/m, kN/m) (see q)
19
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

V volume (in3, ft3, mm3, m3);

shear force (lb, k, N, kN);
wind speed (mi/hr, m/hr)
Va required shear in steel ASD design (unified) (lb, kip, N, kN)
Vc shear force capacity in concrete (lb, kip, N, kN)
Vn nominal shear strength capacity for LRFD beam design (lb, kip, N, kN)
Vs shear force capacity in steel shear stirrups(lb, kip, N, kN)
Vu maximum shear from factored loads for LRFD design (lb, kip, N, kN);
shear at a distance d away from the face of support for reinforced concrete beam design (lb,
kip, N, kN)
Vu1 maximum one-way shear from factored loads for LRFD beam design (lb, kip, N, kN)
Vu2 maximum two-way shear from factored loads for LRFD beam design (lb, kip, N, kN)
w load per unit length on a beam (lb/ft, k/ft, N/m, kN/m) (also );
load per unit area (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa);
width dimension (in, ft, mm, m)
wadjusted adjusted distributed load for equivalent live load deflection limit (lb/ft, kip/ft, N/m, kN/m)
wc weight of reinforced concrete per unit volume (lb/ft3, N/m3)
wequivalent the equivalent distributed load derived from the maximum bending moment (lb/ft, kip/ft,
N/m, kN/m)
wu factored load per unit length on a beam from load factors (lb/ft, kip/ft, N/m, kN/m);
factored load per unit area on a surface from load factors (lb/ft2, kip/ft2, N/m2, kN/m2)
W weight (lb, kip, N, kN);
total load from a uniform distribution (lb, kip, N, kN);
wind load for LRFD design;
wide flange shape designation (i.e. W 21 x 68)
x a distance in the x direction (in, ft, mm, m);
the distance from the top of a masonry or concrete beam to the neutral axis (in, mm, m) (see c)
x the distance in the x direction from a reference axis to the centroid of a shape (in, mm)
x the distance in the x direction from a reference axis to the centroid of a composite shape (in,
mm)
X bearing-type connection with bolt threads excluded from shear plane
y a distance in the y direction (in, ft, mm, m);
distance from the neutral axis to the y-level of a beam cross section (in, mm)
y the distance in the y direction from a reference axis to the centroid of a shape (in, mm)
y the distance in the y direction from a reference axis to the centroid of a composite shape (in,
mm)
Z plastic section modulus of a steel beam (in3, mm3);
lateral design value for a single fastener in a timber connection (lb/nail, k/bolt)
Zx plastic section modulus of a steel beam with respect to the x axis (in3, mm3)
' symbol for feet

20
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

" symbol for inches

# symbol for pounds
= symbol for equal to
symbol for approximately equal to
symbol for proportional to
symbol for less than or equal to
symbol for integration
coefficient of thermal expansion (/C, /F);
angle, in a math equation (degrees, radians)
angle, in a math equation (degrees, radians);
ratio of long side to short side of the column in concrete footing design
1 coefficient for determining stress block height, a, based on concrete strength, fc ;
coefficient for determining stress block height, c, in masonry LRFD design
elongation (in, mm)
P elongation due to axial load (in, mm)
s shear deformation (in, mm)
T elongation due to change in temperature (in, mm)
beam deflection (in, mm);
an increment
LL beam deflection due to live load (in, mm)
max maximum calculated beam deflection (in, mm)
TL beam deflection due to total load (in, mm)
x beam deflection in beam diagrams and formulas (in, mm)
T change in temperature (C, F)
strain (no units)
t thermal strain (no units)
y yield strain (no units)
diameter symbol;
angle of twist (degrees, radians);
resistance factor in LRFD steel design and reinforced concrete design
b resistance factor for flexure in LRFD design
c resistance factor for compression in LRFD design
t resistance factor for tension in LRFD design
v resistance factor for shear in LRFD design

21
ARCH 331 Symbols Su2015abn

Poissons ratio;
coefficient of static friction
specific gravity of a material (lb/in3, lb/ft3, N/m3,kN/m3);
angle, in a math equation (degrees, radians);
shearing strain;
load factor in LRFD design
D dead load factor in LRFD design
L live load factor in LRFD design
angle, in a trig equation, ex. sin (degrees, radians);
slope of the deflection of a beam at a point (degrees, radians)
pi (180)
radial distance (in, mm);
radius of curvature in beam deflection relationships (ft, m);
reinforcement ratio in concrete beam design = As/bd
b balanced reinforcement ratio in masonry design
balanced balanced reinforcement ratio in concrete beam design
g reinforcement ratio in concrete column design = Ast/Ag
max maximum reinforcement ratio allowed in concrete beam design for ductile behavior
engineering symbol for normal stress (axial or bending)
engineering symbol for shearing stress
c shear strength in concrete design
load per unit length on a beam (lb/ft, kip/ft, N/m, kN/m) (see w);
load per unit area (lb/ft2, kips/ft2, N/m2, Pa, MPa)
load per unit volume (lb/ft, kip/ft, N/m, kN/m) (see )
summation symbol
safety factor for ASD of steel (unified)
relative stiffness of columns to beams in a rigid connection (see G)

22
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Structural Glossary

Allowable strength: Nominal strength divided by the safety factor.

Allowable stress: Allowable strength divided by the appropriate section property, such as section
modulus or cross section area.
Applicable building code: Building code und which the structure is designed.
ASD (Allowable Strength Design): Method of proportioning structural components such that the
allowable strength equals or exceeds the required strength of the component under the action
of the ASD load combinations.
ASD load combination: Load combination in the applicable building code intended for
allowable strength design (allowable stress design).
ASTM standards: The American Society of Testing and Materials specifies standards for
performance and testing of construction materials.
Axial force: A force that is acting along the longitudinal axis of a structural member.
Base shear: A lateral (wind or seismic) force acting at the base of a structure.
Beam: Structural member that has the primary function of resisting bending moments.
Beam-column: Structural member that resists both axial force and bending moment.
Bearing (local compressive yielding): Limit state of local compressive yielding due to the action
of a member bearing against another member or surface.
Bending moment: A force rotating about a point; causes bending in beams, etc.
Block shear rupture: In a connection, limit state of tension fracture along one path and shear
yielding or shear fracture along another path.
Bracing: Diagonal members that are used to stiffen a structure, by utilizing the inherent in-plane
stiffness of a triangular framework.
Braced frame: An essentially vertical truss system that provides resistance to lateral forces and
provides stability for the structural system.
Buckling: Limit state of sudden change in the geometry of a structure or any of its elements
under a critical loading condition.
Buckling strength: Nominal strength for buckling or instability limit states.
Built-up member, cross-section, section, shape: Member, cross-section, section or shape
fabricated from elements that are nailed, welded, glued or bolted together.
Camber: Curvature fabricated into a beam or truss so as to compensate for deflection induced by
loads.
Cantilevers: Structural elements or systems that are supported only at one end.
Cement: The generic name for cementitious (binder) materials used in concrete, which is a
commonly used building material.
Center of gravity: The location of resultant gravity forces on an object or objects.
Centroid: The center of mass of a shape or object.

23
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Chord member: Primary member that extends, usually horizontally, through a truss connection.
Cold-rolled steel structural member: Shape manufactured by roll forming cold-or hot- rolled
coils or sheets without manifest addition of heat such as would be required for hot forming.
Collector: An element that transfers load from a diaphragm to a resisting element.
Column: Structural member that has the primary function of resisting axial force.
Component (of vector): One of several vectors combined to a resultant vector.
Composite: Condition in which steel and concrete elements and members work as a unit in the
distribution of internal forces.
Composite materials: Those consisting of a combination of two of more distinct materials,
together yielding superior characteristics to those of the individual constituents.
Compression: A force that tends to shorten or crush a member or material.
Concentrated force: A force acting on a single point.
Concentrated load: An external concentrated force (also known as a point load).
Concrete: Material composed mainly of cement, crushed rock or gravel, sand and water.
Concrete crushing: Limit state of compressive failure in concrete having reached the ultimate
strain.
Connection: A connection joins members to transfer forces or moments from one to the other.
Cope: Cutout made in a structural member to remove a flange and conform to the shape of an
intersecting member.
Couple: A couple is a system of two equal forces of opposite direction offset by a distance. A
couple causes a moment whose magnitude equals the magnitude of the force times the offset
distance.
Cover plate: Plate welded or bolted to the flange of a member to increase cross-sectional area,
section modulus or moment of inertia.
Creep: Plastic deformation that proceeds with time.
Curvature: The geometric quantity defined by the inverse of the radius of curvature, 1/R
Damping: Reduces vibration amplitude, like amplitude seismic vibration.
Dead load: The weight of a structure or anything permanently attached to it.
Deflection: Deflection is the vertical moment under gravity load of beams for example, while
lateral movement under wind of seismic load is called drift.
Deformation: A change of the shape of an object or material.
Design load: Applied load determined in accordance with either LRFD load combinations or
ASD load combinations, whichever is applicable.
Design strength: Resistance factor multiplied by the nominal strength, Rn.
Design stress range: Magnitude of change in stress due to the repeated application and removal
of service live loads. For locations subject to stress reversal it is the algebraic difference of
the peak stresses.

24
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Design stress: Design strength divided by the appropriate section property, such as section
modulus or cross section area.
Determinate structure: A structure with the number of reactions equal to the number of static
equations (3).
Diagonal Bracing: Inclined structural member carrying primarily axial force in a braced fame.
Diaphragm plate: Plate possessing in-plane shear stiffness and strength, used to transfer forces to
the supporting elements.
Diaphragm: Roof, floor or other membrane or bracing system that transfers in-plane forces to
the lateral force resisting system.
Displacement: May be a translation, a rotation, or a combination of both.
Distributed load: An external force which acts over a length or an area.
Double curvature: Deformed shape of a beam with one or more inflection points within the span.
Double-concentrated forces: Two equal and opposite forces that form a couple on the same side
of the loaded member.
Drift: Lateral deflection of structure due to lateral wind or seismic load.
Ductibility: The capacity of a material to deform without breaking; it is measured as the ratio of
total strain at failure, divided by the strain at the elastic limit.
Durability: Ability of a material, element or structure to perform its intended function for its
required life without the need for replacement or significant repair, but subject to normal
maintenance.
Dynamic equilibrium: Equilibrium of a moving object without change of motion.
Dynamic load: Cyclic load, such as gusty wind or seismic loads.
Effective length factor, K: Ratio between the effective length and the unbraced length of the
member.
Effective length: Length of an otherwise identical column with the same strength when analyzed
with pinned end conditions.
Effective net area: Net area modified to account for the effect of shear lag.
Effective section modulus: Section modulus reduced to account for buckling of slender
compression elements.
Effective width: Reduced width of a plate or slab with an assumed uniform stress distribution
which produces the same effect on the behavior of a structural member as the actual plate or
slab with its nonuniform stress distribution.
Elastic: A material or structure is elastic if it returns to its original geometry upon unloading.
Elastic/plastic: Materials that have both an elastic zone and a plastic zone (i.e. steel).
Elastic limit: The point of a stress/strain graph beyond which deformation of a material is plastic,
i.e. remains permanently deformed.
Elastic modulus: The linear slope value relating material stress to strain.
End-bearing pile: A pile supported on firm soil or rock.

25
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Energy: The work to move a body a distance; energy is the product of forces times distance.
Epicenter: The point on the Earths surface above the hypocenter where an earthquake originates.
Equilibrium: An object is in equilibrium if the resultant of all forces acting on it has zero
magnitude.
External force: A force acting on an object; external forces are also called applied forces.
Factored load: Product of a load factor and the nominal load.
Fatigue: Limit state of crack initiation and growth resulting from repeated application of live
loads, usually by reversing the loading direction.
Fillet weld: Weld of generally triangular cross section made between intersecting surfaces of
elements.
Fitted bearing stiffener: Stiffener used at a support or concentrated load that fits tightly against
one or both flanges of a beam so as to transmit load through bearing.
Fixed connection: A connection that resists axial and shear forces and bending moments.
Flexure: Bending deformation (of increasing curvature).
Flexural buckling: Buckling mode in which a compression member deflects laterally without
twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
Flexural-torsional buckling: Buckling mode in which a compression member bends and twists
simultaneously without change in cross-sectional shape.
Force: Resultant of distribution of stress over a prescribed area, or an action that tends to change
the shape of an object, move an object, or change the motion of an object.
Foundations: There are two basic types: shallow, which includes pad footing, strip footings
and rafts and deep i.e. piles. The choice is a function of the strength and stiffness of the
underlying strata and the load to be carried, the aim being to limit differential settlement on
the structure and more importantly the finishes.
Fully restrained moment connection: Connection capable of transferring moment with negligible
rotation between connected members.
Funicular: The shape of a chain or string suspended form two points under any load.
Gravity: An attractive force between objects; each object accelerates at the attractive force
divided by its mass.
Groove weld: Weld in a groove between connection elements.
Gusset plate: Plate element connecting truss members of a strut or brace to a beam or column.
Hertz: Cycles per second.
Horizontal diaphragm: A floor or roof deck to resist lateral load.
Horizontal shear: Force at the interface between steel and concrete surfaces in a composite beam.
Indeterminate structure: A structure with more unknown reactions than static equations (3).
Inelastic: Inelastic (plastic) strain implies permanent deformation.
Inertia: Tendency of objects at rest to remain at rest and objects in motion to remain in motion.

26
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

In-plane instability: Limit state of a beam-column bent about its major axis while lateral
buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is prevented by lateral bracing.
Instability: Limit state reached in the loading of a structural component, frame or structure in
which a slight disturbance in the loads or geometry produces large displacements.
Internal force: The force within an object that resists external forces, also called resisting force.
Joint: Area where two or more ends, surfaces, or edges are attached. Categorized by type of
fastener or weld used and method of force transfer.
Joist: A repetitive light beam.
K-connection: Connection in which forces in branch members or connecting elements transverse
to the main member are primarily equilibrated by forces in other branch members or
connecting elements on the same side of the main member.
Kern: The core of a post or other compression member which limits eccentric stresses being
tensile.
Lacing: Plate, angle or other steel shape, in a lattice configuration, that connects two steel shapes
together.
Lap joint: Joint between two overlapping connection elements in parallel planes.
Lateral bracing: Diagonal bracing, shear walls or equivalent means for providing in-plane
lateral stability.
Lateral load resisting system: Structural system designed to resist lateral loads and provide
stability for the structure as a whole.
Lateral load: Load, such as that produced by wind or earthquake effects, acting in a lateral
direction.
Lateral-torsional buckling: Buckling mode of a flexural member involving deflection normal to
the plane of bending occurring simultaneously with twist about the shear center of the cross-
section.
Length effects: Consideration of the reduction in strength of a member based on its unbraced
length.
Limit state: Condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for service and is judged
either to be no longer useful for its intended function (serviceability limit state) or to have
reached its ultimate load-carrying capacity (strength limit state).
Linear: A structural or material behavior is linear if its deformation is directly proportional to the
loading.
Line of action: The line of action defines the location and incline of a vector.
Linear elastic: A force-displacement relationship which is both linear and elastic.
Live load: Any load not permanently attached to the structure.
Load: Force or other action that results from the weight of building materials, occupants and
their possessions, environmental effects, differential movement, or restrained dimensional
changes.
Load effect: Forces, stresses and deformations produced in a structural component by the applied
loads.

27
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Load factor: Factor that accounts for deviations of the nominal load from the actual load, for
uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect and for the probability
that more than one extreme load will occur simultaneously.
Local bending: Limit state of large deformation of a flange under a concentrated tensile force.
Local buckling: Limit state of buckling of a compression element within a cross section.
Local crippling: Limit state of local failure of web plate in the immediate vicinity of a
concentrated load or reaction.
Local yielding: Yielding that occurs in a local area of an element.
LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor Design): Method of proportioning structural components
such that the design strength equals or exceeds the required strength of the component under
the action of the LRFD load combinations.
LRFD load combination: Load combination in the applicable building code intended for strength
design (load and resistance factor design).
Main member: Chord member or column to which branch members or other connecting
elements are attached.
Mass: Mass is the property of an object to resist acceleration.
Magnitude: a scalar value of physical units, such as force or displacement.
Modulus of elasticity: The proportional constant relating stress/strain of material in the linear
elastic range: calculated as stress divided by strain. The modulus of elasticity is the slope of
the stress-strain graph, usually denoted as E, also as Youngs Modulus Y, or E-Modulus.
Moment: A force causing rotation without translation; defined as force times lever arm.
Moment of inertia: Moment of inertia is the capacity of an object to resist bending or buckling,
defined as the sum of all parts of the object times the square of their distance from the
centroid.
Moment connection: Connection that transmits bending moment between connected members.
Moment frame: Framing system that provides resistance to lateral loads and provides stability to
the structural system, primarily by shear and flexure of the framing members and their
connections.
Net area: Gross area reduced to account for removed material.
Nominal dimension: Designated or theoretical dimension, as in the tables of section properties.
Nominal load: Magnitude of the load specified by the applicable building code.
Nominal strength: Strength of a structure or component (without the resistance factor or safety
factor applied) to resist load effects, as determined in accordance with this Specification.
Normal stress: Stress acting parallel to the axis of an object in compression and tension; normal
stress is usually simply called stress.
Out-of-plane buckling: Limit state of a beam-column bent about its major axis while lateral
buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is not prevented by lateral bracing.
Overlap connection: Connection in which intersecting branch members overlap.
Overturn: Topping, or tipping over under lateral load.

28
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Permanent load: Load in which variations over time are rare or of small magnitude. All other
loads are variable loads.
Pin connection: A pin connection transfers axial and shear forces but no bending moment.
Pin support: A pin support resists axial and shear forces but no bending moment.
Pitch: Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of fasteners. Center-to-center spacing bolt threads
along axis of bolt.
Plastic: Material may be elastic or plastic. Plastic deformation of a structure or material under
load remains after the load is removed.
Plastic analysis: Structural analysis based on the assumption of rigid-plastic behavior, in other
words, that equilibrium is satisfied throughout the structure and the stress is at or below the
yield stress.
Plastic hinge: Yielded zone that forms in a structural member when the plastic moment is
attained. The member is assumed to rotate further as if hinged, except that such rotation is
restrained by the plastic moment.
Plastic moment: Theoretical resisting moment developed within a fully yielded cross section.
Plastic stress distribution method: Method for determining the stresses in a composite member
assuming that the steel section and the concrete in the cross section are fully plastic.
Plate girder: Built-up beam.
Plug weld: Weld made in a circular hole in one element of a joint fusing that element to another
element.
Post-buckling strength: Load or force that can be carried by an element, member, or frame after
initial buckling has occurred.
Pressure: Similar to stress, the force intensity at a point, except that pressure is acting on the
surface of an object rather than within the object.
Prying action: Amplification of the tension force in a bolt caused by leverage between the point
of applied load, the bolt and the reaction of the connected elements.
Punching load: Component of branch member force perpendicular to a chord.
P- effect: Effect of loads acting on the deflected shape of a member between joints or nodes.
P- effect: Effect of loads acting on the displaced location of joints or nodes in a structure. In
tiered building structures, this is the effect of loads acting on the laterally displaced location
of floors and roofs.
Radius of gyration: A mathematical property, determining the stability of a cross section, defined
as: r = I A , where I = moment of inertia and A = cross section area.

Reaction: The response of a structure to resist applied load.

Required strength: Forces, stresses and deformations acting on the structural component,
determined by either structural analysis, for the LRFD or ASD load combinations, as
appropriate, or as specified by the Specification or Standard.
Resilience: The property of structures to absorb energy without permanent deformation of
fracture.

29
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Resistance factor: Factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength from
the actual strength and for the manner and consequences of failure.
Resultant: The resultant of a system of forces is a single force or moment whose magnitude,
direction, and location make it statically equivalent to the system of forces.
Retaining wall: Wall used to hold back soil or other materials.
Roller support: In two dimensions, a roller support restrains one translation degree of freedom.
Rupture strength: In a connection, strength limited by tension or shear rupture.
Safety factor: Factor that accounts for deviations of the actual strength from the nominal strength,
deviations of the actual load from the nominal load, uncertainties in the analysis that
transforms the load into a load effect, and for the manner and consequence of failure.
Scalar: A mathematical entity with a numeric value but no direction (in contrast to a vector).
Section modulus: The property of a cross section defined by its shape and orientation; section
modulus is denoted S, and S = I/c, where I = moment of inertia about the centroid and c is the
distance from the centroid to the edge of the section,
Service load combination: Load combination under which serviceability limit states are
evaluated.
Service load: Load under which serviceability limit states are evaluated.
Serviceability limit state: Limiting condition affecting the ability of a structure to preserve its
appearance, maintainability, durability or the comfort of its occupants or function of
machinery, under normal usage.
Shear: A sliding force, pushing and pulling in opposite directions.
Shear buckling: Buckling mode in which a plate element, such as the web of a beam, deforms
under pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
Shear connector: Headed stud, cannel, plate or other shape welded to a steel member and
embedded in concrete of a composite member to transmit shear forces at the interface
between the two materials.
Shear connector strength: Limit state of reaching the strength of a shear connector, as governed
by the connector bearing against the concrete in the slab or by the tensile strength of the
connector.
Shear modulus: The ratio of shear stress divided by the shear strain in a linear elastic material.
Shear rupture: Limit state of rupture (fracture) due to shear.
Shear strain: Strain measuring the intensity of racking in a material. Shear strain is measured as
the change in angle of a small square part of a material.
Shear stress: Stress acting parallel to an imaginary plane cut through an object.
Shear wall: Wall that provides resistance to lateral loads in the plane of the wall and provides
stability for the structural system.
Shear yielding: Yielding that occurs due to shear.
Shear yielding (punching): In a connection, limit state based on out-of-plane shear strength of
the chord wall to which branch members are attached.

30
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Slip: In a bolted connection, limit state of relative motion of connected parts prior to the
attainment of the available strength of the connection.
Slip-critical connection: Bolted connection designed to resist movement by friction on the faying
surface of the connection under the clamping forces of the bolts.
Slot weld: Weld made in an elongated hole fusing an element to another element.
Splice: Connection between two structural elements joined at their ends to forma single, longer
element.
Stability: Condition reached in the loading of a structural component, frame or structure in which
a slight disturbance in the loads or geometry does not produce large displacements.
Static equilibrium: Equilibrium of an object at rest.
Stiffness: The capacity of a material to resist deformation.
Stiffened element: Flat compression element with adjoining out-of-plane elements along both
edges parallel to the direction of loading.
Stiffener: Structural element, usually an angle or plate, attached to a member to distribute load,
transfer shear or prevent buckling.
Stiffness: Resistance to deformation of a member or structure, measured by the ratio of the
applied force (or moment) to the corresponding displacement (or rotation).
Strain: Change of length along an axis, calculated as = L/L, where L is the original length and
L is the change of length.
Strength: The capacity of a material to resist breaking.
Strength design: A design method based on factored load and ultimate strength for concrete
design.
Strength limit state: Limiting condition affecting the safety of the structure, in which the ultimate
load-carrying capacity is reached.
Stress: Force per unit area caused by axial force, moment, shear or torsion.
Stress concentration: Localized stress considerably higher than average (even in uniformly
loaded cross sections of uniform thickness) due to abrupt changes in geometry or localized
loading.
Stress resultant: A system of forces which is statically equivalent to a stress distribution over an
area.
Stress: The internal reaction to an applied force, measured in force per unit area.
Structure: Composition of elements that define form and resist applied loads.
Structural Aluminum: Elements manufactured of aluminum for structural purposes, generally 50%
larger than comparable steel elements due to the lower modulus of elasticity.
Structural Steel: Elements manufactured of steel with properties designated by ASTM standards,
including A36, A992 & A572.
Strong axis: Major principal centroidal axis of a cross section.
Structural analysis: Determination of load effects on members and connections based on
principles of structural mechanics.

31
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Structural component: Member, connector, connecting element or assemblage.

Structural system: An assemblage of load-carrying components that are joined together to
provide interaction or interdependence.
T-connection: Connection in which the branch member or connecting element is perpendicular
to the main member and in which forces transverse to the main member are primarily
equilibrated by shear in the main member.
Tensile rupture: Limit state of rupture (fracture) due to tension.
Tensile strength (of material): Maximum tensile stress that a material is capable of sustaining as
defined by ASTM.
Tensile strength (of member): Maximum tension force that a member is capable of sustaining.
Tensile yielding: Yielding that occurs due to tension.
Tension: A force that tends to elongate or enlarge an object.
Tension and shear rupture: In a bolt, limit state of rupture (fracture) due to simultaneous tension
and shear force.
Tie plate: Plate element used to join parallel components of a built-up column, girder or strut
rigidly connected to the parallel components and designed to transmit shear between them.
Torsion: A twisting moment.
Torsional bracing: Bracing resisting twist of a beam or column.
Torsional buckling: Buckling mode in which a compression member twists about its shear center
axis.
Torsional yielding: Yielding that occurs due to torsion.
Translation: Motion of an object along a straight line path without rotation.
Transverse reinforcement: Steel reinforcement in the form of closed ties or welded wire fabric
providing confinement for the concrete surrounding the steel shape core in an encased
concrete composite column.
Transverse stiffener: Web stiffener oriented perpendicular to the flanges, attached to the web.
Truss: A linear support system consisting of triangular panels usually with pin joints.
Ultimate strength: The utmost strength reached by a material before breaking.
Unbraced length: Distance between braced points of a member, measured between the centers of
gravity of the bracing members.
Uneven load distribution: In a connection, condition in which the load is not distributed through
the cross section of connected elements in a manner that can be readily determined.
Unframed end: The end of a member not restrained against rotation by stiffeners of connection
elements.
Unstiffened elements: Flat compression element with an adjoining out-of-plane element along
one edge parallel to the direction of loading.
Uplift: Upward force, usually wind uplift.
Variable load: Load not classified as permanent load.

32
ARCH 331 Structural Glossary S2014abn

Vector: A mathematical entity having a magnitude, line of action, and a direction in space.
Vertical bracing system: System of shear walls, braced frames or both, extending through one or
more floors of a building.
Vertical diaphragm: A wall to resist lateral load.
Vibration: The cyclic motion of an object.
Wall: A vertical element to resist load and define space; shear walls also resist lateral loads.
Weak axis: Minor principal centroidal axis of a cross section.
Web buckling: Limit state of lateral instability of a web.
Web compression buckling: Limit state of out-of-plane compression buckling of the web due to a
concentrated compression force.
Web sideway buckling: Limit state of lateral buckling of the tension flange opposite the location
of a concentrated compression force.
Weld metal: Portion of a fusion weld that has been completely melted during welding. Weld
metal has elements of filler metal and base metal melted in the weld thermal cycle.
Working stress: The same as allowable stress.
Yield moment: In a member subjected to bending, the moment at which the extreme outer fiber
first attains the yield stress.
Yield point: First stress in a material at which an increase in strain occurs without an increase in
stress as defined by ASTM.
Yield strength: Stress at which a material exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the
proportionality of stress to strain as defined by ASTM.
Yield strain: The strain of a material which occurs at the level of yield stress.
Yield stress: Generic term to denote either yield point or yield strength, as appropriate for the
material.
Yielding: Limit state of inelastic deformation that occurs after the yield stress is reached.
Yielding (plastic moment): Yielding throughout the cross section of a member as the bending
moment reaches the plastic moment.
Yielding (yield moment): Yielding at the extreme fiber on the cross section of a member when the
bending moment reached the yield moment.

References:
AISC, Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings, 13th ed. (2005)
Jacqueline Glass, Encyclopaedia of Architectural Technology, Wiley, Cornwall (2002)

33
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.1 F2009abn

Structural Systems
from Architectural Structures,
Wayne Place, Wiley, 2007:

35
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.1 F2009abn

Design Criteria for the Behavior of the Overall System

Components of a system consist of vertical and horizontal elements. Connections of the vertical
to horizontal elements are also necessary. For the structural elements to behave and respond as
designed, the system must have the following qualities:
the components stay together
the system resists overturning, sliding, twisting and excessive distortion
the system has internal stability
the system has overall strength and stiffness

Order of Design

There is no set order to design of a structural system. But there are certain stages that can be
recognized. These may be referred to as preliminary, revised and final, or more formally as:

First order: which can include determining structural type and organization, design intent, and
contextual or programmatic emphasis. Preliminary member size charts are useful at this stage.

Second order: which can include evaluating structural strategies, choice of construction
materials, and structural system options with those materials. System selection design aids are
useful at this stage.

Third order: which, after the design has been narrowed down, is where analysis and design
(shape and size) of individual structural elements (beams, columns, connections, etc.) is
performed. The outcome here may direct further first order or second order investigations!!!
36
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.1 F2009abn

from Understanding Structures, Fuller Moore, McGraw-Hill, 1999:

37
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.1 F2009abn

from The Architects Studio Companion, 3rd ed., Allen & Iano, Wiley, 2002

38
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.1 F2009abn

System Types by Material from Structures, Schodek & Bechthold, 6th ed.. Pearson, 2008:

Timber Systems

Reinforced Concrete Systems

39
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.1 F2009abn

Reinforced Concrete Systems (continued)

Steel Systems

40
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.1 F2009abn

Steel Systems(continued)

41
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Structural Planning
Design Issues (Reference: The Architects Studio Companion, 3rd ed., Allen & Iano, Wiley, 2002)

Lateral Stability: Wind forces and inertial forces due to ground acceleration are two types of
lateral loads buildings must be designed to resist. Without resisting elements or systems, the
buildings will move a little, a lot, or suddenly. Stability is the ability to flex and not suddenly
snap or in other words, the ability to remain in the configuration intended to transfer load.

Resisting systems include shear walls, braced frames and rigid frames:

Configurations are important for the systems to be effective. Symmetrical or balanced

arrangements are the most effective for resisting the lateral forces from all directions.

43
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Vertical Load Resistance: Load bearing walls, columns and frames are examples of vertical
load resisting elements. They can support a variety of horizontal spanning elements, such as
beams and slabs. The order, or modular placement, becomes important, and uniform
arrangements are economical. Load bearing walls can also function as shear walls to resist
lateral loads. They are commonly constructed of reinforced concrete or masonry.

Horizontal Load Resistance: The combination of vertical and horizontal load resistance is
dependent upon construction materials and size or utility of spaces. Slabs can act as diaphragms
to transmit loads to the columns, shear wall or frames. They are commonly constructed of
reinforced concrete. Rigid frames are commonly steel or monolithically cast reinforced concrete.

44
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Multistory Design Issues: As a building gets taller, it is exposed to more wind load that it
must resist laterally. It also increases in mass at each story, which makes the inertial forces from
ground acceleration very complex. The behavior of a structure under these types of loads is
dependent upon the arrangement of the masses and the stiffness and placement of the horizontal
and vertical load resisting elements.

Cores are quite common to increase stiffness vertically. Unfortunately, they cant provide
effective horizontal load transfer, and should not be relied on as the sole lateral resistant
mechanism! Exterior bracing or tube formations, such as the Sears Tower in Chicago, are other
multistory configurations to resist lateral loads.

Vertical and horizontal discontinuities contribute to irregular or poor lateral response. Vertical
discontinuities include cut-outs in stories, or changes in plan vertically, while horizontal
continuities include problems such as soft stories which have different stiffness from the rest
of the structure, and unbalanced placement of shear walls.

45
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Structural Plans and Grids (Reference: Construction Graphics, 1st ed., Bisharat, Wiley, 2004)

Foundation

Footing Detail

46
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Steel

47
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Reinforced Masonry

Timber

48
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Common Span Lengths and Depths:

from Structures, 6th ed., Schodek & Bechthold, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2007

Span Range by System

49
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Timber

50
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Reinforced Concrete

51
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.2 F2009abn

Steel

52
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.3 F2014abn

Math for Structures

1. Parallel lines never intersect.

2. Two lines are perpendicular (or normal) when they intersect at a right angle = 90.

3. Intersecting (or concurrent) lines cross or meet at a point.

4. If two lines cross, the opposite angles are identical:

5. If a line crosses two parallel lines, the intersection angles with the same orientation are
identical:

6. If the sides of two angles are parallel and intersect in the same fashion, the angles are
identical.

7. If the sides of two angles are parallel, but intersect in the opposite fashion, the angles are
supplementary: + = 180.

8. If the sides of two angles are perpendicular and intersect in the same fashion, the angles are
identical.

53
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.3 F2014abn

9. If the sides of two angles are perpendicular, but intersect in the opposite fashion,
the angles are supplementary: + = 180.

10. If the side of two angles bisects a right angle, the angles are complimentary:
+ = 90.

11. If a right angle bisects a straight line, the remaining angles are
complimentary: + = 90.
90

12. The sum of the interior angles of a triangle = 180.

B
13. For a right triangle, that has one angle of 90, the sum of the other angles = 90.

90
C A
14. For a right triangle, the sum of the squares of the sides equals the square of the hypotenuse:
AB 2 + AC 2 = CB 2

15. Similar triangles have identical angles in the same orientation. Their sides are related by:

Case 1: A AB AC BC
= =
AD AE DE
C
B E
A
D
Case 2: A

C AB AC BC
= =
AB AC BC

C
B

B

54
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.3 F2014abn

16. For right triangles:

opposite side AB
sin = = sin =
hypotenuse CB B
adjacent side AC
cos = = cos =
hypotenuse CB
C A
opposite side AB
tan = = tan =
adjacent side AC
(SOHCAHTOA)

17. If an angle is greater than 180 and less than 360, sin will be less than 0.
If an angle is greater than 90 and less than 270, cos will be less than 0.
If an angle is greater than 90 and less than 180, tan will be less than 0.
If an angle is greater than 270 and less than 360, tan will be less than 0.

18. LAW of SINES (any triangle)

B C
sin sin sin
= =
A B C

A
19. LAW of COSINES (any triangle)
A2 = B 2 + C 2 2BC cos

20. Surfaces or areas have dimensions of width and length and units of length squared (ex. in2 or
inches x inches).

21. Solids or volumes have dimension of width, length and height or thickness and units of
length cubed (ex. m3 or m x m x m)

22. Force is defined as mass times acceleration. So a weight due to a mass is accelerated upon
by gravity: F = m g g = 9.81 m ft
2 = 32.17
sec sec 2
23. Weight can be determined by volume if the unit weight or density is known: W = V
where V is in units of length3 and is in units of force/unit volume

24. Algebra: If ab= cd then it can be rewritten:

a b + k = c d + k add a constant
c d = a b switch sides
c d divide both sides by b
a=
b
a d divide both sides by bc
=
c b

55
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.3 F2014abn

25. Cartesian Coordinate System

Y
. (x,y) - coordinates

O -origin X

26. Solving equations with one unknown:

1st order polynomial: 2x 1 = 0 L 2 x = 1L x= 1

2

b
ax + b = 0 L x=
a

2nd order polynomial b b 2 4ac two answers

2
ax + bx + c = 0 L x= (radical cannot be
2a negative)
x2 1 = 0L 0 02 4( 1)
x= L x = 1
(a = 1, b = 0, c = 1) 2 1

27. Solving 2 linear equations simultaneously: also see item #31

One equation consisting only of variables can be rearranged and then substituted into the
second equation:

ex: 5 x 3y = 0 add 3y to both sides to rearrange 5x = 3y

4x y = 2 divide both sides by 5 x = 35 y
substitute x into the other equation 4( 35 y) y = 2
add like terms 7
5 y = 2
simplify y= 10
7 = 1.43

Equations can be added and factored to eliminate one variable:

ex: 2x + 3y = 8 2x + 3y = 8
4x y = 2 multiply both sides by 3 12 x 3 y = 6
and add 14 x + 0 = 14
simplify x =1
put x=1 in an equation for y 2 1 + 3y = 8
simplify 3y = 6
y =2

56
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.3 F2014abn

28. Derivatives of polynomials dy

y = constant =0
dx
y=x dy
=1
dx
y = ax dy
=a
dx
dy
y = x2 = 2x
dx
dy
y = x3 = 3x 2
dx

29. The minimum and maximum of a function can be found by setting the derivative = 0 and
solving for the unknown variable.

30. Calculators (and software) process equations by an order of operations, which typically
means they process functions like exponentials and square roots before simpler functions
such as + or -. BE SURE to specify with parenthesis what order you want, or youll get the
wrong answers. It is also important to have degrees set in your calculator for trig functions.

For instance, Excel uses for sign (like -1) first, then will process exponents and square
roots, times and divide, followed by plus and minus. If you type 4x10^2 and really mean
(4x10)^2 you will get an answer of 400 instead of 1600.

31. Using a TI-83 Plus/84 to solve a system of linear equations in a matrix form with rref(:
Note: With a TI-83, use the single MATRX button.

Matrices of linear equations expect the coefficients in front of variable to be put in the same
order in each row, and the numerical solution (= to) as the last value. So for the 2nd set of
equations in item #27 ( 2 x + 3 y = 8 and 4 x y = 2 ), the matrix to enter would look like
2 3 8
4 1 2

1. Press 2nd x-1 (MATRIX). Press

to display the MATRIX EDIT MATRIX[A] 2 x3
menu. Press 1 to select 1:[A], [0 0 0 ]
[0 0 0 ]
2. Press 2 ENTER 3 ENTER to define a 2 x 3 matrix. The rectangular
cursor indicates the current element. Ellipses (...) indicate
additional columns beyond the screen. 1 , 1=0

3. Press 2 ENTER to enter the first element. The rectangular cursor moves to the second
column of the first row.
MATRIX[A] 2 x3
4. Press 3 ENTER 8 ENTER to complete the first row for 2 x + 3 y = 8 [2 0 0 ]
[0 0 0 ]
5. Press 4 ENTER -1 ENTER 2 ENTER to enter the second row for
4x y = 2
1 , 2=0

57
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.3 F2014abn

6. Press 2nd (QUIT) to return to the home screen. If necessary, press MATRIX[A] 2 x3
CLEAR to clear the home screen. Press 2nd x-1 (MATRIX)
to [2 3 8 ]
display the MATRIX MATH menu. Press  to wrap to the end of the [4 -1 2 ]
menu. Select B:rref( to copy rref( to the home screen.

7. Press 2nd x-1 (MATRIX) 1 to select 1:[A] from the MATRIX NAMES 2 , 3=2
menu. Press ) ENTER . The reduced row-echelon form of the
matrix is displayed and stored in Ans. rref(
1x + 0 y = 1 therefore x=1
0 x + 1y = 2 therefore y=2

rref([A])
[[1 0 1
0 1 2]]

58
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.4 F2009abn

Numerical Computations
from Statics and Strength of Materials, 5th ed. Morrow & Kokernak, Prentice Hall, 2004

59
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.4 F2009abn

60
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.5 F2009abn

Problem Solving, Units and Numerical Accuracy

Problem Solution Method:

1. Inputs GIVEN:
Outputs FIND: on graph paper
Critical Path SOLUTION

2. Draw simple diagram of body/bodies & forces acting on it/them.

3. Choose a reference system for the forces.

4. Identify key geometry and constraints.

5. Write the basic equations for force components.

6. Count the equations & unknowns.

7. SOLVE

8. Feel the validity of the answer. (Use common sense. Check units)

Example: Two forces, A & B, act on a particle. What is the resultant? B

1. GIVEN: Two forces on a particle and a diagram with size and orientation
A
FIND: The resultant of the two forces

SOLUTION:

2. Draw what you know (the diagram, any other numbers in the problem statement that
could be put on the drawing.)

3. Choose a reference system. What would be the easiest? Cartesian, radian?

4. Key geometry: the location of the particle as the origin of all the forces
Key constraints: the particle is free in space

5. Write equations:
size of A2 + size of B 2 = size of resultant
size of B
sin =
size of A + B
6. Count: Unknowns: 2, magnitude and direction Equations: 2 can solve

7. Solve: graphically or with equations

8. Feel: Is the result bigger than A and bigger than B? Is it in the right direction?
(like A & B)

61
ARCH 331 Note Set 2.5 F2009abn

Units

Units Mass Length Time Force

kg m
SI kg m s N=
s2
Absolute lb ft
lb ft s Poundal = 2
English s
Technical lbf s 2
slug = ft s lbforce
English ft
Engineering
lb ft s lbforce
English
lbforce = lb( mass ) 32.17 ft
s2

gravitational g c = 32 .17 ft
s2 (English)
constant
g c = 9.81 m (SI)
s2

conversions 1 in = 25.4 mm
(pg. vii) 1 lb = 4.448 N

Numerical Accuracy

Depends on 1) accuracy of data you are given

2) accuracy of the calculations performed

The solution CANNOT be more accurate than the less accurate of #1 and #2 above!

DEFINITIONS: precision the number of significant digits

accuracy the possible error

Relative error measures the degree of accuracy:

relative error
100 = degree of accuracy (%)
measurement
For engineering problems, accuracy rarely is less than 0.2%.

62
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

Forces and Vectors

Notation:
F = name for force vectors, as is A, B, tail = start of a vector (without
C, T and P arrowhead)
Fx = force component in the x direction tip = direction end of a vector (with
Fy = force component in the y direction arrowhead)
R = name for resultant vectors x = x axis direction
Rx = resultant component in the x y = y axis direction
direction = angle, in a trig equation, ex. sin ,
Ry = resultant component in the y that is measured between the x axis
direction and tail of a vector

Characteristics
Forces have a point of application tail of vector
size units of lb, K, N, kN
direction to a reference system, sense indicated by an arrow
Classifications include: Static & Dynamic
Structural types separated primarily into Dead Load and Live Load with further identification
as wind, earthquake (seismic), impact, etc.

Rigid Body
Ideal material that doesnt deform
Forces on rigid bodies can be internal within or at connections
or external applied

Rigid bodies can translate (move in a straight line)

or rotate (change angle)

Weight of truck is external (gravity)

Push by driver is external

Reaction of the ground on wheels is external

If the truck moves forward: it translates

If the truck gets put up on a jack: it rotates

63
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

Transmissibility: We can replace a force at a point on a body by that force on another point
on the body along the line of action of the force.

F F

External conditions havent changed

For the truck:

The same external forces will result in the same conditions for motion

Transmissibility applies to EXTERNAL forces. INTERNAL forces respond differently

when an external force is moved.

DEFINITION: 2D Structure - A structure that is flat and may contain a plane of symmetry.
All forces on this structure are in the same plane as the structure.

Internal and External

Internal forces occur within a member or between bodies within a system
External forces represent the action of other bodies or gravity on the rigid body

64
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

Force System Types

Collinear all forces along the same line

Coplanar all forces in the same plane

Space not concurrent or coplanar (all out there in 3 dimensions)

Further classification as

Concurrent all forces go through the same point

Parallel all forces are parallel

Graphical Addition
R
Parallelogram law: when adding two vectors acting at a point, the result is
the diagonal of the parallelogram
F
The tip-to-tail method is
R F
another graphical way to add
vectors.
P

With 3 (three) or more vectors, successive application of the parallelogram law will find the
resultant OR drawing all the vectors tip-to-tail in any order will find the resultant.

Rectangular Force Components and Addition

It is convenient to resolve forces into perpendicular components (at 90).
F
Parallelogram law results in a rectangle. y

Triangle rule results in a right triangle. Fy

x
F Fx
F
Fy
Fy

Fx
Fx

65
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

is: between x & F

Fx = Fcos magnitudes are scalar and can be negative
} Fx & Fy are vectors in x and y direction
Fy = Fsin

F= Fx2 + F y2

Fy
tan =
Fx

When 90 < < 270, Fx is negative

When 180 < < 360, Fy is negative
When 0 < < 90 and 180 < < 270, tan is positive
When 90 < < 180 and 270 < < 360, tan is negative

Addition (analytically) can be done by adding all the x components for a resultant x
component and adding all the y components for a resultant y component.

Ry
Rx = Fx , Ry = Fy and R = Rx2 + R 2y tan =
Rx

CAUTION: An interior angle, , between a vector and either

coordinate axis can be used in the trig functions. BUT No sign will
be provided by the trig function, which means you must give a sign
F
and determine if the component is in the x or y direction.
For example, F sin = opposite side, which would be negative in x!

66
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

Example 1 (page 9)

Steps:
1. GIVEN: Write down whats given (drawing
and numbers).
2. FIND: Write down what you need to find.
(resultant graphically)
3. SOLUTION:
4. Draw the 400 lb and 600 lb forces to scale with
tails at O. (If the scale isnt given, you must
choose one that fits on your paper, ie.
1 inch = 200 lb.)
5. Draw parallel reference lines at the ends of the
vectors.
6. Draw a line from O to the intersection of the
reference lines
7. Measure the length of the line
8. Convert the line length by the scale into pounds (by
multiplying by the force measure and dividing by
the scale value, ie X inches * 200 lb / 1 inch).
9. Measure the angle with respect to the positive x
axis.

67
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

Alternate solution:

4. Draw one vector

5. Draw the other vector at the TIP of the first one (away from the tip).
6. Draw a line from 0 to the tip of the final vector and continue at step 7

Example 2 (pg 12)

1.5 mm = 1 lb. or 1mm = 2/3 lb.

68
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

Example 3 (pg 16)

Also determine the embedment length, L, if the

anchor can resist 500 N for ever cm of embedment.

69
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.1 Su2015abn

Example 4 (pg 19) Determine the resultant vector analytically with the component method.

70
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.2 F2009abn

Moments

Notation:
d = perpendicular distance to a force M = moment due to a force
from a point W = name for force due to weight
F = name for force vectors or x = horizontal distance
magnitude of a force, as is P, Q, R = angle, in a trig equation, ex. sin ,
Fx = force component in the x direction that is measured between the x axis
Fy = force component in the y direction and tail of a vector

Moment of a Force about an Axis

Two forces of the same size and direction acting at different points are not equivalent. They
may cause the same translation, but they cause different rotation.

DEFINITION: Moment A moment is the tendency of a force to make a body rotate about
an axis. It is measured by Fd, where d is the distance perpendicular to the line of action of
the force and through the axis of rotation.

M = F d M = F d
(about A) (force at C)
C F F
C
A B
not equivalent A B

For the same force, the bigger the lever arm (or moment arm), the bigger the moment
magnitude, i.e. M A = F d1 < M A = F d 2

Units: SI: Nm, KNm

Engr. English: lb-ft, kip-ft

Sign conventions: Moments have magnitude and rotational direction:

positive - negative
CCW + CW -

71
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.2 F2009abn

Moments can be added as scalar quantities when there is a sign convention.

F
F
d
A B A B
d

+Fd -Fd
A B

Repositioning a force along its line of action results in the same moment about any axis.

B B
F
d d
A = A
d d
F

MA = Fd MA = Fd
MB = Fd + MB = Fd

A force is completely defined (except for its exact position on the line of action) by Fx, Fy,
and MA about A (size and direction).

The sign of the moment is determined by which side of the axis the force is on.

F
negative or
d positive
F
d
A

Varignons Theorem: The moment of a force about any axis is equal to the sum of moments
of the components about that axis.

Q F
F

P
d1
d2
d
.A .A
M = F d = P d1 + Q d 2
72
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.2 F2009abn

Proof 1: Resolve F into components along line BA and perpendicular to it (90).

d from A to line AB = 0
F F
d
d from A to F = dBA =
cos
B. d FBA = F sin

FBA
.A F = F cos
d
M = F d = FBA 0 F d BA = F cos = F d
cos

Proof 2: Resolve P and Q into PBA & P, and QBA & Q.

Q Q
Q
P
B. P
B. QBA .B
P
.A PBA .A .A
d from A to line AB = 0
MA by P = P d BA MA by Q = Q d BA
M = P d BA + (Q d BA )

and we know dBA from Proof 1, and by definition: P + Q.= F. We know dBA and F from
above, so again M = -FdBA = -Fd

By choosing component directions such that d = 0 to one of the components, we can simplify
many problems.

Example 1 (pg 24)

73
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.2 F2009abn

Example 2
(pg 26)

(Moment at A)

Moment Couples

Moment Couple: Two forces with equal magnitude, parallel lines of action and opposite
sense tend to make our body rotate even though the sum of forces is 0. The sum of the
moment of the forces about any axis is not zero.

d1 M = F d 2 F d1 = M
d A
d2 M = F (d2 d1 )

F M = F d : moment of the couple (CW)

M does not depend on where A is. M depends on the perpendicular distance between the line
of action of the parallel forces.

M for a couple (defined by F and d) is a constant. And the sense (+/-) is obtained by
observation.

Just as there are equivalent moments (other values of F and d that result in M) there are
equivalent couples. The magnitude is the same for different values of F and resulting d or
different values of d and resulting F.

M M
M = F d F= d=
300 N d F
100 mm 300 N 200 N 250 mm
120 N
120 N
200 N 150 mm

74
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.2 F2009abn

Equivalent Force Systems

Two systems of forces are equivalent if we can transform one of them into the other with:

1.) replacing two forces on a point by their resultant

2.) resolving a force into two components
3.) canceling two equal and opposite forces on a point
4.) attaching two equal and opposite forces to a point
5.) moving a force along its line of action
6.) replacing a force and moment on a point with a force on another (specific) point
7.) replacing a force on point with a force and moment on another (specific) point
* based on the parallelogram rule and the principle of transmissibility

The size and direction are important for a moment. The location on a body doesnt matter
because couples with the same moment will have the same effect on the rigid body.

Addition of Couples

Couples can be added as scalars.

Two couples can be replaced by a single couple with the magnitude of the algebraic sum of
the two couples.

Resolution of a Force into a Force and a Couple

The equivalent action of a force on a body can be reproduced by that force and a force
couple:

If wed rather have F acting at A which isnt in the line of action, we can instead add F and
F at A with no change of action by F. Now it becomes a couple of F separated by d and
the force F moved to A. The size is Fd=M

F F F
A A d
A -F A

The couple can be represented by a moment symbol:

F M=Fd
A
Any force can be replaced by itself at another point and the A
moment equal to the force multiplied by the distance between the
original line of action and new line of action.

75
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.2 F2009abn

Resolution of a Force into a Force and a Moment

Principle: Any force F acting on a rigid body (say the one at A) may be moved to any given
point A, provided that a couple M is added: the moment M of the couple must equal the
moment of F (in its original position at A) about A.

F F M=Fd
F F
A A d A
-F A A
A

IN REVERSE: A force F acting at A and a couple M may be combined into a single

resultant force F acting at A (a distance d away) where the moment of F about A is equal to
M.

Resultant of Two Parallel Forces

Gravity loads act in one direction, so we may have parallel forces on our structural elements.
We know how to find the resultant force, but the location of the resultant must provide the
equivalent total moment from each individual force. R
B
A

C D C D
a x
b

A a + B b
R = A+ B MC = Aa + B b = R x x =
R

Example 3 (pg 19)

76
ARCH 331 Note Set 3.2 F2009abn

Example 4 (pg 34)

15k

77
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Equilibrium of a Particle & Truss Analysis

Notation:
b = number of members in a truss Rx = resultant component in the x
(C) = shorthand for compression direction
F = name for force vectors, as is X, and P Ry = resultant component in the y
FAB = name of a truss force between joints direction
named A and B, ex. T = name for a tension force
FBD = free body diagram (T) = shorthand for tension
Fx = force component in the x direction, x = x axis direction, or horizontal
as is Tx dimension
Fy = force component in the y direction, y = y axis direction, or vertical
as is Ty dimension
h = cable sag height W = name for force due to weight
L = span length = coefficient of static friction
n = number of joints in a truss = angle, in a trig equation, ex. sin ,
N = normal force (perpendicular to that is measured between the x axis
something) and tail of a vector
R = name for resultant vectors = summation symbol

EQUILIBRIUM is the state where the resultant of the forces on a particle or a rigid body is
zero. There will be no rotation or translation. The forces are referred to as balanced.

ex: 2 forces of same size, opposite direction

X

ex: 4 forces, polygon rule shows that it closes

Analytically, for a point:

Rx = Fx = 0 Ry = Fy = 0 (scalar addition)

NEWTONS FIRST LAW: If the resultant force acting on a particle is zero, the particle will
remain at rest (if originally at rest) or will move with constant speed in a straight line (if
originally in motion).

79
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Collinear Force System

All forces act along the same line. Only one equilibrium equation is needed: F
( in line ) =0

Equivalently: R x = Fx = 0 and Ry = Fy = 0

Concurrent Force System

All forces act through the same point. Only two equilibrium equations are needed:
R x = Fx = 0 and Ry = Fy = 0

It is ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY to consider all the forces acting on a body (applied

directly and indirectly) using a FREE BODY DIAGRAM. Omission of a force would ruin
the conditions for equilibrium.

FREE BODY DIAGRAM (aka FBD): Sketch of a significant isolated particle of a body or
structure showing all the forces acting on it. Forces can be from

- externally applied forces

- weight of the rigid body
- reaction forces or constraints
- forces developed within a section member

How to solve when there are more than three forces on a free body:
1. Resolve all forces into x and y components using known and unknown forces and
angles. (Tables are helpful.)
2. Determine if any unknown forces are related to other forces and write an equation.
3. Write the two equilibrium equations (in x and y).
4. Solve the equations simultaneously when there are the same number of equations
as unknown quantities. (see math handout)

Common problems have unknowns of: 1) magnitude of force

2) direction of force

FREE BODY DIAGRAM STEPS FOR A POINT;

1. Determine the point of interest. (What point is in equilibrium?)

2. Detach the point from and all other bodies (free it).

80
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

3. Indicate all external forces which include:

- action on the point by the supports & connections
- action on the point by other bodies
- the weigh effect (=force) of any body attached to the point (force due to gravity)

4. All forces should be clearly marked with magnitudes and direction. The sense of forces
should be those acting on the point not from the point.

5. Dimensions/angles should be included for force component computations.

6. Indicate the unknown forces, such as those reactions or constraining forces where the body is
supported or connected.

Force Reactions can be categorized by the type of connections or supports. A force reaction
is a force with known line of action, or a force of unknown direction. The line of action of
the force is directly related to the motion that is prevented.

prevents motion: prevents motion:

up and down vertical & horizontal

The line of action should be indicated on the FBD. The sense of direction is determined by
the type of support. (Cables are in tension, etc) If the sense isnt obvious, assume a sense.
When the reaction value comes out positive, the assumption was correct. When the reaction
value comes out negative, the assumption was opposite the actual sense. DONT CHANGE
THE ARROWS ON YOUR FBD OR SIGNS IN YOUR EQUATIONS.

With the 2 equations of equilibrium for a point, there can be no more than 2 unknowns.

Friction

There will be a force of resistance to movement developed at the contact face between
objects when one is made to slide against the other. This is known as static friction and is
determined from the reactive force, N, which is normal to the surface, and a coefficient of
friction, , which is based on the materials in contact.
F = N

81
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

If the static friction force is exceeded by the pushing force, there

will still be friction, but it is called kinetic friction, and it is smaller
than static friction, so it is moving.

The friction resistance is independent of the amount of contact area.

Materials range
Metal on ice 0.03-0.05
Metal on metal 0.15-0.60
Metal on wood 0.20-0.60
Metal on stone 0.30-0.70
Wood on wood 0.30-0.70
Steel on steel 0.75
Stone on stone 0.40-0.70
Rubber on concrete 0.60-0.90
Aluminum on aluminum 1.10-1.70

CABLE STRUCTURES:

Cables have the same tension all along the length if they are not cut. The force magnitude is
the same everywhere in the cable even if it changes angles. Cables CANNOT be in
compression. (They flex instead.)

High-strength steel is the most common material used for cable structures because it has a
high strength to weight ratio.

Cables must be supported by vertical supports or towers and must be anchored at the ends.
Flexing or unwanted movement should be resisted. (Remember the Tacoma Narrows
Bridge?)

Cables with a single load have a concurrent force

system. It will only be in equilibrium if the cable is
symmetric.

The forces anywhere in a straight segment can be

resolved into x and y components of T x = T cos and
T y = T sin .

82
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

The shape of a cable having a uniform distributed load is almost parabolic, which means the
geometry and cable length can be found with:

y = 4 h( Lx x 2 ) / L2
y h

where y is the vertical distance from the straight

line from cable start to end L
x
h is the vertical sag (maximum y)

x is the distance from one end to the location of y

L is the horizontal span.

2 4
Ltotal = L(1 + 8 3 h 2 32 5 h )
L L4

where Ltotal is the total length of parabolic cable

h and L are defined above.

Cables with Several Concentrated Loads or Fixed Geometry

In order to completely constrain cables, the number of unknown support reactions will be
more than the available number of equilibrium equations. We can solve because we have
additional equations from geometry due to the slope of the cable.

The tension in the cable IS NOT the same everywhere, but the horizontal component in a
cable segment WILL BE.
4m 6m
A B
Tx
2m

Tx

45 kN 45 kN
C

83
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Truss Structures

A truss is made up of straight two-force members connected at its ends. The triangular
arrangement produces stable geometry. Loads on a truss are applied at the joints only.
Joints are pin-type connections (resist translation, not rotation).
Forces of action and reaction on a joint must be equal and opposite.
Members in TENSION are being pulled.
Members in COMPRESSION are being squeezed.
External forces act on the joints.

Truss configuration:
Three members form a rigid assembly with 3 (three) connections.
To add members and still have a rigid assembly, 2 (two) more must be added with one
connection between.
For rigidity: b = 2n 3, where b is number of members and n is number of joints

Method of Joints

The method takes advantage of the conditions of equilibrium at each joint.

1. Determine support reaction forces.

2. Draw a FBD of each member AND each joint

3. Identify geometry of angled members

4. Identify zero force members and other special (easy to solve) cases

5. Each pin is in equilibrium ( Fx = 0 and Fy = 0 for a concurrent force system)

6. Total equations = 2n = b+3 (one force per member + 3 support reactions)

Advantages: Can find every member force

Disadvantages: Lots of equations, easy to lose track of forces found.

84
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Tools available:
Tip-to-tail method for 3 joint forces must close
Analytically, there will be at most 2 unknowns with 2 equilibrium equations.
P P
C
F D
A E B

Joint Configurations (special cases to recognize for faster solutions)

Case 1) Two Bodies Connected

A C C
B or B
A

(0)
(0)

FAB has to be equal (=) to FBC

Case 2) Three Bodies Connected with Two Bodies in Line

C C A
D B B
A C
B
or or even
D D
A

(0)
(0) (0)

FAB and FBC have to be equal, and FBD has to be 0 (zero).

85
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Case 3) Three Bodies Connected and a Force 2 Bodies aligned & 1 Body and a Force are
Aligned
Four Bodies Connected - 2 Bodies Aligned and the Other 2 Bodies Aligned

A P D C D
B D

C B B A C
B
A C
D A E E
P

FAB has to equal FBC, and [FBD has to equal P] or [FBD has to equal FBE]

Graphical Analysis

The method utilizes what we know about force triangles and plotting force magnitudes to scale.

1. Draw an accurate form diagram of the truss at a convenient scale with the loads and support
reaction forces.

2. Determine the support reaction forces.

3. Working clockwise and from left to right, apply interval notation to the diagram, assigning
capital letters to the spaces between external forces and numbers to internal spaces.

4. Construct a load line to a convenient scale of length to force by using the interval notation
and working clockwise around the truss from the upper left plotting the lengths of the vertical
and horizontal loads.

5. Starting at a left joint where we know there are fewer than three forces, we draw reference
lines in the direction of the unknown members so that they intersect. Label the intersection
with the number of the internal space.

6. Go to the next joint (clockwise and left to right) with two unknown forces and repeat for all
joints. The diagram should close.

7. Measure the line segments and apply interval notation to determine their sense: Proceeding
clockwise around the joint, follow the notation. The direction toward the joint is
compressive. The direction away from the joint is tensile.

86
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Example 1 (pg 49)

87
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Example 2 (pg 56)

88
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Example 3 (pg 90)

1800 lb. 2400 lb.

1200 .

89
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Example 4
Using the method of joint, determine all member forces.

SOLUTION:

Find the joints with 2 (or less unknowns) for FBDs : A and H, while
looking for any special cases like E, which has crossed members and 150 LBS 500 LBS 200 LBS
forces. FDE = FEF and FEC = 500 lb (tension). 412.5 LBS 437.5 LBS
(Check off members found:
AB, BD, AD, BC, DC, DE, EC, EF, CG, CF, FG, GH, FH)
FEC
Lets use A first (but H is just as acceptable). Draw the point, adding the known force, and draw
the unknown member forces away from the point, assuming tension (shown as dashed). Find the
geometry of member AB from the rise of 10 ft and the run of 15 ft. The hypotenuse will be
10 2 + 15 2 = 18.03: FDE FEF
15 500 LBS
Fx = FAD + FAB =0
18.03
10 FAB =(-412.5)*18.03/10 = -743.7 lb (C) FAB
Fy = 412.5 lb + FAB =0
18.03
and substituting the (negative) value of FAB into the Fx , FAD = 618.75 lb (T)
10
(Check off members found: AB, BD, AD, BC, DC, DE, EC, EF, CG, CF, FG, GH, FH) FAD
15
412.5 LBS
Review which joints have 2 (or less) unknowns: B and H.
Lets use B. Because we know FAB is in compression we draw the force into the point.
We need the geometry of member BC with a rise of 5 (15-10) and a run of 15 with a
FBC
hypotenuse of 5 2 + 15 2 = 15.81: 10
15 15 FBC = -652.1 lb (C) 15
Fx = 743.7 lb + FBC =0
18.03 15.81 5
10 5 743.7 LBS 15
Fy = 743.7 lb + FBC FBD = 0 (substituting the negative value of FBC) FBD
18.03 15.81
FBD = 206.2 lb (T)
(Check off members found: AB, BD, AD, BC, DC, DE, EC, EF, CG, CF, EF, FG, GH, FH) 206.2 LBS
FDC
Review which joints have 2 (or less) unknowns: D and H. 45
Lets use D. Both FAD and FBD are tensile, so we can draw them away. The geometry of
DE is familiar with the rise the same as the run for an angle of 45: 618.75 LBS FDE
Fx = 618.75 lb + FDC cos 45 + FDE = 0 150 LBS
Fy = 150 lb + 206.2 lb + FDC sin 45 = 0 FDC = -79.5 lb (C)
and substituting the (negative) value of FDC into the Fx , FDE = 675.0 lb (T) = FEF (! from above) 15
5 5
(Check off members found: AB, BD, AD, BC, DC, DE, EC, EF, CG, CF, FG, GH, FH)
15
FCG
Review which joints have 2 (or less) unknowns: C and H. 652.1 LBS
45
Lets use C. Draw FDC and FBC as compressive forces. And the geometry has been found 79.5 LBS 500 LBS FCF
due to symmetry, with the angle of FCF a negative 45:
15 15
Fx = 652.1lb + 79.5 lb cos 45 + FCF cos(45) + FCG =0
15.81 15.81
5 5
Fy = 652.1lb + 79.5 lb sin 45 500 lb + FCF sin(45) FCG =0
15.81 15.81
Solve simultaneously because there isnt an easy way to find one unknown equal to a value multiplied by the other unknown:
Fx = 674.9 lb + 0.707 FCF + 0.949 FCG = 0
Fy = 237.6 lb 0.707 FCF 0.316 FCG = 0
add: 437.5 lb + 0 FCF + 0.633FCG = 0 FCG = -690.8 lb (C) and substituting, FCF = -27.6 lb (C)
(Check off members found: AB, BD, AD, BC, DC, DE, EC, EF, CG, CF, FG, GH, FH)

90
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.1 S2012abn

Example 4 (continued)
Review which joints have 2 (or less) unknowns: G, F and H.
Lets use F (because H really looks like A mirrored). Draw FCF as compressive
and FEF in tension. The angle from for FCF is negative 45:
Fx = 675.0 lb + 27.6 lb cos(45) + FFH = 0 FFH = 655.5 lb (T)
F y = 27.6 lb sin( 45) 200 lb + FFG = 0 FFG = 219.5 lb (T)
(Check off members found: 150 LBS 500 LBS 200 LBS
412.5 LBS 437.5 LBS
AB, BD, AD, BC, DC, DE, EC, EF, CG, CF, FG, GH, FH)

Review which joints have 2 (or less) unknowns; which are G and H.
Lets use G and pretend that we have only found FGF (and not FCG) in order to show a set FFG
of equations that use substitution with the algebra. The geometry has been found due to 27.6 LBS
symmetry: 45
15 15 15 15.81 15.81
Fx = FCG + FGH = 0 rearranging: FCG = FGH = FGH
15.81 18.03 18.03 15 18.03
675.0 LBS FFH
5 10
F y = FCG FGH 219.5 lb = 0 200 LBS
15.81 18.03
Substituting:
15.81 5 10 15
F y = ( FGH ) FGH 219.5 lb = 0 5
18.03 15.81 18.03 15
Simplifying 0.277 FGH = 219.5 lb FGH = -791.6 lb (C) FCG 10

and FCG = -694.1 lb (C) (which validates the earlier answer found of 690.8 lb (C) with respect to
rounding errors in all fractions and trig functions)
FGH
(Check off members found: AB, BD, AD, BC, DC, DE, EC, EF, CG, CF, FG, GH, FH)
219.5 LBS
(Typically, the last joint left will verify that the joint is in equilibrium with values found, but in this exercise
the last joint was used to show the algebraic method of substitution.)

91
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.2 S2015abn

Truss Analysis using Multiframe

1. The software is on the computers in the College of Architecture in Programs under the
Windows Start menu (see https://wikis.arch.tamu.edu/display/HELPDESK/Computer+Accounts
for lab locations). Multiframe is under the Bentley Engineering menu.
2. There are tutorials available on line at http://www.daystarsoftware.com/support/mftutorials
that list the tasks and order in greater detail. The first task is to define the unit system:
Choose Units from the View menu. Unit sets are available, but specific units can also
be selected by double clicking on a unit or format and making a selection from the menu.

3. To see the scale of the geometry, a grid option is available:

Choose Grid from the View menu

4. To create the geometry, you must be in the Frame window (default). The symbol is the
frame in the window toolbar:

The Member toolbar shows ways to create members:

The Generate toolbar has convenient tools to create typical structural

shapes.
To create a truss, use the add
connected members button:

93
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.2 S2015abn

Select a starting point and ending point with the cursor. The location of the cursor and
the segment length is displayed at the bottom of the geometry window. The ESC button
will end the segmented drawing. Continue to use the add connected members button.
Any time the cursor is over an existing joint, the joint will be highlighted by a red circle.
The geometry can be set
precisely by selecting the joint
(drag), and bringing up the
joint properties menu (right
click) to set the coordinates.

The support types can be set by selecting the joint

(drag) and using the Joint Toolbar (pin shown), or the
Frame / Joint Restraint ... menu (right click).
NOTE: If the support appears at both ends of the member, you
had the member selected rather than the joint. Select
the joint to change support for and right click to select
the joint restraints menu or select the correct support on
the joint toolbar.

The support forces will be determined in the analysis.

5. All members must have sections assigned (see section 6.) in order to calculate reactions and
deflections. To use a standard steel section proceed to step 6. For custom sections, the
section information must be entered. To define a section:
Choose Edit Sections / Add
Section from the Edit
menu
Type a name for your new
section
Choose group Frame from
the group names provided so
that the section will remain
with the file data
Choose a shape. The Flat
Bar shape is a rectangular
section.
Enter the cross section data.

94
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.2 S2015abn

Table values 1-9 must have values for a Flat Bar, but not all are used for every analysis. A
recommendation is to put the value of 1 for those properties you dont know or care about.
Properties like tf, tw, etc. refer to wide flange sections.
Answer any query. If the message says there is an error, the section will not be created
until the error is corrected.
6. The standard sections library loaded is for the United States. If another section library is
needed, use the Open Sections Library... command under the file menu, choose the library
folder, and select the SectionsLibrary.slb file.

Select the members (drag to make bold) and assign sections with the Section button on the
Member toolbar:

Choose the group name and section name:

(STANDARD SHAPES) (CUSTOM)

55

7. In order for Multiframe to recognize that the truss members are two-force bodies, all
joints must be highlighted and assigned as pins with the Pinned Joints button on the Joint
toolbar:

8. The truss geometry is complete, and in order to define the

load conditions you must be in the Load window represented
by the green arrow:
9. The Load toolbar allows a joint to be loaded with a force or a moment in global coordinates,
shown by the first two buttons after the display numbers button. It allows a member to be
loaded with a distributed load, concentrated load or moment (next three buttons) in global
coordinates, as well as loading with distributed or single force or moment in the local
coordinate system (next three buttons). It allows a load panel to be loaded with a distributed
load in global or local coordinates (last two buttons).

Choose the joint to be loaded (drag) and select the

load type (here shown for point loading)

95
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.2 S2015abn

Choose the direction by the arrow shown. There is no

need to put in negative values for downward loading.
Enter the values of the load

NOTE: Do not put support reactions as applied loads.

The analysis will determine the reaction values
Multiframe will automatically generate a grouping called a Load Case named Load Case 1
when a load is created. All additional loads will be added to this load case unless a new load
case is defined (Add case under the Case menu).

10. In order to run the analysis after the geometry, member properties and loading has been
defined:
Choose Linear from the Analyze menu
11. If the analysis is successful, you can view the results in the
Plot window represented by the red moment diagram:

12. The Plot toolbar allows the numerical values to be shown (1.0
button), the reaction arrows to be shown (brown up arrow) and
reaction moments to be shown (brown curved arrow):

To show the axial force diagram, Choose the purple Axial Force
button. Tensile members will have T by the value (if turned
on), while compression members will have C by the value
To show the deflection diagram, Choose the blue Deflection
button
To animate the deflection diagram, Choose Animate... from the Display menu. You can
also save the animation to a .avi file by checking the box.

96
ARCH 331 Note Set 4.2 S2015abn

To see exact values of axial load and deflection, double click on the member and move
the vertical cross hair with the mouse. The ESC key will return you to the window.

13. The Data window (D) allows you to view all data entered for the geometry, sections and
loading. These values can be edited.

14. The Results window (R) allows you to view all results of the analysis
including displacements, reactions, member forces (actions) and
stresses. These values can be cut and pasted into other Windows
programs such as Word or Excel.

NOTE: Px refers to the axial load (P) in the local axis x direction (x).

15. To save the file Choose Save from the File menu.
16. To load an existing file Choose Open... from the File menu.
17. To print a plot Choose Print Window... from the File menu. As an alternative, you may copy
the plot (Ctrl+c) and paste it in a word processing document (Ctrl+v).

97
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

Equilibrium of Rigid Bodies

Notation:
k = spring constant w = name for distributed load
F = name for force vectors, as is P W = name for total force due to
Fx = force component in the x direction distributed load
Fy = force component in the y direction = angle, in a math equation
FBD = free body diagram = angle, in a trig equation, ex. sin ,
L = beam span length that is measured between the x axis
M = moment due to a force and tail of a vector
x = horizontal distance = summation symbol

Definition: Equilibrium is the state when all the external forces acting on a rigid body form a
system of forces equivalent to zero. There will be no rotation or translation. The forces are
referred to as balanced.

Rx = Fx = 0 Ry = Fy = 0 AND M = 0
It is ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY to consider all the forces acting on a body (applied
directly and indirectly) using a FREE BODY DIAGRAM. Omission of a force would ruin
the conditions for equilibrium.

FREE BODY DIAGRAM STEPS;

1. Determine the free body of interest. (What body is in equilibrium?)

2. Detach the body from the ground and all other bodies (free it).

3. Indicate all external forces which include:

- action on the free body by the supports & connections
- action on the free body by other bodies
- the weigh effect (=force) of the free body itself (force due to gravity)

4. All forces should be clearly marked with magnitudes and direction. The sense of forces
should be those acting on the body not by the body.

5. Dimensions/angles should be included for moment computations and force computations.

6. Indicate the unknown angles, distances, forces or moments, such as those reactions or
constraining forces where the body is supported or connected. (Text uses hashes on the
unknown forces to distinguish them.)

99
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

Reactions can be categorized by the type of connections or supports. A reaction is a force

with known line of action, or a force of unknown direction, or a moment. The line of action
of the force or direction of the moment is directly related to the motion that is prevented.

prevents motion: prevents motion: prevents:

up and down vertical & horizontal rotation & translation

Reactions and Support Connections Structural Analysis, 4th ed., R.C. Hibbeler

100
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

The line of action should be indicated on the FBD. The sense of direction is determined by the
type of support. (Cables are in tension, etc) If the sense isnt obvious, assume a sense. When
the reaction value comes out positive, the assumption was correct. When the reaction value
comes out negative, the assumption was opposite the actual sense. DONT CHANGE THE
ARROWS ON YOUR FBD OR SIGNS IN YOUR EQUATIONS.

With the 3 equations of equilibrium, there can be no more than 3 unknowns. COUNT THE
NUMBER OF UNKNOWN REACTIONS.

Example 1
(similar to ex. on pg 65)

500 lb is known

check:

reactions for the pin-type support at A = Ax & Ay

reactions and components for the smooth surface at B = B (perpendicular to ground only)

# equations = 3

procedure:

Write summation of forces in x and y and set = 0.

Choose a place to take a moment. Summing

moments at A means that Ax, Ay and Bx have
moment arms of zero.

101
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

The general rule is to sum at point where there are the most unknown reactions which usually
results in one unknown left in the equation. This point could also be where two lines of
action intersect.

More than one moment equation can be used, but it will not be unique. Only 3 equations are
unique. Variations:

F = 0
x F = 0
y M 1 =0 or

F = 0
x M = 0
1 M 2 =0 or

M = 0
1 M = 0
2 M 3 =0

Recognizing support unknowns in FBDs

F F

3
unknowns

3
weight unknowns
m g

3
+ weight m g
unknowns

F1 F2 F1 F2

6 2 bodies
unknowns
not independent

2
m g unknowns
weight

102
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

Statical Indeterminancy and Improper Constraints

Definition: A completely constrained rigid body has the same number of unknown reactions
as number of equilibrium equations and cannot move under the loading conditions. The
reactions are statically determinate.

Definition: Statically indeterminate reactions appear on a rigid body when there are more
unknown reactions than the number of equilibrium equations. The reactions that cannot be
solved for are statically indeterminate. The degree of indeterminacy is the number of
additional equations that would be needed to solve, i.e. one more = 1st degree, 2 more = 2nd
degree...

Example of Static Indeterminancy: 60 lb

Find the reactions on the cantilever when a pin is 200 lb-ft

added at C A B 55
C
5 9

60 lb
With 5 unknowns, two wont be solvable.
200 lb-ft (statically indeterminate to the 2nd degree)
A B 55
C

Definition: When the support conditions provide the same or less unknown reactions as the
equations of equilibrium but allow the structure to move (not equilibrium), the structure is
considered partially constrained. This occurs when the reactions must be either concurrent
or parallel.

Example of Partial Constraints:

B
0.75 m
Find the reactions when the pin support at A changes to a
roller A 30

1m
B 100 N
0.75 m

A 30 If F has to equal 0, the x component must be 0, meaning

B = 0.
1m A would have to equal 100 N, but then M wouldnt be 0.
100 N

103
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

The condition of at most as many unknown reactions as equilibrium equations is necessary

for static determinacy, but isnt sufficient. The supports must completely constrain the
structure.

Wed like to avoid partial or improper constraint in the design of our structures. However,
some structures with these types of constraints may not collapse. They may move. Or they
may require advanced analysis to find reaction forces.

Example of Partial Constraints and Static Indeterminacy:

500 mm
Find the weight and reactions when the sleeve 200 mm
track is horizontal A B

k = 5 N/mm
k(l) = F by spring
length of unstretched spring = 450 mm W

For F to equal 0, the spring force must be 0

(x component = 0) meaning it cant be stretched
if there is no movement W

Rigid Body Cases:

1. Two-force body: Equilibrium of a body subjected to two forces on two points requires that
those forces be equal and opposite and act in the same line of action.

F1 F1
B B B F1
d d
A F2 A A

F2 F2

(A) (B) (C)

104
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

2. Three-force body: Equilibrium of a body subjected to three forces on three points requires
that the line of action of the forces be concurrent (intersect) or parallel AND that the resultant
equal zero.

F2 F2 F2
F3
F3 F3
B d1 B B
C C d2 C
A A A
F1 F1
F1

(A) -no (B) (C)

Loads, Support Conditions & Reactions for Beams

Types of Forces
Concentrated single load at one point
Distributed loading spread over a distance or area
P1 P2

concentrated uniformly distributed distributed

Types of supports:

- Statically determinate
(number of unknowns number of equilibrium equations)

L L L
simply supported overhang cantilever
(most common)

- Statically indeterminate: (need more equations from somewhere

L L L
restrained, ex. continuous
(most common case when L1=L2)

105
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.1 F2014abn

Distributed Loads

Distributed loads may be replaced by concentrated loads acting through the balance/center of the
distribution or load area: THIS IS AN EQUIVALENT FORCE SYSTEM.

w is the symbol used to describe the load per unit length.

W is the symbol used to describe the total load.

w x W 2w
w x =W w =
2 2 w w
0
x x x
W W
W/2 W/2

x/2 x/2 2x/3 x/3 x/2 x/6 x/3

Example 2 (changed from pg 72)

4'
(horizontal) on the bar at the free end.

106
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.2 F2013abn

Method of Sections for Truss Analysis

Notation:
(C) = shorthand for compression (T) = shorthand for tension
P = name for load or axial force vector

Joint Configurations (special cases to recognize for faster solutions)

Case 1) Two Bodies Connected

A C C
B or B
A

FAB has to be equal and opposite to FBC

Case 2) Three Bodies Connected with Two Bodies in Line

C C A
D B B
A C
B
or or even
D D
A

FAB and FBC have to be equal, and FBD has to have zero force.

Case 3) Three Bodies Connected and a Force 2 Bodies aligned & 1 Body and a Force are Aligned
Four Bodies Connected - 2 Bodies Aligned and the Other 2 Bodies Aligned

A P D C D
B D

C B B A C
B
A C
D A E E
P

FAB has to equal FBC, and [FBD has to equal P] or [FBD has to equal FBE]

Method of Sections (relies on internal forces being in equilibrium with external forces on a section)

1. Determine support reaction forces.

2. Cut a section in such a way that force action lines intersect.

3. Solve for equilibrium. Sum moments about an intersection of force lines of action

107
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.2 F2013abn

Advantages: Quick when you only need one or two forces (only 3 equations needed)
Disadvantages: Not always easy to find a place to cut a section or see where force lines intersect

P P
C
F D
A E B

Compound Truss: A truss assembled of simple trusses and additional links. It has b=2n-3,
is statically determinate, rigid and completely constrained with a pin and roller. It can be
identified by triangles with pins in the middle of some sides.

Statically Indeterminate Trusses:

Occur if there are more members than equations for all the joints
OR if there are more reaction supports unknowns than 3

Diagonal Tension Counters: Crossed bracing of cables or slender members is commonly

used in bridge trusses, buildings and towers. These trusses look indeterminate, but can be
solved statically because the bracing cannot hold a compressive force. The members are
excluded in the analysis.
5lb
Method:
E F G H
1. Determine support reaction forces.
4
2. Cut a section in such a way that the tension
A D
counters are exposed. B 6 C 6
6
3. Solve for force equilibrium in y with one counter. 10lb 20lb
If the value is positive (in tension), this is the
solution.

4. Solve for force equilibrium in y with the other counter.

108
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.2 F2013abn

Example 1 (pg 99)

(Support forces must be found as well).

109
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.2 F2013abn

Example 2
Using the method of sections, determine member
forces in FE, EB, BC, AB and FB.

SOLUTION:

A section cant pass through 5 members, so there will have to

be two sections. The first passes through FE, EB and BC.

FE is shown assumed to be in compression, while the other forces are drawn

assumed to be in tension.

There can be only two intersections when two of the three forces are parallel at E and B:

M E = 100 lb ( 6 ft ) BC( 8 ft ) = 0
BC = 75lb (T)

M B = 100 lb ( 12 ft ) FE( 8 ft ) = 0
FE = 150lb (C)

Because EB is the only unknown force with a y component, it is useful to

sum forces in the y direction (although it also has the only remaining
unknown x component):

F y = 100 lb EB( 8 ft )=0

100 ft
(or Fx = 150 lb 75 lb EB( 6 ft )= 0)
100 ft
EB = 125lb (T)

A second section can be drawn through AB, FB and FE.

There are three points of intersection of the unknown forces -

at A, F and B. B is not on the section, but we know where it is.

M = 300lb ( 6 ft ) + FB( 6 ft ) = 0 FB = 300lb (C)

A

M F = 200lb ( 6 ft ) + AB y ( 6 ft ) = 0 (sliding AB components to A)

AB = ABy ( 100 ) = 250lb (T)

8
or M F = 200 lb ( 6 ft ) + AB x ( 8 ft ) = 0 (sliding AB components to B)

AB = ABx ( 100 ) = 250lb (T)

6

M B = 200 lb ( 6 ft ) + FE( 8 ft ) = 0
FE = 150lb (C)

110
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.2 F2013abn

Example 3 (pg 90)

Determine the member forces CB, DB and DF.

1800 lb. 2400 lb.

1200 .

111
ARCH 331 Note Set 5.2 F2013abn

Example 4
Using the method of sections, determine member
forces in BC, CD and BD.

SOLUTION:

Find the support reactions from rigid body equilibrium,

or in this case, from load tracing with symmetrical loads.

Draw a section line through the members of interest, cutting through no

more than 3 members to separate the truss into two pieces. In this case,
BC and CD can be cut through, while BD will need another section.

Draw one of the sections, exposing the member forces. Drawing

them out or away from the cut assumes tension. BC is drawn in
compression. So is DC, but because it has a 45 degree angle, the
components will have the same magnitude.

Find a point to sum moments where two unknown forces intersect. This may be
on a point of the section or off the section. X is such a location where the line of action of
BC intersects that of DE. For every 15 ft to the left, the line slopes down 5 ft, so X
is located (10 ft/ 5 ft)15 ft = 30 ft to the left of B.

M X = 450lb ( 15 ft ) 300lb ( 30 ft ) DC y ( 30 ft ) = 0
X
DCy = -75 lb, so DC = DCy/sin45 = 106 lb tension

(compression was assumed, but the answer was negative

indicating our assumption wasnt verified).

(Notice that DCx and DCy slid down to D and then the lever arm for DCx was 0. The components can also slide to the other end
point of the member to locate the lever arms)

Summing at D where DC and DE intersect means there will be no lever arms. Sliding the components of BC to B means there
will be no lever arm for BCy:

M D = 450 lb ( 15 ft ) + BC x ( 10 ft ) = 0 BCx = 675lb, so BC = BCx 10 = 711.5lb compression

3

Draw a section line that passes through BD and cuts through no

more than three members.

If we hadnt already found BC, we could sum moments at point X

again to eliminate BC and AD from our equation, leaving BD.

But it is obvious that we have only one unknown y force, which is BD:

F y = 450 lb BD 711.5 lb 1 = 0 BD = 225lb tension
10

AD

BD

112
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.1 Su2011abn

Mechanics of Materials

Notation:
A = area (net = with holes, bearing = in P = name for axial force vector
contact, etc...) P = name for internal axial force vector
d = diameter of a hole R = name for reaction force vector
f = symbol for stress t = thickness of a hole or member
fallowable = allowable stress x = horizontal dimension
fv = shear stress y = vertical dimension
fp = bearing stress (see P) = density of a material (unit weight)
Fallowed = allowable stress (used by codes) = engineering symbol for normal
Fv = allowable shear stress stress
kPa = kilopascals or 1 kN/m2 = engineering symbol for shearing
q = allowable soil bearing pressure stress
psi = pounds per square inch

Mechanics of Materials is a basic engineering science that deals with the relation between
externally applied load and its effect on deformable bodies. The main purpose of Mechanics of
Materials is to answer the question of which requirements have to be met to assure STRENGTH,
RIGIDITY, AND STABILITY of engineering structures.

To solve a problem in Mechanics of Materials, one has to consider THREE ASPECTS OF THE
PROBLEM:
1. STATICS: equilibrium of external forces, internal forces, stresses
2. GEOMETRY: deformations and conditions of geometric fit, strains
3. MATERIAL PROPERTIES: stress-strain relationship for each material,
obtained from material testing.

STRESS The intensity of a force acting over an area.

Normal Stress

Stress that acts along an axis of a member; can be internal or external; can be compressive or
tensile.
P A B P

P A P P B P

P P
f = = Strength condition: f = < f allowable or Fallowed
Anet Anet

113
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.1 Su2011abn

Shear Stress

Stress that acts perpendicular to an axis or length of a member, or parallel to the cross section is
called shear stress. P
Shear stress cannot be assumed to be uniform, so we refer to average
shearing stress.
P

P P
fv = = Strength condition: f v = < allowable or Fallowed
Anet Anet

Bearing Stress

A compressive normal stress acting between two bodies.

P
fp =
Abearing

Bending Stress

A normal stress caused by bending; can be compressive or

tensile. (Discussed in Note Set on Beam Bending.)

Torsional Stress

A shear stress caused by torsion (moment around the axis).

(Discussed in Note Set on Torsion.)

114
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.1 Su2011abn

Bolts in Shear and Bearing

Single shear - forces cause only one shear drop across the bolt.

Double shear - forces cause two shear changes across the bolt.

115
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.1 Su2011abn

Bearing of a bolt on a bolt hole The bearing surface can be represented by projecting the cross
section of the bolt hole on a plane (into a rectangle).
P P
fp = =
A td

116
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.1 Su2011abn

Example 1 (pg 201)*

beam (channel)

Determine the bearing stress in the strap

from the bolt diameter chosen. If the straps are 10 ft. in
length, how much elongation would occur? What is the
ultimate load capacity in each strap? Assume A36 steel:
Fu= 58 ksi, E = 29 x 103 ksi.

117
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.1 Su2011abn

Example 2 (pg 202)

RA = 24 kN

118
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.2 Su2011abn

Stress and Strain Elasticity

Notation:
A = area t = thickness
D = diameter dimension = elongation or length change
E = modulus of elasticity or Youngs = strain
modulus = angle of twist
f = stress = resistance factor for LRFD
Fallow. = allowable stress = diameter symbol
Ft = allowable tensile stress = lateral strain ratio or Poissons ratio
F.S. = factor of safety = shear strain
h = height
kPa = kilopascals or 1 kN/m2 = density or unit weight
ksi = kips per square inch D = dead load factor for LRFD
L = length L = live load factor for LRFD
LRFD = load and resistance factor design = angle of principle stress
MPa = megapascals or 106 N/m2 or = radial distance
1 N/mm2
= engineering symbol for normal
q = allowable soil bearing pressure
stress
psf = pounds per square foot
= engineering symbol for shearing
P = name for axial force vector
stress
R = name for design quantity (force or
moment) for LRFD, ex. RL, RD, or Rn

Normal Strain

In an axially loaded member, normal strain, is the change in the length,

with respect to the original length, L.
=
L
It is UNITLESS, but may be called strain or microstrain ().

Shearing Strain

In a member loaded with shear forces, shear strain, is the change in the sheared side, s with
respect to the original height, L. For small angles: tan .

s
= = tan
L

119
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.2 Su2011abn

In a member subjected to twisting, the shearing strain is a measure of

the angle of twist with respect to the length and distance from the
center, :
=
L

Testing of Load vs. Strain

Behavior of materials can be measured by

recording deformation with respect to the
size of the load. For members with constant
cross section area, we can plot stress vs.
strain.

BRITTLE MATERIALS - ceramics, glass,

stone, cast iron; show abrupt fracture at
small strains.

DUCTILE MATERIALS plastics, steel;

show a yield point and large strains
(considered plastic) and necking (give
warning of failure)

SEMI-BRITTLE MATERIALS concrete;

show no real yield point, small strains, but
have some strain-hardening.

Linear-Elastic Behavior

In the straight portion of the stress-strain diagram, the materials are elastic, which means if they
are loaded and unloaded no permanent deformation occurs.

True Stress & Engineering Stress f

True stress takes into account that the area of the cross section changes E
with loading.
1
Engineering stress uses the original area of the cross section.

120
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.2 Su2011abn

Hookes Law Modulus of Elasticity

In the linear-elastic range, the slope of the stress-strain diagram is constant, and has a value of E,
called Modulus of Elasticity or Youngs Modulus.
f = E

Isotropic Materials have the same E with any direction of loading.

Anisotropic Materials have different Es with the direction of loading.

Orthotropic Materials have directionally based Es

121
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.2 Su2011abn

Plastic Behavior & Fatigue

Permanent deformations happen outside the linear-elastic range and are called plastic
deformations. Fatigue is damage caused by reversal of loading.

The proportional limit (at the end of the elastic range) is the greatest stress valid using
Hookes law.

The elastic limit is the maximum stress that can be applied before permanent deformation
would appear upon unloading.

The yield point (at the yield stress) is where a ductile material continues to elongate without
an increase of load. (May not be well defined on the stress-strain plot.)

The ultimate strength is the largest stress a material will see before rupturing, also called the
tensile strength.

The rupture strength is the stress at the point of rupture or failure. It may not coincide with
the ultimate strength in ductile materials. In brittle materials, it will be the same as the
ultimate strength.

The fatigue strength is the stress at failure when a member is subjected to reverse cycles of
stress (up & down or compression & tension). This can happen at much lower values than
the ultimate strength of a material.

Toughness of a material is how much work (a combination of stress and strain) us used for
fracture. It is the area under the stress-strain curve.

Concrete does not respond well to tension and is tested in compression. The strength at crushing
is called the compression strength.

Materials that have time dependent elongations when loaded are said to have creep. Concrete
and wood creep. Concrete also has the property of shrinking over time.

122
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.2 Su2011abn

y
Poissons Ratio

For an isometric material that is homogeneous, the properties are the

same for the cross section:
y = z
z

There exists a linear relationship while in the linear-elastic range of

x
the material between longitudinal strain and lateral strain:
lateral strain y f x
= = = z y = z =
axial strain x x E

Positive strain results from an increase in length with respect to overall length.
Negative strain results from a decrease in length with respect to overall length.

is the Poissons ratio and has a value between 0 and , depending on the material

Relation of Stress to Strain

P
P f PL
f = ; = and E = so E = A which rearranges to: =
A L AE
L

Orthotropic Materials

One class of non-isotropic materials is orthotropic materials

that have directionally based values of modulus of elasticity
and Poissons ratio (E, ).

Ex: plywood, laminates, fiber reinforced polymers with

direction fibers

Stress Concentrations

In some sudden changes of cross section, the stress concentration

changes (and is why we used average normal stress). Examples are
sharp notches, or holes or corners.

(Think about airplane window shapes...)

123
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.2 Su2011abn

Maximum Stress

When both normal stress and shear

stress occur in a structural member, the
maximum stresses can occur at some
other planes (angle of ).

Maximum Normal Stress happens at = 0 AND

Maximum Shearing Stress happens at = 45 with only normal stress in the x direction.

Allowable Stress Design (ASD) and Factor of Safety (F.S.)

ultimate load ultimate stress

There are uncertainties in material strengths: F .S = =
allowable load allowable stress

ultimate stress
Allowable stress design determines the allowable stress by: allowable stress =
F .S

Load and Resistance Factor Design LRFD

There are uncertainties in material strengths and in structural loadings.

D R D + L R L R n

where = load factor for Dead and Live loads

R = load (dead or live)
= resistance factor
Rn = nominal load (capacity)

124
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.3 F2009abn

Thermal Effects and Indeterminacy

Notation:
A = area t = thermal strain (no units)
E = modulus of elasticity or Youngs
modulus = elongation or length change
f = stress P = elongation due to axial load
L = length restr = restrained length change
P = name for axial force vector T = elongation due or length change
P = name of reaction force
due to temperature
= coefficient of thermal expansion for
a material T = change in temperature

Thermal Strains

Physical restraints limit deformations to be the same, or sum to zero, or be proportional with
respect to the rotation of a rigid body.
PL
We know axial stress relates to axial strain: = which relates to P
AE
Deformations can be caused by the material reacting to a change in energy with temperature. In
general (there are some exceptions):
Solid materials can contract with a decrease in temperature.
Solid materials can expand with an increase in temperature.

The change in length per unit temperature change is the coefficient of thermal expansion, .

It has units of F or C and the deformation is related by: T = (T )L

Thermal Strain: T = T

There is no stress associated with the length change with free movement, BUT if there are
restraints, thermal deformations or strains can cause internal forces and stresses.

125
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.3 F2009abn

How A Restrained Bar Feels with Thermal Strain

1. Bar pushes on supports because the material needs to

expand with an increase in temperature.
2. Supports push back.
3. Bar is restrained, cant move and the reaction causes
internal stress.

Superposition Method

If we want to solve a statically indeterminate problem that has extra support forces:

We can remove a support or supports that makes the problem look statically determinate
Replace it with a reaction and treat it like it is an applied force
Impose geometry restrictions that the support imposes

For Example:

PL
T = (T )L p =
AE
PL
P + T = 0 + (T )L = 0
AE

AE P
P = (T )L/ = (T )AE f = = (T )E
L/ A

126
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.3 F2009abn

Example 1 (pg 228)

ALSO: If the beam is anchored to a concrete slab, and the steel sees a
temperature change of 50 F while the concrete only sees a change of
30 F, determine the compressive stress in the beam.

c = 5.5 x 10-6 / F Ec = 3 x 106 psi

s = 6.5 x 10-6 / F Es = 29 x 106 psi

127
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.3 F2009abn

Example 2

128
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

Sustainability Considerations in Materials

from Fundamentals of Building Construction Materials & Methods, 5th ed., Allen and Iano (2008)

129
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

130
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

131
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

132
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

133
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

134
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

135
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

136
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

137
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

138
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

139
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

140
ARCH 331 Note Set 6.4 Su2011abn

141
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Beam Structures and Internal Forces

Notation:
a = algebraic quantity, as is b, c, d R = name for reaction force vector
A = name for area (T) = shorthand for tension
b = intercept of a straight line V = internal shear force
d = calculus symbol for differentiation V(x) = internal shear force as a function of
(C) = shorthand for compression distance x
F = name for force vectors, as is P, F, P w = name for distributed load
= internal axial force W = name for total force due to
Fx = force component in the x direction distributed load
Fy = force component in the y direction x = horizontal distance
FBD = free body diagram y = vertical distance
L = beam span length = symbol for order of curve
m = slope of a straight line = symbol for integration
M = internal bending moment = calculus symbol for small quantity
M(x) = internal bending moment as a = summation symbol
function of distance x

BEAMS

- Important type of structural members (floors, bridges, roofs)

- Usually long, straight and rectangular
- Have loads that are usually perpendicular applied at points along the length

Internal Forces

Internal forces are those that hold the parts of the member together for equilibrium

- Truss members:
F A B F

F A F F B F

- For any member: T

F = internal axial force

(perpendicular to cut across section)
V = internal shear force T
T
(parallel to cut across section)
M = internal bending moment V

143
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Support Conditions & Loading

Most often loads are perpendicular to the beam and cause only internal V
shear forces and bending moments M
Knowing the internal forces and moments is necessary when
R
designing beam size & shape to resist those loads

Types of loads

- Concentrated single load, single moment

- Distributed loading spread over a distance, uniform or non-uniform.

Types of supports

- Statically determinate: simply supported, cantilever, overhang L

(number of unknowns number of equilibrium equations)
Propped
- Statically indeterminate: continuous, fixed-roller, fixed-fixed
(number of unknowns > number of equilibrium equations)

L
Restrained
Sign Conventions for Internal Shear and Bending Moment
(different from statics and truss members!)
V
When Fy **excluding V** on the left hand side (LHS) section is
positive, V will direct down and is considered POSITIVE. M

When M **excluding M** about the cut on the left hand side
(LHS) section causes a smile which could hold water (curl upward), M will be counter clockwise
(+) and is considered POSITIVE.

On the deflected shape of a beam, the point where the shape changes from smile up to frown is
called the inflection point. The bending moment value at this point is zero.

144
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Shear and Bending Moment Diagrams

The plot of shear and bending moment as they vary across a beam length are extremely important
design tools: V(x) is plotted on the y axis of the shear diagram, M(x) is plotted on the y axis of
the moment diagram.

The load diagram is essentially the free body diagram of the beam with the actual loading (not
the equivalent of distributed loads.)

Maximum Shear and Bending The maximum value, regardless of sign, is important for design.

Method 1: The Equilibrium Method

Isolate FDB sections at significant points along the beam and determine V and M at the cut
section. The values for V and M can also be written in equation format as functions of the
distance to the cut section.

Important Places for FBD cuts

- at supports
- at concentrated loads
- at start and end of distributed loads
- at concentrated moments

Method 2: The Semigraphical Method

Relationships exist between the loading and shear diagrams, and between the shear and
bending diagrams.

Knowing the area of the loading gives the change in shear (V).

Knowing the area of the shear gives the change in bending moment (M).

Concentrated loads and moments cause a vertical jump in the diagram.

V dV
= = w (the negative shows it is down because we give w a positive value)
x dx
lim 0

xD
VD VC = wdx = the area under the load curve between C & D
xC
*These shear formulas are NOT VALID at discontinuities like concentrated loads

145
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

M dM
= =V
x dx
lim 0

xD
M D M C = Vdx = the area under the shear curve between C & D
xC
* These moment formulas ARE VALID even with concentrated loads.

*These moment formulas are NOT VALID at discontinuities like applied moments.

The MAXIMUM BENDING MOMENT from a curve that is continuous can be found
dM
when the slope is zero = 0 , which is when the value of the shear is 0.
dx

Basic Curve Relationships (from calculus) for y(x)

Horizontal Line: y =b (constant) and the area (change in shear) = b x,

resulting in a:

y x
Sloped Line: y = mx+b and the area (change in shear) = , resulting in a:
2

y x
Parabolic Curve: y = ax2+ b and the area (change in shear) = ,
3
resulting in a:

3rd Degree Curve: y = ax3 + bx2 +cx + d

Free Software Site: http://www.rekenwonder.com/atlas.htm

146
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

BASIC PROCEDURE:
w (force/length)
load
1. Find all support forces.
VA
x w = VA x =
V diagram: height = VA w

2. At free ends and at simply supported ends, the

shear will have a zero value. shear
A
width = x
3. At the left support, the shear will equal the
reaction force.

4. The shear will not change in x until there is another load, where the shear is reduced if
the load is negative. If there is a distributed load, the change in shear is the area under
the loading.

5. At the right support, the reaction is treated just like the loads of step 4.

6. At the free end, the shear should go to zero.

M diagram:

7. At free ends and at simply supported ends, the moment will have a zero value.

8. At the left support, the moment will equal the reaction moment (if there is one).

9. The moment will not change in x until there is another load or applied moment, where the
moment is reduced if the applied moment is negative. If there is a value for shear on the
V diagram, the change in moment is the area under the shear diagram.

For a triangle in the shear diagram, the width will equal the height w!

10. At the right support, the moment reaction is treated just like the moments of step 9.

11. At the free end, the moment should go to zero.

147
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Parabolic Curve Shapes Based on Triangle Orientation

In order to tell if a parabola curves up or down from a triangular area in the preceding
diagram, the orientation of the triangle is used as a reference.

Geometry of Right Triangles

A
Similar triangles show that four triangles, each with the area of 4
the large triangle, fit within the large triangle. This means that A
of the area is on one side of the triangle, if a line is drawn though A 4 A
the middle of the base, and of the area is on the other side. 4 4

By how a triangle is oriented, we can determine the curve shape in the next diagram.

CASE 1: Positive triangle with fat side to the left.

75%

CASE 2: Positive triangle with fat side to the right.

+ 25%

CASE 3: Negative triangle with fat side to the left.

-
75%

CASE 4: Negative triangle with fat side to the right.

25%
-

148
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Example 1 (pg 273)

Verify the general equation

from Beam Diagrams & Formulas.

149
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Example 2 (pg 275)

20 k
10 k

RDx RD(y)
RB

10 k
w=2k/ft

A B C D

20 k 10 k

V+
x

M+

150
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Example 3 (pg 283)

151
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Example 4 (pg 285)

20 k

RCx
RA RC(y)
w =2 k/ft

A B C
15 k 5k

V+

M+

152
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Example 5 (pg 286)

MRA
4k
RAx
2k 8 k-ft
RAy

18 k-ft 8 k-ft
4k

4k A B C
2k 2k

V+

M+

153
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Example 6 (changed from pg 284)

0.75 m

0.75 m from the

SOLUTION:
Determine the reactions:
10 kN 6 kN
MRB
Fx = RBx = 0 RBx = 0 kN
Fy = 10kN (2 m)(3m) + RBy = 0
kN RBy = 16 kN
M B = (10kN )(2.25m) + (6kN )(1.5m) + M RB = 0 MRB = -31.5kN-m RBx
RBy
Draw the load diagram with the distributed load as given with the reactions. 10 kN
w = 2 kN/m
Shear Diagram: *31.5kN-m
I II
Label the load areas and calculate:
A C B
Area I = (-2 kN/m)(0.75 m) = -1.5 kN
Area II = (-2 kN/m)(2.25 m) = -4.5 kN 16 kN
VA = 0
V+
VC = VA + Area I = 0 -1.5 kN = -1.5 kN and (kN)
VC = VC + force at C = -1.5 kN -10 kN= -11.5 kN x
VB = VC + Area II = -11.5 kN -4.5 kN = -16 kN and III
VB = VB + force at B = -16 kN +16 kN= 0 kN -1.5
Bending Moment Diagram:
IV
-11.5
Label the load areas and calculate:
V
Area III = (-1.5 kN)(0.75 m)/2 = -0.5625 kN-m -16.5
Area IV = (-11.5 kN)(2.25m) = -25.875 kN-m
Area V = (-16 11.5 kN)(2.25m)/2 = -5.0625 kN-m *M+
(kN-m)
MA = 0 x
MC = MA + Area III = 0 - 0.5625 kN-m = - 0.5625 kN-m
MB = MC + Area IV + Area V = - 0.5625 kN-m - 25.875 kN-m - 5.0625 kN-m =
= -31.5 kN-m and -0.5625
MB = MB + moment at B = -31.5 kN-m + 31.5 kN-m = 0 kN-m

positive
MRB bending
moment
-31.5

154
ARCH 331 Note Set 7 Su2015abn

Example 7 (pg 287)

SOLUTION:
Determine the reactions: 450 N 450 N

Fx = RBx = 0 RBx = 0 kN
Fy = R Ay (300 m)(3m) 1 2 + (300 N m)(3m) 1 2 + RBy = 0
N

or by load tracing RAy & RBy = ( wL/2)/2 = (300 N/m)(6 m)/4 = 450 N RBx
M A = (450N )( 2 3 3m) (450N )(3 + 13 3m) + RBy (6m) = 0 RA(y) RB(y)
N/m
RBy = 450 N
w = 300

Draw the load diagram with the distributed load as given with the reactions. I II
Shear Diagram:
A C B
Label the load areas and calculate: 450 N 450 N
Area I = (-300 N/m)(3 m)/2 = -450 N
Area II = -300 N/m)(3 m)/2 = -450 N

VA = 0 and VA = VA + force at A = 0 + 450 N = 450 N

VC = VA + Area I = 450 N -450 N = 0 N
VB = VC + Area II = 0 N 450 N = -450 N and
VB = VB + force at B = -450 N + 450 N = 0 N
450
V+
Bending Moment Diagram: (N)
III x
Label the load areas and calculate:

Areas III & IV happen to be parabolic segments with an area of 2bh/3: IV

Area III = 2(3 m)(450 N)/3 = 900 N-m
Area IV = -2(3 m)(450 N)/3 = -900 N-m -450

MA = 0
MC = MA + Area III = 0 + 900 N-m = 900 N-m
MB = MC + Area IV = 900 N-m - 900 N-m = 0
M+ 900
We can prove that the area is a parabolic segment by using
the equilibrium method at C: (N-m)
x
M sec tion cut = M C (450N )(3m) + (450N )( 1 3 3m) =0
so Mc = 900 N-m
450 N

MC

V
450 N
155
ARCH 331 Note Set 8.1 F2014abn

Beam Analysis Using Multiframe

1. The software is on the computers in the College of Architecture in Programs under the Windows
Start menu (see https://wikis.arch.tamu.edu/display/HELPDESK/Computer+Accounts for lab
locations). Multiframe is under the Bentley Engineering menu.
2. There available on line at http://www.daystarsoftware.com/support/mftutorials that list the
tasks and order in greater detail. The first task is to define the unit system:
Choose Units from the View menu. Unit sets are available, but specific units can also
be selected by double clicking on a unit or format and making a selection from the menu.

3. To see the scale of the geometry, a grid option is available:

Choose Grid from the View menu

4. To create the geometry, you must be in the Frame window (default). The symbol is the
frame in the window toolbar:

The Member toolbar shows ways to create members:

The Generate toolbar has convenient tools to create typical structural

shapes.
To create a beam with supports at one or both
ends, use the add member button:

157
ARCH 331 Note Set 8.1 F2014abn

Select a starting point and ending point with the cursor. The location of the cursor and
the segment length is displayed at the bottom of the geometry window.
To create a beam with supports NOT at the ends, use the add
connected members button to create segments between
supports and ends
Select a starting point and ending point with the cursor. The location of the cursor and
the segment length is displayed at the bottom of the geometry window. The ESC button
will end the segmented drawing.
The geometry can be set
precisely by selecting the
beam member, bringing up the
specific menu (right click),
choosing Member Properties
to set the length.

The support types can be set by selecting the joint

(drag) and using the Joint Toolbar (pin shown), or the
Frame / Joint Restraint ... menu (right click).
NOTE: If the support appears at both ends of the beam,
you had the beam selected rather than the joint. Select
the joint to change the support for and right click to
select the joint restraints menu or select the correct
support on the joint toolbar.
The support forces will be determined in the analysis.

5. All members must have sections assigned (see section 6.) in order to calculate reactions and
deflections. To use a standard steel section proceed to step 6. For custom sections, the
section information must be entered. To define a section:
Choose Edit Sections / Add Section
from the Edit menu
Type a name for your new section
Choose group Frame from the group
names provided so that the section
will remain with the file data
Choose a shape. The Flat Bar shape is
a rectangular section.
Enter the cross section data.

158
ARCH 331 Note Set 8.1 F2014abn

Table values 1-9 must have values for a Flat Bar, but not all are used for every analysis. A
recommendation is to put the value of 1 for those properties you dont know or care about.
Properties like tf, tw, etc. refer to wide flange sections.
Answer any query. If the message says there is an error, the section will not be created
until the error is corrected.

6. The standard sections library loaded is for the United States. If another section library is
needed, use the Open Sections Library... command under the file menu, choose the library
folder, and select the SectionsLibrary.slb file.

Select the members (drag to make bold) and assign sections with the Section button on the
Member toolbar:

Choose the group name and section name:

(STANDARD SHAPES) (CUSTOM)

7. The beam geometry is complete, and in order to define the load conditions you must be in the
Load window represented by the green arrow:

8. The Load toolbar allows a joint to be loaded with a force or a moment in global coordinates,
shown by the first two buttons after the display numbers button. It allows a member to be
loaded with a distributed load, concentrated load or moment (next three buttons) in global
coordinates, as well as loading with distributed or single force or moment in the local
coordinate system (next three buttons). It allows a load panel to be loaded with a distributed
load in global or local coordinates (last two buttons).

Choose the member to be loaded (drag) and

select the load type (here shown for global
distributed loading):

159
ARCH 331 Note Set 8.1 F2014abn

Choose the distribution type and

direction. Note that the arrow
shown is the direction of the
loading. There is no need to put in
negative values for downward
loading.
Enter the values of the load and
distances (if any). Distances can be
entered as a function of the length ,
i.e. L/2, L/4...

NOTE: Do not put support reactions as

applied loads. The analysis will determine
the reaction values.
Multiframe will automatically generate a
grouping called a Load Case named Load
Case 1 when a load is created. All
additional loads will be added to this load
case unless a new load case is defined (Add
case under the Case menu).

9. In order to run the analysis after the

geometry, member properties and loading has been defined:
Choose Linear from the Analyze menu
10. If the analysis is successful, you can view the results in the
Plot window represented by the red moment diagram:

11. The Plot toolbar allows the numerical values to be shown (1.0
button), the reaction arrows to be shown (brown up arrow) and
reaction moments to be shown (brown curved arrow):

To show the moment diagram, Choose the red Moment button

To show the shear diagram, Choose the green Shear button

To show the axial force diagram, Choose the purple Axial Force
button

To show the deflection diagram, Choose the blue Deflection

button
To animate the deflection diagram, Choose Animate... from the Display menu. You can
also save the animation to a .avi file by checking the box.

160
ARCH 331 Note Set 8.1 F2014abn

To plot the bending moment on the top choose Preferences from the Edit menu and
under the Presentation tab Draw moments on the compression face

To see exact values of shear, moment and deflection, double click on the member and
move the vertical cross hair with the mouse. The ESC key will return you to the window.

12. The Data window (D) allows you to view all data entered
for the geometry, sections and loading. These values can be
edited.

13. The Results window (R) allows you to view all results of the analysis including
displacements, reactions, member forces (actions) and stresses. These values can be cut and
pasted into other Windows programs such as Word or Excel.

NOTE: Px refers to the axial load (P) in the local axis x direction (x). Vy refers to the
shear perpendicular to the local x axis, and Mz refers to the bending moment.

14. To save the file Choose Save from the File menu.

15. To load an existing file Choose Open... from the File menu.

16. To print a plot Choose Print Window... from the File menu. As an alternative, you may copy
the plot (Ctrl+c) and paste it in a word processing document (Ctrl+v).

161
 BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions, AISC ASD 8th ed.

(w) wl
W =
2

wl
(w) W =
2

ARCH 331 163 of Note Set 8.2 Su2015abn

 Note Set 8.2 (page 164)

ARCH 331 164 of Note Set 8.2 Su2015abn

 Note Set 8.2 (page 165)

ARCH 331 165 of Note Set 8.2 Su2015abn

 Note Set 8.2 (page 166)

(w)
wl
W =
2

ARCH 331 166 of Note Set 8.2 Su2015abn

 Note Set 8.2 (page 167)

NOTE: For a negative value of x, deflection is upward.

ARCH 331 167 of Note Set 8.2 Su2015abn

 Note Set 8.2 (page 168)

ARCH 331 168 of Note Set 8.2 Su2015abn

 Note Set 8.2 (page 169)

ARCH 331 169 of Note Set 8.2 Su2015abn

ARCH 331 Note Set 9.1 S2015abn

Centers of Gravity - Centroids

Notation:
A = name for area x = the distance in the x direction from
C = designation for channel section a reference axis to the centroid of a
= name for centroid composite shape
Fz = force component in the z direction y = vertical distance
L = name for length y = the distance in the y direction from
O = name for reference origin a reference axis to the centroid of a
Qx = first moment area about an x axis shape
(using y distances) y = the distance in the y direction from
Qy = first moment area about an y axis a reference axis to the centroid of a
(using x distances) composite shape
t = name for thickness z = distance perpendicular to x-y plane
tw = thickness of web of wide flange
= symbol for integration
W = name for force due to weight
= designation for wide flange section = calculus symbol for small quantity
x = horizontal distance = density of a material (unit weight)
x = the distance in the x direction from = summation symbol
a reference axis to the centroid of a
shape

The cross section shape and how it resists bending and twisting is important to understanding
beam and column behavior.

The center of gravity is the location of the equivalent force representing the total weight of a
body comprised of particles that each have a mass gravity acts upon.
z y W
W 4 W 1
W 3 W 2

x
Resultant force: Over a body of constant thickness in x and y
n

Fz = Wi = W
i =1
W = dW

Location: x , y is the equivalent location of the force W from all Wis over all x & y
locations (with respect to the moment from each force) from:
n
xdW (xW )
M y = xi Wi = x W
i =1
x W = xdW x =
W
OR x=
W
n
ydW ( yW )
M x = y i Wi = y W
i =1
yW = ydW y =
W
OR y=
W

171
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.1 S2015abn

The centroid of an area is the average x and y locations of the area particles

For a discrete shape (Ai) of a uniform thickness and material, the weight can be defined as:
Wi = tA i where:
is weight per unit volume (= specific weight) with units of N/m3 or lb/ft3
tAi is the volume

So if W = tA :
( xA) ( yA)
x tA = xtdA x A = xdA OR x= and similarly y=
A A
Similarly, for a line with constant cross section, a ( Wi = aLi ):
( xL ) ( yL )
xL = xdL OR x= and yL = ydL OR y=
L L

x , y with respect to an x, y coordinate system is the centroid of an area AND the center
of gravity for a body of uniform material and thickness.

The first moment of the area is like a force moment: and is the area multiplied by the
perpendicular distance to an axis.
Q x = ydA = yA Q y = xdA = xA y

.A
y

x
x

172
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.1 S2015abn

Centroids of Common Shapes

b
3
x
b

173
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.1 S2015abn

Symmetric Areas

- An area is symmetric with respect to a line when every point on one side is mirrored on
the other. The line divides the area into equal parts and the centroid will be on that axis.

- An area can be symmetric to a center point when every (x,y) point is matched by a (-x,-y)
point. It does not necessarily have an axis of symmetry. The center point is the centroid.

- If the symmetry line is on an axis, the centroid location is on that axis (value of 0). With
double symmetry, the centroid is at the intersection.

- Symmetry can also be defined by areas that match across a line, but are 180 to each
other.

Basic Steps

1. Draw a reference origin.

2. Divide the area into basic shapes

3. Label the basic shapes (components)

4. Draw a table with headers of Component, Area, x , x A , y , yA

5. Fill in the table value

6. Draw a summation line. Sum all the areas, all the x A terms, and all the yA terms

7. Calculate x and y

Composite Shapes

If we have a shape made up of basic shapes that we know centroid locations for, we can find
an average centroid of the areas.
y
n n n n
xA = x Ai = xi Ai yA = y Ai = y i Ai
i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1
A1 A2 A3
x A yA
OR x = y =
A A x

Centroid values can be negative.

Area values can be negative (holes)

174
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.1 S2015abn

Example 1 (pg 243)

x ( in.) x A ( in.3 ) y ( in.) yA ( in.3 )

202 .5 in 3
x =
40 .5 in 2
= 5 in

94 .5 in 3
y =
40 .5 in 2
= 2.33 in

x A y A

Example 2 (pg 245)*

A 6 thick concrete wall panel is precast to the dimensions as shown. Using the upper left
corner of area II as the reference origin, determine the center of gravity (centroid) of the Ref. origin
panel.

175
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

Moments of Inertia

Notation:
A = name for area ro = polar radius of gyration
b = name for a (base) width rx = radius of gyration with respect to an
d = calculus symbol for differentiation x-axis
= name for a difference ry = radius of gyration with respect to a
= name for a depth y-axis
dx = difference in the x direction tf = thickness of a flange
between an area centroid ( x ) and tw = thickness of web of wide flange
the centroid of the composite shape x = horizontal distance
( x ) x = the distance in the x direction from
dy = difference in the y direction a reference axis to the centroid of a
between an area centroid ( y ) and shape
the centroid of the composite shape x = the distance in the x direction from
( y ) a reference axis to the centroid of a
h = name for a height composite shape
y = vertical distance
I = moment of inertia about the
y = the distance in the y direction from
centroid
Ic = moment of inertia of a component a reference axis to the centroid of a
about the centroid shape
Ix = moment of inertia with respect to an y = the distance in the y direction from
x-axis a reference axis to the centroid of a
Iy = moment of inertia with respect to a composite shape
y-axis P
L = plate symbol
Jo = polar moment of inertia, as is J = symbol for integration
O = name for reference origin = summation symbol

The cross section shape and how it resists bending and twisting is important to understanding
beam and column behavior.

Definition: Moment of Inertia; the second area moment y

I y = x 2 dA I x = y 2 dA

We can define a single integral using a narrow strip: dA = ydx

for Ix,, strip is parallel to x for Iy, strip is parallel to y x

x el dx
*I can be negative if the area is negative (a hole or subtraction).

A shape that has area at a

greater distance away from an
axis through its centroid will x x x x
have a larger value of I.

177
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

Just like for center of gravity of an area, the moment of inertia can be determined with
respect to any reference axis.

Definition: Polar Moment of Inertia; the second area moment using polar coordinate axes

J o = r 2 dA = x 2 dA + y 2 dA
r
Jo = Ix + I y
o
Definition: Radius of Gyration; the distance from the moment of pole
inertia axis for an area at which the entire area could be considered as
being concentrated at.
2 Ix
I x = rx A rx = radius of gyration in x
A
Iy
ry = radius of gyration in y
A
Jo
ro = polar radius of gyration, and ro2 = rx2 + ry2
A

The Parallel-Axis Theorem

The moment of inertia of an area with respect to any axis not through its centroid is equal to
the moment of inertia of that area with respect to its own parallel centroidal axis plus the
product of the area and the square of the distance between the two axes.

dA y
I = y dA = ( y -d ) dA
2
2
B B axis through centroid
at a distance d away
= y 2 dA + 2d y dA + d 2 dA y d from the other axis

A A axis to find moment of

inertia about

but y dA = 0 , because the centroid is on this axis, resulting in:

2 2
I x = I cx + Ad y (text notation) or I x = I x + Ad y
where Icx (or I x )is the moment of inertia about the centroid of the area about an x axis and
dy is the y distance between the parallel axes

178
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

2
Similarly I y = I y + Ad x Moment of inertia about a y axis
J o = J c + Ad 2 Polar moment of Inertia
2 2 2
r =r +d
o c Polar radius of gyration
2 2 2
r =r +d Radius of gyration

* I can be negative again if the area is negative (a hole or subtraction).

** If I is not given in a chart, but x & y are: YOU MUST CALCULATE I WITH I = I Ad 2

Composite Areas:

I = I + Ad 2 where I is the moment of inertia about the centroid of the component area
d is the distance from the centroid of the component area to the
centroid of the composite area (ie. dy = y - y )
Basic Steps

1. Draw a reference origin.

2. Divide the area into basic shapes
3. Label the basic shapes (components)
4. Draw a table with headers of
Component, Area, x , x A , y , yA , I x , dy, Ady2, I y , dx, Adx2

5. Fill in the table values needed to calculate x and y for the composite
6. Fill in the rest of the table values.
7. Sum the moment of inertia ( I s) and Ad2 columns and add together.

179
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

Geometric Properties of Areas

Area = bh
x = b/2
about y = h/2
bottom
left

Triangle
Area = bh
2
xb
3
x I y' 1 3
b h yh
b 36 3

Area = r 2 d
2

x =0
y =0

I x = 0.1098r4
Area = r d
2 2

2 8
Iy = r 4 8

x =0 y = 4r
3

Area = r d
2 2
I x = 0.0549r4
4 16
I y = 0.0549r4
x = 4r
3
y = 4r
3

Area = ab
x =0
y =0

I x = 16ah3 175 Area = 4ah

3
Iy = 4a3h 15
x =0 y = 3h
5

I x = 37ah3 2100 Area = ah

3
Iy = a3h 80
x = 3a y = 3h
4 10

180
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

Example 1 (pg 257) x = 3 . 05 "

Find the moments of inertia ( x = 3.05, y = 1.05).

y = 1.05"

Example 2 (pg 253)

181
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

Example 3
Determine the moments of inertia about the
centroid of the shape.

Solution:

There is no reference origin suggested in

figure (a), so the bottom left corner is good.

In figure (b) area A will be a complete rectangle, o

while areas C and A are "holes" with negative area
and negative moment of inertias.

Area A = 200 mm x 100 mm = 20000 mm2 Ix = (200 mm)(100 mm)3/12 = 16.667 x 106 mm4
Iy = (200 mm)3(100 mm)/12 = 66.667 x 106 mm4

Area B = -(30 mm)2 = -2827.4 mm2 Ix = Iy = - (30 mm)4/4 = -0.636 x 106 mm4

Area C = -1/2(50 mm)2 = 3927.0 mm2 Ix = - (50 mm)4/8 = -2.454 x 106 mm4
Iy = -0.1098(50 mm)4= -0.686 x 106 mm4

Area D = 100 mm x 200 mm x 1/2 = 10000 mm2 Ix = (200 mm)(100 mm)3/36 = 5.556 x 106 mm4
Iy = (200 mm)3(100 mm)/36 = 22.222 x 106 mm4

shape
2 3
A (mm ) x (mm) x A (mm ) y (mm) y A (mm )
3 2159218 mm 3
x = = 92 .9 mm
A 20000 100 2000000 50 1000000 23245.58 mm 2
B -2827.43 150 -424115 50 -141372 1995612 mm 3
C -3926.99 21.22066 -83333.3 50 -196350 y = = 85.8 mm
23245.58 mm 2
D 10000 66.66667 666666.7 133.3333 1333333
23245.58 2159218 1995612

4 2 4 4 2 4
shape Ix (mm ) dy (mm) Ady (mm ) Iy (mm ) dx (mm) Adx (mm )
A 16666667 35.8 25632800 66666667 -7.1 1008200
B -636173 35.8 -3623751.73 -636173 -57.1 -9218592.093
C -2454369 35.8 -5032988.51 -686250 71.67934 -20176595.22
D 5555556 -47.5333 22594177.8 22222222 26.23333 6881876.029
19131680 39570237.5 87566466 -21505111.29

So, Ix = 19131680 + 39570237.5 = 58701918 = 58.7 x 106 mm4

Ix = 87566466 +-21505111.3 = 43572025 = 66.1 x 106 mm4

182
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

Example 4 (pg 258)

183
ARCH 331 Note Set 9.2 S2015abn

Example 5 (pg 249)*

.282

Also determine the moment of inertia

about both major centroidal axes.

0.22

shape A (in )
2
x (in)
3
x A (in ) y (in) y A (in )
3
0 in 3
x = = 0 in
channel 6.09 0 0.00 9.694 59.04 20.8 in 2
left plate 5 -3.25 -16.25 5.11 25.55 110.14 in 3
right plate 5 3.25 16.25 5.11 25.55 y = = 5.295 in
20.8 in 2
wide flange 4.71 0 0.00 0 0.00
20.80 0.00 110.14

4 2 4 4 2 4
shape Ix (in ) dy (in) Ady (in ) Iy (in ) dx (in) Adx (in )
channel 3.880 -4.399 117.849 129.000 0.000 0.000
left plate 41.667 0.185 0.171 0.104 3.250 52.813
right plate 41.667 0.185 0.171 0.104 -3.250 52.813
wide flange 2.800 5.295 132.054 103.000 0.000 0.000
90.013 250.245 232.208 105.625

Ix = 90.013 + 250.245 = 340.259 = 340.3 in4

Iy = 232.208 + 105.625 = 337.833 = 337.8 in4

184
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Beam Bending Stresses and Shear Stress

Notation:
A = name for area n = number of connectors across a joint
Aweb = area of the web of a wide flange n.a. = shorthand for neutral axis (N.A.)
section O = name for reference origin
b = width of a rectangle p = pitch of connector spacing
= total width of material at a P = name for a force vector
horizontal section q = shear per length (shear flow)
c = largest distance from the neutral Q = first moment area about a neutral
axis to the top or bottom edge of a axis
beam Qconnected = first moment area about a neutral
d = calculus symbol for differentiation axis for the connected part
= depth of a wide flange section R = radius of curvature of a deformed
dy = difference in the y direction beam
between an area centroid ( y ) and S = section modulus
the centroid of the composite shape Sreqd = section modulus required at
( y ) allowable stress
DL = shorthand for dead load tw = thickness of web of wide flange
E = modulus of elasticity or Youngs V = internal shear force
modulus Vlongitudinal = longitudinal shear force
fb = bending stress VT = transverse shear force
fc = compressive stress w = name for distributed load
fmax = maximum stress x = horizontal distance
ft = tensile stress y = vertical distance
fv = shear stress y = the distance in the y direction from
Fb = allowable bending stress a reference axis (n.a) to the centroid
Fconnector = shear force capacity per of a shape
connector y = the distance in the y direction from
h = height of a rectangle a reference axis to the centroid of a
I = moment of inertia with respect to composite shape
neutral axis bending = calculus symbol for small quantity
Ix = moment of inertia with respect to an = elongation or length change
x-axis = strain
L = name for length = arc angle
LL = shorthand for live load = summation symbol
M = internal bending moment
= name for a moment vector

185
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Pure Bending in Beams

With bending moments along the axis of the member only, a beam is
said to be in pure bending.

Normal stresses due to bending can be found for homogeneous

materials having a plane of symmetry in the y axis that follow
Hookes law.
y

x
Maximum Moment and Stress Distribution

In a member of constant cross section, the maximum bending moment will govern the design of
the section size when we know what kind of normal stress is caused by it.

For internal equilibrium to be maintained, the bending moment will be equal to the M from the
normal stresses the areas the moment arms. Geometric fit helps solve this statically
indeterminate problem:

1. The normal planes remain normal for pure bending.

2. There is no net internal axial force.
3. Stress varies linearly over cross section.
4. Zero stress exists at the centroid and the line of centroids is the neutral axis (n. a)

186
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Relations for Beam Geometry and Stress

Pure bending results in a circular arc deflection. R is the R
distance to the center of the arc; is the angle of the arc
(radians); c is the distance from the n.a. to the extreme fiber; fmax
is the maximum normal stress at the extreme fiber; y is a
distance in y from the n.a.; M is the bending moment; I is the c y
L
moment of inertia; S is the section modulus.
y
L = R = =R f = E = f max
L c
f max I Mc M
M = f i Ai M = y i2 Ai I = y 2 A S= f max = =
c c I S
My bh 3 bh 2
Now: fb = for a rectangle of height h and width b: S= =
I 12 h 6
2

RELATIONS: 1 M *
My I
= fb = S =
R EI I c

Mc M M
f b max = = S required
I S Fb

*Note: y positive goes DOWN. With a positive M and y to the bottom fiber as positive, it results
in a TENSION stress (weve called positive)

Transverse Loading in Beams

We are aware that transverse beam loadings result in internal

shear and bending moments.

We designed sections based on bending stresses, since this stress

dominates beam behavior.

There can be shear stresses horizontally within a beam member.

It can be shown that f horizontal = f vertical

187
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Equilibrium and Derivation

In order for equilibrium for any element CDDC, there needs to be a horizontal force H.

V = f D dA f C dA

Q is a moment area with respect to the neutral axis of the area above or below the horizontal
where the H occurs.
VT Q
Vlongitudin al = x
Q is a maximum when y = 0 (at the neutral axis). I

q is a horizontal shear per unit length shear flow Vlongitudin al VT Q

q= =
x I
Shearing Stresses

f v ave = 0 on the beams surface. Even if Q is a maximum at y = 0, we

dont know that the thickness is a minimum there.

V V
fv = =
A b x

VQ
f v ave =
Ib

Rectangular Sections

f v max occurs at the neutral axis:

2
bh 3 Q = A y = b h 1 2 h = bh
I = 2 2 8
12
then:

VQ V 18 bh 2 3V 3V
fv = = = fv =
Ib 1 bh 3 b
12 2bh 2A

188
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Webs of Beams

In steel W or S sections the thickness

varies from the flange to the web.

We neglect the shear stress in the flanges

and consider the shear stress in the web to
be constant:

3V V V
f v max = f v max =
2 A Aweb t web d

Webs of I beams can fail in tension shear across a

panel with stiffeners or the web can buckle.

Shear Flow

Even if the cut we make to find Q is not horizontal, but

arbitrary, we can still find the shear flow, q, as long as the
loads on thin-walled sections are applied in a plane of
symmetry, and the cut is made perpendicular to the surface of
the member.
VQ
q=
I

The shear flow magnitudes can

be sketched by knowing Q.

189
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Connectors to Resist Horizontal Shear in Composite Members

p
Typical connections needing to resist shear are y p
plates with nails or rivets or bolts in composite p
8
sections or splices. 2
4.43
x 4
ya
2
The pitch (spacing) can be determined by the
12
capacity in shear of the connector(s) to the shear flow
over the spacing interval, p.

Vlongitudinal VQ VQ
= Vlongitudinal = p
p I I
where
VQconnected area
p = pitch length nFconnector p
I
n = number of connectors connecting the connected area to the rest of the cross section

F = force capacity in one connector

Qconnected area = Aconnected area yconnected area

yconnected area = distance from the centroid of the connected area to the neutral axis

Connectors to Resist Horizontal Shear in Composite Members p

p
Even vertical connectors have shear flow across them. p

The spacing can be determined by the capacity in shear of the

connector(s) to the shear flow over the spacing interval, p.
nFconnector I
p
VQconnected area

Unsymmetrical Sections or Shear

If the section is not symmetric, or has a shear not in that plane, the member can bend and twist.

If the load is applied at the shear center

there will not be twisting. This is the
location where the moment caused by
shear flow = the moment of the shear
force about the shear center.

190
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Example 1 (pg 303)

191
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Example 2 (pg 309)

Second Floor:

, and evaluate the shear stress.

*Also select the most economical
Roof: Snow +DL = 200 lb/ft
steel section for the second-floor
Walls: 400 lb on 2nd floor beams
when Sreqd 165 in3 and evaluate
Railing: 100 lb on beam overhang
the shear stress when V = 60 k.
Second Floor: DL + LL = 300 lb/ft
(including overhang)

Roof:

192
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Example 3 (pg 313)

ALSO: Determine the minimum nail

spacing required (pitch) if the shear
capacity of a nail (Fconnector) is 250 lb.

7 84

12 3 36

193
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.1 F2014abn

Example 4

y= 4.5"

Q = Ay = (9")(")(4.5")+(9")(")(4.5")+(1.5")(3.5")(8.25") = 83.8 in3

(2,600 # )(83.3in. 3 )
f v max = = 180.2 psi
(1,202.6 in. 4 )( 1 2 "+ 1 2 " ) (n)
(n)

(n)

(n)FI
(n)F p

194
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.2 S2009abn

Introduction to Beam Stress Analysis and Preliminary Design

Beam Analysis

When the beam section is already known, beam analysis is used to calculate the maximum
stresses. Beam design involves finding a trial section, recognizing that there is more load from
the beam weight itself, performing analysis AND comparing stresses to some limits until the
section satisfies all criteria.

Analysis Procedure

1. Solve for support forces and draw V & M diagrams to obtain Vmax and Mmax (maximum
magnitudes)
2. Determine the critical section geometry properties:
- centroid: y (necessary to find the neutral axis, Ix, and to determine c the distance
from the neutral axis to the extreme fiber of the cross section) (Note Set 9.1)
- moment of inertia about axis of bending: Ix (Note Set 9.2)
- section modulus Sx (Sx = Ix/c)
NOTE: if the section is a standard shape, the properties will be pre-determined and available
in reference charts.
Mc M
3. Calculate maximum bending stress using Mmax: f b max = =
Ix Sx
4. Calculate maximum shear stress using Vmax:
3V
a. For a rectangular section ONLY: fv =
2A
- A is the area (bh)
V
b. For a wide flange section ONLY: fv =
Aweb
- Aweb is the area determined from the thickness of the web and depth of the W (twd).
These values are available in reference charts.
VQ
c. OTHERWISE: f v ave = where:
I xb
- Q is the first moment area of a section cut at the neutral axis. It is the sum of all the
basic areas of the section multiplied by y distances from the neutral axis for each to
their centroids: Q = Ay . y is always measured from the neutral axis as the origin
(y=0). (Note Set 10.1)
- b is the thickness of the section cut from the real material (voids arent included).
- Ix is the moment of inertia about the x axis (neutral axis)

195
ARCH 331 Note Set 10.2 S2009abn

5. If a section is built-up, and the shear force across an interface or the spacing for nails across
that interface to resist the shear force is needed, then the form of the shear stress equation
becomes:
VQ connected area
nFconnector p
Ix
- n is the number of nails or bolts connecting the parts at the interface(s) of interest
- Fconnector is the shear force per nail or bolt that the connector can resists (capacity)
- Qconnected area is the first moment of area a section cut at the interface(s) of interest to
isolate the connected part. It is the sum of all the basic areas of the section multiplied
by y distances from the neutral axis for each to their centroids: Q = Ay . y is
always measured from the neutral axis as the origin (y=0). (Note Set 10.1)
- p is the pitch spacing between connectors along the axis of the beam
- Ix is the moment of inertia about the x axis (neutral axis)

Beam Design

Design implies that the beam section has not yet been determined. Design involves choosing a
trial section (preliminary design), then checking at every important computation of stress or
deflection that the computed value does not exceed the acceptable limits. A finalized design
means the section has been changed because of an unacceptable evaluation, but now meets all
criteria.

Preliminary Design Procedure

The intent is to find the most light weight member satisfying the section modulus size.

1. Know Fb (allowable stress) for the material or Fy & Fu for LRFD.

2. Draw V & M, finding Mmax.
M
3. Calculate Sreqd using Mmax: S required
Fb
M max
- This step is equivalent to evaluating if f b = Fb
Sx
bh 2
4. For rectangular beams Sx =
6
- For steel or timber: use the section charts to find S that will work. And for steel, the
design charts show the lightest section within a grouping of similar Ss.
- For any thing else, try a nice value for b, and calculate h or the other way around.

196
ARCH 331 Note Set 11 S2015abn

Pinned Frames and Arches

Notation:
F = name for force vectors R = name for reaction force vector
Fx = force component in the x direction w = name for distributed load
Fy = force component in the y direction W = name for total force due to
FBD = free body diagram distributed load
M = name for reaction moment, as is MR = summation symbol

A FRAME is made up of members where at least one member has more than 3 forces on it
Usually stationary and fully constrained
-

A PINNED FRAME has member connected by pins

- Considered non-rigid if it would collapse when the supports are
removed
- Considered rigid if it retains its original shape when the supports are
removed

A RIGID FRAME is all one member with no internal pins

- Typically statically indeterminate
- Portal frames look like door frames
- Gable frames have a peak.

INTERNAL PIN CONNECTIONS:

- Pin connection forces are equal and opposite between the bodies they connect.
- There are 2 unknown forces at a pin, but if we know a body is a two-force body, the
direction of the resultant force is known.
B

G
C
E F

A D
Ax
Ay
D
197
ARCH 331 Note Set 11 S2015abn

AN ARCH is a structural shape that can span large distances and sees compression along its
slope. It may have no hinges (or pins), two hinges at the supports, or two hinges at the
supports with a hinge at the apex. The three-hinged arch types are statically determinate with
2 bodies and 6 unknown forces.

CONTINUOUS BEAMS WITH PINS:

- If pins within the span of a beam over multiple supports result in static determinacy (the
right number of unknowns for the number of equilibrium equations), the internal forces at
the pins are applied as reactions to the adjacent span.

F1 F2 F1 F2
MR1 R2x
R2x
R1x

R1y R2y R2y R3

- The location of the internal pins can be chosen to increase or decrease the moments in
order to make the section economical for both positive bending and negative bending
(similar values for the moments).

Solution Procedure

1. Solve for the support forces on the entire frame (FBD) if possible.
2. Draw a FBD of each member:
- Consider all two-force bodies first.
- Pins are integral with members
- Pins with applied forces should belong to members with greater than two forces
[Same if pins connect 3 or more members]
- Draw forces on either side of a pin equal and opposite with arbitrary direction chosen for
the first side
- Consider all multi-force bodies
- Represent connection forces not known by x & y components
- There are still three equilibrium equations available, but the moment equations may be
more helpful when the number of unknowns is greater than two.

198
ARCH 331 Note Set 11 S2015abn

Example 1 (pg 114)

199
ARCH 331 Note Set 11 S2015abn

Example 2 (changed from pg 115)

Solution:

Draw the system FBD and write three equilibrium equations:

M A = 10 kN 7 m 22 kN 7 m 25kN 14 m + D y 21m = 0
Dy = 27.33 kN
Fy = 10 kN 22 kN 25kN + Ay + D y = 0
Ay = 29.67 kN
Fx = 10kN + Ax + Dx = 0 Ax Dx

Draw the FBDs for the parts, and wait to put on the 25 kN load at B Ay Dy
because it can only go on one FBD. Well also wait to draw the
connection force components at B:
B
Notice that body BCD is a 2-force body if we choose to put the 25 kN at B
on body AEFB! That means that the force at B and the force at D must
be equal, opposite and in the direction of the line from B to D (shown as a
long-dashed line)

We can find Dx (which must be pointing into D like Dy is) with similar
triangles: Ax Dx

Dx 7m Dx 29.67 kN
= = so Dx = 18.22 kN (to the left) 27.33 kN
Dy 10.5m 27.33kN

and B = (27.33m) 2 + (18.22m ) 2 = 32.85 kN

By
B
Even if we hadnt figured out the connection force at B by
knowing it was on a 2-force body, we could still use the
FBD for AEFB because there are only 3 unknowns.
Drawing Bx and By in the positive direction on body AEFB Bx Bx
yields: By

M B = Ax 10.5m 29.67 kN 14 m +
10 kN 3.5m + 10 kN 14 m + 22 kN 7 m = 0 Ax
Ax = 8.23 kN
18.22 kN
Fy = 10 kN 22 kN 25kN + 29.33kN + By = 0
29.67kN 27.33 kN
By = 27.33 kN (up wrt* AEFB)
Fx = 10 kN + Ax + Bx = 0
Bx = -18.23 kN (to the left wrt* AEFB)

So the horizontal reaction force at B pushes to the left on the left FBD and to the right (opposite) on the right FBD, while the
vertical reaction force at B pushes up on the left FBD and down (opposite) on the right FBD.

*wrt - with respect to

200
ARCH 331 Note Set 11 S2015abn

Example 3 (pg 73)

w1 =200 lb/ft
Also construct the shear and bending moment diagrams. w2 =150 lb/ft

A B C D
1275 lb 3625 lb 900 lb

V+

M+

201
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

Rigid and Braced Frames

Notation:
E = modulus of elasticity or Youngs k = effective length factor for columns
modulus lb = length of beam in rigid joint
Fx = force component in the x direction lc = length of column in rigid joint
Fy = force component in the y direction
FBD = free body diagram L = name for length
G = relative stiffness of columns to M = internal bending moment
= name for a moment vector
beams in a rigid connection, as is
V = internal shear force
I = moment of inertia with respect to
= summation symbol
neutral axis bending

Rigid Frames

Rigid frames are identified by the lack of pinned

joints within the frame. The joints are rigid and
resist rotation. They may be supported by pins or
fixed supports. They are typically statically
indeterminate.

Frames are useful to resist lateral loads.

Frame members will see

shear
bending
axial forces

and behave like beam-columns.

Behavior

The relation between the joints has to be maintained, but the whole joint can
rotate. The amount of rotation and distribution of moment depends on the
stiffness (EI/L) of the members in the joint.

End restraints on columns reduce the effective length, allowing columns to be

more slender. Because of the rigid joints, deflections and moments in beams
are reduced as well.

Frames are sensitive to settlement because it induces strains and changes the stress distribution.

203
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

Types

Gabled has a peak

Portal resembles a door. Multi-story, multiple bay portal frames are

commonly used for commercial and industrial construction. The
floor behavior is similar to that of continuous beams.

Staggered Truss Full story trusses are staggered through the frame bays, Staggered Truss
allowing larger clear stories.

Connections

Steel Flanges of members are fully attached to the flanges of the

other member. This can be done with welding, or bolted plates.
Reinforced Concrete Joints are monolithic with continuous
reinforcement for bending. Shear is resisted with stirrups and ties.

Braced Frames

Braced frames have beams and columns that are pin

connected with bracing to resist lateral loads.

Types of Bracing

knee-bracing
diagonal (including eccentric)
X diagonal X

K or chevron
shear walls which resist
lateral forces in the plane
of the wall

shear walls K (chevron)

Rigid Frame Analysis

Structural analysis methods such as the portal method (approximate), the method of virtual work,
Castiglianos theorem, the force method, the slope-displacement method, the stiffness method,
and matrix analysis, can be used to solve for internal forces and moments and support reactions.

Shear and bending moment diagrams can be drawn for frame members by isolating the member
from a joint and drawing a free body diagram. The internal forces at the end will be equal and
opposite, just like for connections in pinned frames. Direction of the beam-like member is
usually drawn by looking from the inside of the frame.
204
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

P
M+

M+
M+
Frame Columns

Because joints can rotate in frames, the effective length of the column in a frame is harder to
determine. The stiffness (EI/L) of each member in a joint determines how rigid or flexible it is.
To find k, the relative stiffness, G or , must be found for both ends, plotted on the alignment
charts, and connected by a line for braced and unbraced fames.

EI l
c
G = =
EI
l
b
where
E = modulus of elasticity for a member
I = moment of inertia of for a member
lc = length of the column from center to center
lb = length of the beam from center to center

For pinned connections we typically use a value of 10 for .

For fixed connections we typically use a value of 1 for .

Braced non-sway frame Unbraced sway frame

Frame Design

The possible load combinations for frames with dead load, live load, wind load, etc. is critical to
the design. The maximum moments (positive and negative) may be found from different
combinations and at different locations. Lateral wind loads can significantly affect the maximum
moments.

205
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

Plates and Slabs

If the frame is rigid or non-rigid, the floors can be a

plate or slab (which has drop panels around columns).
These elements behave differently depending on their
supports and the ratio of the sides.

one-way behavior: like a wide beam, when

ratio of sides > 1.5
two-way behavior: complex, non-determinate, look for handbook solutions

Floor Loading Patterns

With continuous beams or floors, the worst case loading typically

occurs when alternate spans are loaded with live load (not every
span). The maximum positive and negative moments may not be
found for the same loading case! If you are designing with
reinforced concrete, you must provide flexure reinforcement on the
top and bottom and take into consideration that the maximum may
move.

206
 ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

Example 1 40 k B 15 ft C
The rigid frame shown has been analyzed using an advanced structural analysis
technique. The reactions at support A are: Ax = -28.6 k, Ay = -15.3 k,
MA = 208 k-ft. The reactions at support D are: Dx = -11.4 k, Dy = 15.3 k, 12 ft
MD = 110 ft-k. Draw the shear and bending moment diagrams, and identify Vmax
18 ft
& Mmax..
A
Solution:
D
NOTE: The joints are not shown, and the load at joint B is put on only one body.

C
40 k B B C
15 ft

18 ft
12 ft

208 k-ft A
28.6 k 110 k-ft
D 11.4 k
15.3 k
15.3 k

+V +M
+M
+V

deflected shape
(based on +/- M)
+M
+V

207
 ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

Example 2 10 kN/m
The rigid frame shown has been analyzed using an advanced structural analysis technique.
The reactions at support A are: Ax = 2.37 kN, Ay = 21.59 kN, MA = -4.74 kNm. The
reactions at support C are: Cx = -2.37 kN, Cy = 28.4 kN, MC = -26.52 kNm. Draw the B
shear and bending moment diagrams, and identify Vmax & Mmax. 5m C
Solution: By 6m
MBC 10 kN/m
By MBC 26.52 kNm
MBA MBA B A
2.37 kN
Bx Bx Bx B 5m C
B Bx
By 28.41 kN
By
6m

4.74 kNm A
2.37 kN

21.59 kN

Reactions These values must be given or found from non-static analysis techniques. The values are given
with respect to the global coordinate system we defined for positive and negative forces and moments for
equilibrium.
Member End Forces The free-body diagrams of all the members and joints of the frame are shown above.
The unknowns on the members are drawn positive on one body for a joint, and the opposite directions are drawn on
the other body of for the joint. We can begin the computation of internal forces with either member AB or BC, both
of which have only three unknowns.
Member AB With the magnitudes of reaction forces at A known, the unknowns are at end B of Bx, By, and
MBA, which can get determined by applying Fx = 0 , Fy = 0 , and M B = 0 . Thus,
Fx = 2.37 kN + Bx = 0 Bx = -2.37 kN, Fy = 21.59kN + B y = 0 By = -21.59 kN
M B = 2.37 kN ( 6 m ) 4.74 kN m + M BA = 0 MBA = -9.48 kNm

Joint B The joint is shown to illustrate that the forces and moments on the cuts will be equal and opposite,
resulting in the forces and moment at joint be on body BC to be opposite from those on body AB: Bx = 2.37 kN,
By = -21.59 kN and MBC = -9.48 kNm
Member BC All forces are known, so equilibrium can be checked:
Fx = 2.37 kN 2.37 kN = 0 Fy = 21.59kN + 28.49kN (10kN / m )5 m = 0
M B = 28.41kN ( 5 m ) 10 kN / m( 5 m )( 2.5 m ) 26.52 kN m + 9.48 kN m = 0
23.3 kNm
21.59 kN

+V (2.84 m) +M
(2.16 m)
-9.48 kNm

-9.48 kNm

-28.41 kN

-26.52 kNm
4.74 kNm
-2.37 kN

deflected shape
(based on +/- M)
+M
+V

208
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

20 kN
Example 3
The rigid frame shown has been analyzed using an advanced structural analysis B 8m 60 kN-m
technique. The reactions at support A are: Ax = -3.42 kN, Ay = -5.44 kN, C
MA = 12.63 kNm. The reactions at support D are: Dx = 7.42 kN,

800 N/m
Dy = 25.44 kN, MD = -6.12 kNm. Draw the shear and bending moment
diagrams, and identify Vmax & Mmax. 5m

Solution: A D
20 kN
By MBC Cy
MCB
MBA B MCD C
Bx Bx B Cx Cx
8m C
Cy 60 kNm
By
0.8 kN/m

5m

5m
A 6.12 kNm D
3.42 kN 7.42 kN
12.63 kNm

5.44 kN 25.44 kN

Reactions The values given were found from non-static analysis techniques and put on the FBDs.
Member End Forces The free-body diagrams of all the members and joints of the frame are shown above
assuming joint force directions on one body and opposite directions on the joining body. Because there is a force
and moment at C, these must be put on only one body of the joint, and it doesnt matter which body.
Member AB Fx = 3.42 kN 0.8 kN / m 5 m + B x = 0 Bx = 7.42 kN
Fy = 5.44 kN + B y = 0 By = 5.44 kN
M B = 3.42 kN ( 5 m ) 0.8 kN / m( 5 m )( 2.5 m ) + 12.63 kN m + M BA = 0 MBA = 14.47 kNm

Joint B MBA = MBC = 14.47 kNm

Member BC Fx = 7.42 kN + C x = 0 Cx = 7.42 kN
Fy = 5.44 kN + C y = 0 Cy = 5.44 kN
M C = 14.47 kN m + 5.44 kN ( 8 m ) + M CB = 0 MCB = -29.05 kNm

Joint C MCB = MCD = -29.05 kNm

Member CD Fx = 7.42 kN + 7.42 kN = 0
(checking) Fy = 5.44kN 20 kN + 25.44 kN = 0
M C = ( 29.05 kN m ) 60 kN m 6.12 kN m + 7.42 kN ( 5 m ) = 0
30.95 kNm
+M
+V

+V + M 14.47 kNm
7.42 kNm

14.47 kNm

-5.44 kN -29.05 kNm

-7.42 kN

-12.63 kNm

-6.12 kNm
3.42 kN

deflected shape
+V

+M

(based on +/- M)

209
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.1 F2014abn

Example 4

Find the column effective lengths for a steel frame with 12 ft columns,
2I
a 15 ft beam when the support connections are pins for a) when it is

12 ft
braced and b) when it is allowed to sway. The relative stiffness of the I I
beam is twice that of the columns (2I).
15 ft

210
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Columns and Stability

Notation:
A = name for area K = effective length factor for columns
A36 = designation of steel grade L = name for length
b = name for width Le = effective length that can buckle for
C = symbol for compression column design, as is le , Leffective
Cc = column slenderness classification
constant for steel column design M = internal bending moment, as is M
d = name for dimension, or depth N.A. = shorthand for neutral axis
e = eccentric distance of application of P = name for axial force vector, as is P
a force (P) from the centroid of a Pcrit = critical buckling load in column
cross section calculations, as is Pcritical, Pcr
E = modulus of elasticity or Youngs r = radius of gyration
modulus T = symbol for compression
fa = axial stress W = designation for wide flange section
fb = bending stress y = vertical distance
fcritical = critical buckling stress in column z = distance perpendicular to the x-y
calculations from Pcritical plane
fx = total stress in the x axis direction = calculus symbol for small quantity
Fa = allowable axial stress = displacement due to bending
Fb = allowable bending stress = angle
Fy = yield stress = diameter symbol
I = moment of inertia = pi (3.1415 radians or 180)
Imin = moment of inertia that is critical to = engineering symbol for normal
the calculation of slenderness ratio stress

Design Criteria

Including strength (stresses) and servicability (including deflections), another requirement is that
the structure or structural member be stable.

Stability is the ability of the structure to support a specified load without undergoing
unacceptable (or sudden) deformations.

Physics

Recall that things like to be or prefer to be in their lowest energy state (potential energy).
Examples include water in a water tank. The energy it took to put the water up there is stored
until it is released and can flow due to gravity.

211
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Stable Equilibrium

When energy is added to an object in the form of a

push or disturbance, the object will return to its
original position. Things dont change in the end.

Unstable Equilibrium

When energy is added to an object, the object will

move and get more disturbed. Things change
rapidly .

Neutral Equilibrium

When energy is added to an object, the object will

move some then stop.. Things change.

Column with Axial Loading

A column loaded centrically can experience unstable equilibrium, called

buckling, because of how tall and slender they are. This instability is
sudden and not good.
Buckling can occur in sheets (like
my memory metal cookie
sheet), pressure vessels or slender
(narrow) beams not braced
laterally.

Buckling can be thought of with

the loads and motion of a column
having a stiff spring at mid-
height. There exists a load where
the spring cant resist the moment in it any longer.

Short (stubby) columns will experience crushing before

buckling.

212
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Critical Buckling Load

The critical axial load to cause buckling is related to the deflected shape
we could get (or determine from bending moment of P).

The buckled shape will be in the form of a sine wave.

Euler Formula

Swiss mathematician Euler determined the relationship between the

critical buckling load, the material, section and effective length (as long as
the material stays in the elastic range):
2 EI min 2 EI 2 EA
Pcritical = or Pcr = =
(L )2 (Le )2 Le 2
r

and the critical stress (if less than the normal stress) is:
Pcritical 2 EAr 2 2E
f critical = = 2
= 2
A A(Le ) Le
r

where I=Ar2 and Le r is called the slenderness ratio. The smallest I
of the section will govern.

Yield Stress and Buckling Stress

The two design criteria for columns are that they do not buckle and the strength is not exceeded.
Depending on slenderness, one will control over the other.

But, because in the real world, things are rarely

perfect and columns will not actually be loaded
concentrically, but will see eccentricity Eulers
formula is used only if the critical stress is less than
half of the yield point stress:

2 EI min Pcritical Fy
Pcritical = ; f critical = <
(L )2 A 2

Le 2 2 E
to be used for > Cc =
r Fy
where Cc is the column slenderness classification
constant and is the slenderness ratio of a column for
which the critical stress is equal to half the yield point stress.

213
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Effective Length and Bracing

Depending on the end support conditions for a column, the effective length can be found from
the deflected shape (elastic equations). If a very long column is braced intermittently along its
length, the column length that will buckle can be determined. The effective length can be found
by multiplying the column length by an effective length factor, K. Le = K L

214
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Loading Location

Centric loading: The load is applied at the centroid of the cross section. The limiting
allowable stress is determined from strength (P/A) or buckling.

Eccentric loading: The load is offset from the centroid of the cross section because of how the
P beam load comes into the column. This offset introduces bending along
e with axial stress. (This can also happen with continuous beams across a
column or wind loading.)
T
T T

C C C C T

Wind Load Left Seismic Load Left Eccentric Load Left Wind Load Left
Tension Left Tension Left Tension Left Braced at Top

215
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Eccentric Loading

The eccentricity causes bending stresses by a moment of value P x e. Within the elastic range
(linear stresses) we can superposition or add up the normal and bending stresses:

P My
f x = fa + fb = +
A I

fa fb fx

The resulting stress distribution is still linear. And the n.a. moves (if there is one).

fa fb fx

The value of e (or location of P) that causes the stress at an edge to become
zero is at the edge of the kern. As long as P stays within the kern, there will
not be any tension stress.

If there is bending in two directions (bi-axial bending), there will be one

more bending stress added to the total:
P M1y M 2z
f x = f a + f bx + f by = + +
With P, M1, and M2: A Iz Iy
y
b B
e1 x
h + + =
e2
z P
A x y z result

y M 2 = P e2 M 1 = P e1
b B
e1 x
h + + =
e2
z P
A x y z result

M 2 = P e2 M 1 = P e1

216
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Eccentric Loading Design

Because there are combined stresses, we cant just compare the axial stress to a limit axial stress
or a bending stress to a limit bending stress. We use a limit called the interaction diagram. The
diagram can be simplified as a straight line from the ratio of
axial stress to allowable stress= 1 (no bending) to the ratio of
fa
bending stress to allowable stress = 1 (no axial load).
Fa
The interaction diagram can be more sophisticated (represented 1
by a curve instead of a straight line). These type of diagrams
take the effect of the bending moment increasing because the
beam deflects. This is called the P- (P-delta) effect.
fb
1 Fb
Limit Criteria Methods

fa f
1) + b 1 .0 interaction formula (bending in one direction)
Fa Fb

f a f bx f by
2) + + 1.0 interaction formula (biaxial bending)
Fa Fbx Fby

fa f (Magnificat ion factor )

3) + b 1.0 interaction formula (P- effect)
Fa Fb

217
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Example 1 (pg 346)

218
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Example 2 (pg 346)

219
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.2 Su2012abn

Example 3 (pg357)

220
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

Frame Analysis Using Multiframe

1. The software is on the computers in the College of Architecture in Programs under the Windows
Start menu (see https://wikis.arch.tamu.edu/display/HELPDESK/Computer+Accounts for lab
locations). Multiframe is under the Bentley Engineering menu.
2. There are tutorials available on line at http://www.daystarsoftware.com/support/mftutorials
that list the tasks and order in greater detail. The first task is to define the unit system:
Choose Units from the View menu. Unit sets are available, but specific units can also
be selected by double clicking on a unit or format and making a selection from the menu.
Pressure units are used for distributed area loads on load panels.

3. To see the scale of the geometry, a grid option is available:

Choose Grid from the View menu

4. To create the geometry, you must be in the Frame window (default). The symbol is the
frame in the window toolbar:

The Member toolbar shows

ways to create members:

The Generate toolbar has convenient tools to create typical structural

shapes.
To create a frame, use the multi-bay frame button:

221
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

Enter the number of bays (horizontally), number of stories (vertically) and the
corresponding spacings:

If the frame does not have regular bays, use the add connected
members button to create segments:

Select a starting point and ending point with the cursor. The location of the cursor and
the segment length is displayed at the bottom of the geometry window. The ESC button
will end the segmented drawing.

The geometry can be set precisely by selecting the joint (drag), and bringing up the joint
properties menu (right click) to set the coordinates.

The support types can be set by selecting

the joint (drag) and using the Joint Toolbar
(fixed shown), or the Frame / Joint
Restraint ... menu (right click).

NOTE: If the support appears at both ends

of the member, you had the member
selected rather than the joint. Select the
joint to change support for and right click to select the
joint restraints menu or select the correct support on the
joint toolbar.

The support forces will be determined in the analysis.

222
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

5. All members must have sections assigned (see section 6.) in order to calculate reactions and
deflections. To use a standard steel section proceed to step 6. For custom sections the
section information must be entered. To define a section:
Choose Edit Sections / Add
Section from the Edit
menu
Type a name for your new
section
Choose group Frame from
the group names provided
so that the section will
remain with the file data
Choose a shape. The Flat
Bar shape is a rectangular
section.
Enter the cross section data.

Table values 1-9 must have values for a Flat Bar, but not all are used for every analysis. A
recommendation is to put the value of 1 for those properties you dont know or care about.
Properties like tf, tw, etc. refer to wide flange sections.
Answer any query. If the message says there is an error, the section will not be created
until the error is corrected.

6. The standard sections library loaded is for the United States. If another section library is
needed, use the Open Sections Library... command under the file menu, choose the library
folder, and select the SectionsLibrary.slb file.

Select the members (drag to make bold) and assign sections with the Section button on the
Member toolbar:

Choose the group name and section name:

(STANDARD SHAPES) (CUSTOM)

223
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

7. If there is an area that has a uniformly distributed load, load panels may be defined in the
Frame window. Because the loaded area may not be visible in the current view, choose the
View button at the lower left of the Frame window. The options for view are shown. (See
3D Frames, last page.)
Choose the panel type (rectangular, 4-node, or 3-node) from the
menu and select the corners. If the area is rectangular, only the
opposite corners need to be selected.

Select the panel and from the pop-up menu, or the

Frame menu, specify the load panel supports. The
default supports are on all sides. If the panel is one
way, chose the corresponding picture

8. The frame geometry is complete, and in order to define the load

conditions you must be in the Load window represented by the
green arrow:

9. The Load toolbar allows a joint to be loaded with a force or a moment in global coordinates,
shown by the first two buttons after the display numbers button. It allows a member to be
loaded with a distributed load, concentrated load or moment (next three buttons) in global
coordinates, as well as loading with distributed or single force or moment in the local
coordinate system (next three buttons). It allows a load panel to be loaded with a distributed
load in global or local coordinates (last two buttons).

Choose the member to be loaded (drag) and select

the load type (here shown for global distributed
loading):
Choose the distribution type and
direction. Note that the arrow
shown is the direction of the
loading. There is no need to put in
negative values for downward
loading.
Enter the values of the load and
distances (if any). Distances can be
entered as a function of the length ,
i.e. L/2, L/4...
Area load units may have to be
changed in the View Units dialogue.

NOTE: Do not put support reactions as

applied loads. The analysis will
determine the reaction values.

224
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

Multiframe will automatically generate a grouping called a

Load Case named Load Case 1 when a load is created. All
additional loads will be added to this load case unless a
new load case is defined (Add case under the Case menu).

10. In order to run the analysis after the geometry, member

properties and loading has been defined:
Choose Linear from the Analyze menu
11. If the analysis is successful, you can view the results in the
Plot window represented by the red moment diagram:
12. The Plot toolbar allows the numerical values to be shown (1.0
button), the reaction arrows to be shown (brown up arrow) and
reaction moments to be shown (brown curved arrow):

To show the moment diagram, Choose the red Moment button

To show the shear diagram, Choose the green Shear button

To show the axial force diagram, Choose the purple Axial Force
button

To show the deflection diagram, Choose the blue Deflection

button
To animate the deflection diagram, Choose Animate... from
the Display menu. You can also save the
animation to a .avi file by checking the
box.
To plot the bending moment on the top
choose Preferences from the Edit menu
and under the Presentation tab Draw
moments on the compression face
To see exact values of shear, moment and
deflection, double click on the member
and move the vertical cross hair with the
mouse. The ESC key will return you to
the window.

225
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

13. The Data window (D) allows you to view all data entered
for the geometry, sections and loading. These values can be
edited.

14. The Results window (R) allows you to view all results of the
analysis including displacements, reactions, member forces (actions)
and stresses. These values can be cut and pasted into other Windows programs such as Word
or Excel.
NOTE: Px refers to the axial load (P)
in the local axis x direction (x). Vy
refers to the shear perpendicular to the
local x axis, and Mz refers to the
bending moment.

15. To save the file Choose Save from the File menu.
16. To load an existing file Choose Open... from the File menu.
17. To print a plot Choose Print Window... from the File menu. As an alternative, you may copy
the plot (Ctrl+c) and paste it in a word processing document (Ctrl+v).

Example of Combined Stresses:

for member 3: Mmax = 19.6 k-ft, P = 1.76 k

knowing A = 21.46 in2, I = 796.0 in4, c = 7.08 in
1.76k 19.6 k ft 7.08in 12in
f max = + = 0.082ksi + 2.092ksi = 2.174ksi
21.46in 2 796in 4 ft

Results window:

where Sx refers to the axial stress, Sy refers to the bending stress around the local vertical
axis and Sz refers to the bending stress around the local horizontal axis.

226
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

For 3D Frames:

There are tutorials available on line at http://www.daystarsoftware.com/support/mftutorials

that list the tasks and order in greater detail. It expects that you have been through the 2D
tutorial to build on the steps already mastered.
There are standard 3D frame shapes on the frame toolbar.

It is very useful to change the view to isometric with the View Button

If you wish to have additional beams supported by the beams of your frame, choose the beam
and use the Subdivide Member menu under Geometry. This will make additional joints, but
keep the segments together.

In order to model a beam end as simply supported, you must release the restraint preventing
rotation about the x-x axis of the beam. The pinned ends menu is useful for segments or
subdivided members.

227
ARCH 331 Note Set 12.3 F2014abn

Or, by selecting a segment and right clicking for a

menu, you can use Member Releases (also under the
Frame menu) to release the Major Bending (M'Z) for
one end or both.

It is necessary to understand the local member axes to assign the correct load direction.
Choosing the local loading types will show the member orientation with respect to the load
direction.

228
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

Common Design Loads in Building Codes

Notation:
A = name for area R = rainwater load or ice water load
AASHTO = American Association of State symbol
Highway and Transportation S = snow load symbol
Officials SEI = Structural Engineering Institute
ASCE = American Society of Civil t = name for thickness
Engineers T = effect of material & temperature
ASD = allowable stress design symbol
D = dead load symbol V = name for volume
E = earthquake load symbol w = name for distributed load
F = hydraulic loads from fluids symbol W = wind load symbol
H = hydraulic loads from soil symbol = force due to a weight
L = live load symbol = name for total force due to
Lr = live roof load symbol distributed load
LRFD = load and resistance factor design = density or unit weight

Design Codes in General

Design codes are issued by a professional organization interested in insuring safety and
standards. They are legally backed by the engineering profession. Different design methods are
used, but they typically defined the load cases or combination, stress or strength limits, and
deflection limits.

Load Types

Loads used in design load equations are given letters by type:

D = dead load
L = live load
Lr = live roof load
W = wind load
S = snow load
E = earthquake load
R = rainwater load or ice water load
T = effect of material & temperature
H = hydraulic loads from soil
F = hydraulic loads from fluids

229
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

Determining Dead Load from Material Weights

Material density is a measure of how much mass in a unit volume causes a force due to gravity.
The common symbol for density is . When volume, V, is multiplied by density, a force value
results:
W = V

Materials weight can also be presented as a weight per unit area or length. This takes into
account that the volume is a thickness times an area: V = tA; so the calculation becomes:
W = (weight/unit area)A
w = (weight/unit volume)t which is a weight per unit area
w = (weight/unit volume)A which is a weight per unit length

Minimum Concentrated Loads

adapted from SEI/ASCE 7-10: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

Location Concentrated load lb (kN)

Catwalks for maintenance access 300 (1.33)
Elevator machine room grating (on area of 2 in. by 2 in. 300 (1.33)
(50 mm by 50 mm))
Finish light floor plate construction (on area of 1 in. by 1 in. 200 (0.89)
(25 mm by25 mm))
Hospital floors 1,000 (4.45)
Library floors 1,000 (4.45)
Manufacturing
Light 2,000 (8.90)
Heavy 3,000 (13.40)
Office floors 2,000 (8.90)
Awnings and canopies
Screen enclosure support frame 200 (0.89)
Roofs primary members and subject to maintenance workers 300 (1.33)
School floors 1,000 (4.45)
Sidewalks, vehicular driveways, and yards subject to trucking (over
wheel area of 4.5 in. by 4.5 in. (114 mm x 114 mm) 8,000 (35.60)
Stairs and exit ways on area of 2 in. by 2 in. (50 mm by 50 mm) non-
concurrent with uniform load 300 (1.33)
Store floors 1,000 (4.45)

230
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

Allowable Stress Design (ASD)

Combinations of service (also referred to as working) loads are evaluated for maximum stresses
and compared to allowable stresses. The allowed stresses are some fraction of limit stresses.

ASCE-7 (2010) combinations of loads:

1. D When F loads are present, they shall be
2. D + L included with the same load factor as
3. D + 0.75(Lr or S or R) dead load D in 1 through 6 and 8.
4. D + 0.75L + 0.75(Lr or S or R)
5. D + (0.6W or 0.7E) When H loads are present, they shall have
6a. D + 0.75L + 0.75(0.6W) + 0.75(Lr or S or R) a load factor of 1.0 when adding to load
6b. D + 0.75L + 0.75(0.7E) + 0.75S
7. 0.6D + 0.6W effect, or 0.6 when resisting the load when
8. 0.6D + 0.7E permanent.

Load and Resistance Factor Design LRFD

Combinations of loads that have been factored are evaluated for maximum loads, moments or
stresses. These factors take into consideration how likely the load is to happen and how often.
This imaginary worse case load, moment or stress is compared to a limit value that has been
modified by a resistance factor. The resistance factor is a function of how comfortable the
design community is with the type of limit, ie. yielding or rupture...

ASCE-7 (2010) combinations of factored nominal loads:

1. 1.4D When F loads are present, they shall be
2. 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R) included with the same load factor as
3. 1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (L or 0.5W) dead load D in 1 through 5 and 7.
4. 1.2D + 1.0W + L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
5. 1.2D + 1.0E + L + 0.2S When H loads are present, they shall have
6. 0.9D + 1.0W a load factor of 1.6 when adding to load
7. 0.9D + 1.0E effect, or 0.9 when resisting the load when
permanent.

Minimum Uniformly Distributed Live Loads

adapted from SEI/ASCE 7-10: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
Location Uniform load psf (kN/m2)
Apartments (see Residential)
Access floor systems
Office use 50 (2.4)
Computer use 100 (4.79)
Armories and drill rooms 150 (7.18)
Assembly areas
Fixed seats (fastened to floor) 60 (2.87)
Lobbies 100 (4.79)
Movable seats 100 (4.79)
Platforms (assembly) 100 (4.79)
Stage floors 150 (7.18)
Assembly areas (other) 100 (4.79)

231
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

Location Uniform load psf (kN/m2)

Balconies and decks 1.5 times the live load for the
area served. Not required`to
exceed 100 psf (4.79 kN/m2)

Catwalks for maintenance access 40 (1.92)

Corridors
First floor 100 (4.79)
Other floors same as occupancy served
except as indicated
Dining rooms and restaurants 100 (4.79)
Dwellings (see Residential)
Elevator machine room grating (on area of 2 in. by 2 in. 300 (1.33)
(50 mm by 50 mm))
Finish light floor plate construction (on area of 1 in. by 1 in. 200 (0.89)
(25 mm by 25 mm))
Fire escapes 100 (4.79)
On single-family dwellings only 40 (1.92)
Garages
Passenger vehicles only 40 (1.92)
Helipads 60 (2.87)
Hospitals
Operating rooms, laboratories 60 (2.87)
Patient rooms 40 (1.92)
Corridors above first floor 80 (3.83)
Hotels (see Residential)
Libraries
Reading rooms 60 (2.87)
Stack rooms 150 (7.18)
Corridors above first floor 80 (3.83)
Manufacturing
Light 125 (6.00)
Heavy 250 (11.97)
Office buildings
File and computer rooms shall be designed for heavier loads based
on anticipated occupancy
Lobbies and first floor corridors 100 (4.79)
Offices 50 (2.40)
Corridors above first floor 80 (3.83)
Penal institutions
Cell blocks 40 (1.92)
Corridors 100 (4.79)
Recreational uses
Bowling alleys, poolrooms, and similar uses 75 (3.59)
Dance halls and ballrooms 100 (4.79)
Gymnasiums 100 (4.79)
Reviewing stands, grandstands, and bleachers 100 (4.79)
Stadiums and arenas with fixed seats (fastened to the floor) 60 (2.87)
Residential
One- and two-family dwellings
Uninhabitable attics without storage 10 (0.48)
Uninhabitable attics with storage 20 (0.96)
Habitable attics and sleeping areas 30 (1.44)
All other areas except stairs 40 (1.92)
All other residential occupancies
Private rooms and corridors serving them 40 (1.92)
Public rooms and corridors serving them 100 (4.79)

232
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

Location Uniform load psf (kN/m2)

Roofs
Ordinary flat, pitched, and curved roofs 20 (0.96n
Roofs used for roof gardens 100 (4.79)
Roofs used for assembly occupancies Same as occupancy served
Roofs used for other occupancies As approved by authority
having jurisdiction
Awnings and canopies
Fabric construction supported by a skeleton structure 5 (0.24) nonreducible
Screen enclosure support frame 5 (0.24) nonreducible
and based on the tributary
area of the roof supported by
the frame
All other construction 20 (0.96)
Schools
Classrooms 40 (1.92)
Corridors above first floor 80 (3.83)
First-floor corridors 100 (4.79)
Scuttles, skylight ribs, and accessible ceilings 200 (0.89)
Sidewalks, vehicular driveways, and yards subject to trucking 250 (11.97)
Stairs and exit ways 100 (4.79)
One- and two-family dwellings only 40 (1.92)
Storage areas above ceilings 20 (0.96)
Storage warehouses (shall be designed for heavier loads if required for
anticipated storage)
Light 125 (6.00)
Heavy 250 (11.97)
Stores
Retail
First floor 100 (4.79)
Upper floors 75 (3.59)
Wholesale, all floors 125 (6.00)
Walkways and elevated platforms (other than exit ways) 60 (2.87)
Yards and terraces, pedestrian 100 (4.79)

Live load reductions are not permitted for specific types (see code).
Some occupancies must be designed for appropriate loads as approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
Library stack room floors have specified limitations (see code)
AASHTO lane loads should also be considered where appropriate.

233
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

Building Material Weights-AISC Manual of Load and Resistance Factor Design, 3rd ed.

234
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

235
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.1 S2014abn

Example 1
Determine the controlling load combinations(s) using AISC-LRFD for a building column subject to the following
service or nominal (unfactored) axial compressive loads: D = 30 k, L = 50 k, Lr = 10 k, W = 25 k, E = 40 k

Using a spreadsheet analysis:

FACTORED
LRFD (ASCE-7)
LOAD
1.4D
1.4D = 42 kips
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr = 121
1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (L or 0.5W)
1.2D + 1.6Lr + L = 102
1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.5W = 64.5
1.2D + 1.6Lr - 0.5W = 39.5
1.2D + 1.0W+ L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
1.2D + 1.0W+ L + 0.5Lr = 116
1.2D - 1.0W+ L + 0.5Lr = 66
1.2D + 1.0E + L + 0.2S
1.2D + 1.0E + L = 126
1.2D - 1.0E + L = 46
0.9D + 1.0W
0.9D + 1.0W = 52
0.9D - 1.0W = 2
0.9D + 1.0E
0.9D + 1.0E = 67
0.9D - 1.0E = -13
Critical Factored Load 126 kips (C)
-13 kips (T)

Example 2

236
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.2 S2015abn

Structural Load Requirements

International Building Code (2012)

237

237
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.2 S2015abn

Live Loads & Allowed Reductions

238
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.2 S2015abn

Minimum Roof Loads

239
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.2 S2015abn

Minimum Snow Loads

240
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.2 S2015abn

Documentation of Loads

241
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.2 S2015abn

Serviceability

242
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.3 Su2012abn

Design Wind Pressures Envelope Procedure

SEI/ASCE 7-10:

Velocity pressure, p, irrespective of terrain and height above ground or recurrence probability
is related to the wind speed, V, by p = 0.00256V 2 . Wind codes also consider the effect of the
geometry of the building and location on the surface, wind gusts or turbulence, the local
terrain, and annual probability of exceeding the design wind speed.

243
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.3 Su2012abn

244
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.3 Su2012abn

245
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.3 Su2012abn

246
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.3 Su2012abn

247
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.4 Su2012abn

Earthquake Ground Motion, 0.2 Second Spectral Response

International Building Code 2012:

249
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.4 Su2012abn

US Geological Survey, Earthquake Hazards Program, ShakeMap Scientific Background

at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/eqcenter/shakemap/background.php
Spectral Response Maps

Following earthquakes larger than magnitude 5.5, spectral response maps are made. Response
spectra portray the response of a damped, single-degree-of-freedom oscillator to the recorded
ground motions. This data representation is useful for engineers determining how a structure
will react to ground motions. The response is calculated for a range of periods. Within that
range, the International Building Code (IBC) refers to particular reference periods that help
define the shape of the "design spectra" that reflects the building code.

250
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.5 Su2012abn

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (2011)

251
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.5 Su2012abn

Code Requirements for Steel Construction, AISC 14th ed.

252
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.5 Su2012abn

Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI 318-11

253
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.5 Su2012abn

Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI 318-11 (continued)

254
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.6 Su2012abn

SEI/ASCE 7-10:
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

255
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.6 Su2012abn

256
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.6 Su2012abn

257
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.6 Su2012abn

258
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.6 Su2012abn

259
ARCH 331 Note Set 13.6 Su2012abn

260
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

System Assemblies & Load Tracing

Notation:
a = name for a dimension T = symbol for tension
C = symbol for compression = name of a tension force
DL = shorthand for dead load v = distributed shear
Fhorizontal-resisting = total force resisting V = name for shear (horizontal) force
horizontal sliding w = name for distributed load/length, as
Fsliding = total sliding force is
Fy = force component in the y direction = name for distributed load/area
FBD = free body diagram wself wt = name for distributed load from self
h = name for height weight of member
L = name for length wselfwt equiv = name for equivalent distributed
LL = shorthand for live load vertical load from self weight of
M = moment due to a force slanted member
Moverturning = total overturning moment W = name for total force due to
Mresisting = total moment resisting distributed load
overturning about a point = force due to a weight
N = name for normal force to a surface x = horizontal distance
o.c. = shorthand for on center = coefficient of static friction
p = pressure = density or unit weight
P = force due to a pressure
SF = shorthand for factor of safety = equivalent fluid density of a soil
R = name for reaction force = summation symbol

Load Tracing

LOAD TRACING is the term used to describe how the loads on and
in the structure are transferred through the members (load paths) to
the foundation, and ultimately supported by the ground.

It is a sequence of actions, NOT reactions. Reactions in statically

determinate members (using FBDs) can be solved for to determine
the actions on the next member in the hierarchy.

The tributary area is a loaded area that contributes to the load on the
member supporting that area, ex. the area from the center between two
beams to the center of the next two beams for the full span is the load ab
on the center beam

The tributary load on the member is found by concentrating

(or consolidating) the load into the center.

load a b
w=( ) x (tributary width)
area
tributary width
where w = distributed load in units of load/length.
plan
261
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Distributed Loads

Distributed loads may be replaced by concentrated loads acting through the balance/center of the
distribution or load area: THIS IS AN EQUIVALENT FORCE SYSTEM.

w is the symbol used to describe the load per unit length.

Note: It can also represent a load per unit area.
W is the symbol used to describe the total load.

w x W 2w
w x =W w =
2 2 w w
0
x x x
W W
W/2 W/2

x/2 x/2 2x/3 x/3 x/2 x/6 x/3

Framing Systems

Horizontal levels must transfer loads to vertical elements. There are many ways to configure the
systems. The horizontal levels can be classified by how many elements transfer loads in the
plane. Decking is not usually considered a level in a multiple level system because it isnt
significantly load-bearing. It is considered a level when it is the only horizontal element and
must resist loads.

Foundations

The final path of the load for the structure is to the foundation. The foundation must transfer the
loads to the soil, which is a natural structural material. The soil conditions will determine if a
shallow foundation (most economical an easy to construct) can be used, or a deep foundation (for
larger loads or poorer soil capacities) must be considered.

Distribution of Loads with Irregular Configurations

When a bay (defined by the area bounded by vertical supports) is not rectangular, it is commonly
constructed with parallel or non-parallel spanning members of non-uniform lengths. With
parallel spanning members, the tributary width is uniform. With non-parallel members, the
tributary width at each end is different, but still defined as half the distance (each side) to the
next member. The resulting distribution will be linear (and not uniform).

The most efficient one-way systems have regular, rectangular bays. Two way systems are most
efficient when they are square. With irregular bays, attempts are made to get as many parallel
members as possible with similar lengths, resulting in an economy of scale.

262
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Distribution of Loads on Edge Supported Slabs

Distributed loads on two-way slabs (i.e. not one-way like beams) do not have obvious tributary
widths. The distribution is modeled using a 45 degree tributary boundary in addition to the
tributary boundary that is half way between supporting elements, in this case, edge beams.

The tributary distribution from the area

loads result in a trapezoidal distribution.
Self weight will be a uniform distributed
load, and will also have to be included for
design of beam AB.

263
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Openings in Floor/Roof Plans

Openings in a horizontal system usually are framed on all sides. This provides for stiffness and
limiting the deflection. The edge beams may not be supporting the flooring, however, so care
needs to be taken to determine if an opening edge beam must support tributary area, or just itself.
Any edge beam supporting a load has load on only one side to the next supporting element.

Beams Supported by Other Beams

Joists are commenly supported by beams with beam

hangers. The reaction at the support is transferred to
the beam as a single force. A beam, in turn, can be
supported by a larger beam or girder, and the reaction
from this beam having a uniform distributed self
weight, and the forces, will be an action on the girder.

Horizontal Projection of Gravity Load on a Rafter

When an angled member, such as a rafter has a self weight per unit length, that weight is usually
converted to a weight per horizontal length:

length wself wt .
wself wt . equiv . = wself wt . or
cos
horizontal dis tan ce

Framing Plans

Framing plans are diagrams representing the placement and organization of structural members.
Until the final architecture has been determined, framing plans are often drawn freehand with
respect to the floor plans, and quite often use the formal conventions for structural construction
drawings.

264
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Parts of the building are identified by letter symbols:

B Beams F Footings L Lintels U Stirrups

C Columns G Girders S Slabs W Walls
D Dowels J Joists T Ties

Other parts are represented with lines (beams and joists), dots, squares, rectangles or wide-flange
shapes for columns. Column and footing locations in structural drawings are referred to by
letters and numbers, with vertical lines at column centers given letters A, B, C, etc., and
horizontal lines at columns given numbers 1, 2, 3, etc. The designation do may be used to
show like members (like ditto).

Spanning direction of decking or reinforcement

Breaks in the lines are commonly used to indicate the end of a beam
that is supported by another member, such as a girder or column.
Beams can span over a support (as a continuous beam) and therefore,
there is no break shown at the column.

Joists can span over a supporting beam, and the lines will cross.
(Looking for the ends of the crossing members give information
about which is below and which is above.)

265
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Concrete systems often have slabs, ribs or drop panels or strips, which arent easily represented
by centerlines, so hidden lines represent the edges. Commonly isolated patches of repeated
geometry are used for brevity.

266
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Retaining Walls

Retaining walls are used to hold back soil or other

material with the wall. The other key components
include bases, counterforts, buttresses or keys.
Gravity loads help provide resistance to movement,
while the walls with lateral loads behave like
cantilever beams.

Loads

The design of retaining walls must consider overturning, settlement, sliding

and bearing pressure. The water in the retained soil can significantly affect the
loading and the active pressure of the soil. The lateral force, P, acting at a
height of h/3 is determined from the equivalent fluid weight (density), , P
h/3
(in force/cubic area) as: pA
h 2 ph
P= or
2 2
where p is the maximum pressure at the base: p = h

Overturning is considered the same as for eccentric footings:

M resist
SF = 1 .5 2
M overturnin g

where
Mresist = summation of moments about o to resist rotation, typically including the
moment due to the weight of the stem and base and the moment due to the
passive pressure.
Moverturning = moment due to the active pressure about the toe o.

Sliding must also be avoided: W

Fhorizontal resist P
SF = 1.25 2
F sliding o
R Fresist
where
Fhorizontal-resist = summation of forces to resist sliding, typically including the force from
the passive pressure and friction (F=N where . is a constant for the
materials in contact and N is the normal force to the ground acting down
and is shown as R).
Fsliding = sliding force as a result of active pressure.

267
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Pressure Distribution

Because the resultant force from the gravity loads and pressure is not vertical, the vertical
pressure distribution under the footing will not be uniform, but will be
linearly distributed. The vertical component of the resultant must be in the
same horizontal location as the pressure reaction force.

There can never be a tensile pressure because the footing will not be in
contact with the soil.

To make certain all the area under the footing is used to distributed the
load, the vertical resultant needs to be within the middle third of the base
width. This area is called the kern.

Soil pressure is most commonly called q in the design texts and codes.

To determine the size of the maximim pressure we find the equivalent location of the pressure
reaction, P, at x using moment calculations
Ry e
when Rx = W:
W = P = 1/2p(3x) x

so p = 2W/3x when x < a/3

M resisting - M overturning 3x
p = 2W/a when x = a/3 x=
Wtotal
W
and p = 2 (4a 6x) when a/3 < x < 2a/3 p Soil
a pressure
graph
where x is the location of the resultant force and a is the width of the base.
P = p(3x)
a

Kern

Wind Load Tracing

For design purposes, wind loads are treated as static pressure distributions over the walls and
roof. In the case of walls, the loads are traced just like those for horizontal surfaces. If there is a
roof diaphragm, it is the top supporting element and the tributary boundary is half way up to
the diaphragm. If the supporting elements are the side walls the tributary boundary is vertical
and half way between sides. In either case, the traced action force at the top of the walls is a
lateral shear force (V) that must be resisted. The shear over the width of a shear wall, v, is a
unit shear used for determining the connection and framing capacity required.

268
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Lateral Resisting Systems

Shear Walls
Braced Frames
Rigid Frames
Diaphragms
Cores
Tubes

Bracing Configurations

Without proper arrangement of the

lateral resisiting components, the
system cannot transfer lateral
loads that may come from any
direction.

269
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Example 1 (pg 168)

The loads are: 60 lb/ft2 live load, 8 lb/ft2 dead load, 10 lb/ft
self weight of 12 beams, and 100 lb self weight of columns.

270
 ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Example 2 (pg. 172)*

Example Problem 5.4

*Graphically trace the loads from the slab.

3
=

271
 ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Example 3

^ E, B and A Assuming all beams are weightless!

Figure 3.1

Column C1 Column C3

Column C2 Column C4

(and E)

D2
D2 = RE2

D1 = RE1

Beam A: RD2 = 4896 lb RE2 = 4896 lb

12 ft. 12 ft. 12 ft. By symmetry; RCC1 = RCC3 = (4896 lb + 4896 lb)/2 = 4896 lb
RCC1 RCC3
Beam B RD1 = 4464 lb RE1 = 4464 lb
By symmetry; RCC2 = RCC4 = (4464 lb + 4464 lb)/2 + (6 ft)(60 lb/ft2)(12 ft)/2 = 6624 lb
12 ft. 12 ft. 12 ft.
Additional loads are transferred to the column from the reactions on Beams C and F:
RCC2 RCC4 RC1 = RC2 = RF1 = RF2 = wL/2 = (6 ft)(60 lb/ft2)(20 ft)/2 = 3600 lb

C1 = 4896 lb + 3600 lb = 8,496 lb

C2 = 6624 lb + 3600 lb = 10,224 lb
C3 = 4896 lb + 3600 lb = 8,496 lb
C4 = 6624 lb + 3600 lb = 10,224 lb

272
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Example 4
Determine the factor of safety for overturning and sliding on the 15 ft. retaining wall, 16 in. wide stem,
10 ft. wide x 16 in. high base, when the equivalent fluid pressure is 30 lb/ft3, the weight of the stem of the
footing is 4 kips, the weight of the pad is 5 kips, the passive pressure is ignored for this design, and the
friction coefficient for sliding is 0.58. The center of the stem is located 3 ft. from the toe.
Also find the maximum bearing pressure.
16

15

toe 16
3
10

273
ARCH 331 Note Set 14 S2015abn

Example 5

274
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Wood Design

Notation:
a = name for width dimension fv = shear stress
A = name for area fv-max = maximum shear stress
Areqd-adj = area required at allowable stress Fallow = allowable stress
when shear is adjusted to include Fb = tabular bending strength
self weight = allowable bending stress
b = width of a rectangle Fb = allowable bending stress (adjusted)
= name for height dimension Fc = tabular compression strength
c = largest distance from the neutral parallel to the grain
axis to the top or bottom edge of a
Fc = allowable compressive stress
beam
= constant in Cp expression (adjusted)
*
c1 = coefficient for shear stress for a F c = intermediate compressive stress
rectangular bar in torsion dependent on load duration
CC = curvature factor for laminated FcE = theoretical allowed buckling stress
arches Fc = tabular compression strength
CD = load duration factor perpendicular to the grain
Cfu = flat use factor for other than decks Fconnector = shear force capacity per
CF = size factor connector
CH = shear stress factor Fp = tabular bearing strength parallel to
Ci = incising factor the grain
CL = beam stability factor = allowable bearing stress
CM = wet service factor Ft = tabular tensile strength
Cp = column stability factor for wood Fu = ultimate strength
design Fv = tabular bending strength
Cr = repetitive member factor for wood = allowable shear stress
design Fy = yield strength
CV = volume factor for glue laminated h = height of a rectangle
timber design H = name for a horizontal force
Ct = temperature factor for wood design I = moment of inertia with respect to
d = name for depth neutral axis bending
= calculus symbol for differentiation Itrial = moment of inertia of trial section
dmin = dimension of timber critical for Ireqd = moment of inertia required at
buckling limiting deflection
D = shorthand for dead load Iy = moment of inertia with respect to an
= name for diameter y-axis
DL = shorthand for dead load J = polar moment of inertia
E = modulus of elasticity K = effective length factor for columns
Emin = reference modulus of elasticity for Le = effective length that can buckle for
stability column design, as is l e
Emin = adjusted modulus of elasticity for L = name for length or span length
stability
LL = shorthand for live load
f = stress (strength is a stress limit)
LRFD = load and resistance factor design
fb = bending stress
M = internal bending moment
ffrom table = tabular strength (from table) Mmax = maximum internal bending moment
fp = bearing stress

275
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

n = number of connectors across a joint, Sreqd-adj = section modulus required at

as is N allowable stress when moment is
Mmax-adj = maximum bending moment adjusted to include self weight
adjusted to include self weight T = torque (axial moment)
p = pitch of connector spacing V = internal shear force
= safe connector load parallel to the Vmax = maximum internal shear force
grain Vmax-adj = maximum internal shear force
P = name for axial force vector adjusted to include self weight
Pallowable = allowable axial force w = name for distributed load
q = safe connector load perpendicular wself wt = name for distributed load from self
to the grain weight of member
Qconnected = first moment area about a neutral W = shorthand for wind load
axis for the connected part x = horizontal distance
r = radius of gyration y = vertical distance
= interior radius of a laminated arch Z = force capacity of a connector
R = radius of curvature of a deformed actual = actual beam deflection
beam allowable = allowable beam deflection
= radius of curvature of a laminated limit = allowable beam deflection limit
arch max = maximum beam deflection
= name for a reaction force = density or unit weight
S = section modulus = slope of the beam deflection curve
Sreqd = section modulus required at = radial distance

allowable stress
= symbol for integration
= summation symbol

Wood or Timber Design

Structural design standards for wood are established by the National Design Specification (NDS)
published by the National Forest Products Association. There is a combined specification (from
2005) for Allowable Stress Design and limit state design (LRFD).

Tabulated wood strength values are used as the base allowable strength and modified by
appropriate adjustment factors:
F = CD CM CF ... Ffrom table

Size and Use Categories

Boards: 1 to 1 in. thick 2 in. and wider

Dimension lumber 2 to 4 in. thick 2 in. and wider
Timbers 5 in. and thicker 5 in. and wider

276
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Adjustment Factors
(partial list)

CD load duration factor

CM wet service factor
(1.0 dry < 16% moisture content)
CF size factor for visually graded sawn lumber
and round timber > 12 depth
1
CF = (12 d ) 9 1.0
Cfu flat use factor (excluding decking)
Ci incising factor (from increasing the depth of
pressure treatment)
Ct temperature factor (at high temperatures
strength decreases)
Cr repetitive member factor
CH shear stress factor (amount of splitting)
CV volume factor for glued laminated timber (similar to CF)
CL beam stability factor (for beams without full lateral support)
CC curvature factor for laminated arches

Tabular Design Values

Fb: bending stress
Ft: tensile stress
Fv: horizontal shear stress
Fc: compression stress (perpendicular to grain)
Fc: compression stress (parallel to grain)
E: modulus of elasticity
Fp: bearing stress (parallel to grain)

Wood is significantly weakest in shear and strongest along the direction of the grain (tension
and compression).

Load Combinations and Deflection

The critical load combination is determined by the largest of either:

dead load ( dead load + any combination of live load )
or
0 .9 CD

The deflection limits may be increased for less stiffness with total load: LL + 0.5(DL)

277
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Criteria for Design of Beams

Mc
Allowable normal stress or normal stress from LRFD should not be Fb f b =
exceeded: I

Knowing M and Fb, the minimum section modulus fitting the limit is:
M
S req ' d
Fb
Besides strength, we also need to be concerned about serviceability. This involves things like
limiting deflections & cracking, controlling noise and vibrations, preventing excessive
settlements of foundations and durability. When we know about a beam section and its material,
we can determine beam deformations.

Determining Maximum Bending Moment

Drawing V and M diagrams will show us the maximum values for design. Remember:

V = ( w) dx dV dM
= w =V
M = (V ) dx dx dx

Determining Maximum Bending Stress

For a prismatic member (constant cross section), the maximum normal stress will occur at the
maximum moment.

For a non-prismatic member, the stress varies with the cross section AND the moment.

Deflections

If the bending moment changes, M(x) across a beam of constant material and cross section then
the curvature will change:
1 M ( x)
The slope of the n.a. of a beam, , will be tangent to the radius of curvature, R: =
R EI
1
EI
= slope = M ( x)dx

The equation for deflection, y, along a beam is:

1 1
y=
EI dx =
EI M ( x )dx
Elastic curve equations can be found in handbooks, textbooks, design manuals, etc.. Computer
programs can be used as well (like Multiframe).

278
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Elastic curve equations can be superpositioned ONLY if the stresses are in the elastic range.
The deflected shape is roughly the same shape flipped as the bending moment diagram but is
constrained by supports and geometry.

Boundary Conditions

The boundary conditions are geometrical values that we know

slope or deflection which may be restrained by supports or
symmetry.

At Pins, Rollers, Fixed Supports: y=0

At Fixed Supports: =0

At Inflection Points From Symmetry: =0

The Slope Is Zero At The Maximum Deflection ymax:

dy
= = slope = 0
dx

Allowable Deflection Limits

All building codes and design codes limit deflection for beam types and damage that could
happen based on service condition and severity.
y max ( x) = actual allowable = L
value

Use LL only DL+LL

Roof beams:
Industrial (no ceiling) L/180 L/120
Commercial
plaster ceiling L/240 L/180
no plaster L/360 L/240
Floor beams:
Ordinary Usage L/360 L/240
Roof or floor (damageable elements) L/480

279
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Lateral Buckling

With compression stresses in the top of a beam, a sudden popping or buckling can happen
even at low stresses. In order to prevent it, we need to brace it along the top, or laterally brace it,
or provide a bigger Iy.

Beam Loads & Load Tracing

In order to determine the loads on a beam (or girder, joist, column, frame, foundation...) we can
start at the top of a structure and determine the tributary area that a load acts over and the beam
needs to support. Loads come from material weights, people, and the environment. This area is
assumed to be from half the distance to the next beam over to halfway to the next beam.

The reactions must be supported by the next lower structural element ad infinitum, to the ground.

Design Procedure

The intent is to find the most light weight member satisfying the section modulus size.

1. Know F for the material or FU for LRFD.

2. Draw V & M, finding Mmax.
M max
3. Calculate Sreqd. This step is equivalent to determining f b = Fb
bh 2 S
4. For rectangular beams S=
6
- For timber: use the section charts to find S that will work and remember that the beam
self weight will increase Sreqd. wself wt = A
****Determine the updated Vmax and Mmax including the beam self weight, and verify that the
updated Sreqd has been met.******
5. Consider lateral stability.
6. Evaluate horizontal shear stresses using Vmax to determine if f v Fv or find Areqd
3V V Areq' d
3V
For rectangular beams f v max = = 1 .5
2A A 2 Fv

P
7. Provide adequate bearing area at supports: fp = Fc or Fc
A
T T
8. Evaluate shear due to torsion fv = or Fv
J c1 ab 2
(circular section or rectangular)
9. Evaluate the deflection to determine if max LL LLallowed and/or maxTotal Totalallowed
**** note: when calculated > limit, Irequired can be found with: too big
I req' d I trial
and Sreqd will be satisfied for similar self weight ***** lim it
280
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

FOR ANY EVALUATION:

Redesign (with a new section) at any point that a stress or serviceability criteria is
NOT satisfied and re-evaluate each condition until it is satisfactory.

Load Tables for Uniformly Loaded Joists & Rafters

Tables exists for the common loading situation for joists and rafters that of uniformly
distributed load. The tables either provide the safe distributed load based on bending and
deflection limits, they give the allowable span for specific live and dead loads. If the load is not
uniform, an equivalent distributed load can be calculated from the maximum moment equation.

Decking

Flat panels or planks that span several joists or evenly spaced support behave as continuous
beams. Design tables consider a 1 unit wide strip across the supports and determine maximum
bending moment and deflections in order to provide allowable loads depending on the depth of
the material.

The other structural use of decking is to construct what is called a diaphragm, which is a
horizontal or vertical (if the panels are used in a shear wall) unit tying the sheathing to the joists
or studs that resists forces parallel to the surface of the diaphragm.

Criteria for Design of Columns

If we know the loads, we can select a section that is adequate for strength & buckling.

If we know the length, we can find the limiting load satisfying strength & buckling.

Any slenderness ratio, Le/d 50:

P
fc = Fc Fc = Fc (C D )(C M )(C t )(C F )(C p )
A

The allowable stress equation uses factors to replicate the combination crushing-buckling curve:

where:
Fc = allowable compressive stress parallel to the grain
Fc = compressive strength parallel to the grain
CD = load duration factor
CM = wet service factor (1.0 for dry) 2
Ct = temperature factor 1 + ( FcE / Fc* ) 1 + FcE / Fc* FcE / Fc*
Cp =
CF = size factor 2c 2c c
Cp = column stability factor off chart or equation:
c = 0.9 for glue-lam and 0.8 for sawed lumber

281
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

For preliminary column design:

Fc = Fc* C p = (Fc C D )C p

Procedure for Analysis

1. Calculate Le/dmin (KL/d for each axis and chose largest)
2. Obtain Fc
0.822 Emin

compute FcE = 2
with Emin
= Emin (CM )(Ct )(CT )(Ci )
(L d )
e

where Emin the modulus of elasticity for stability

K E
(or by outdated text: FcE = cE 2 with KcE =0.3 for sawn, = 0.418 for glu-lam)
le
( ) d

3. Compute Fc* Fc C D with CD = 1, normal, CD =1.25 for 7 day roof, etc....

4. Calculate FcE Fc* and get Cp from table or calculation
5. Calculate Fc = Fc*C p
6. Compute Pallowable = FcA or alternatively compute factual = P/A
7. Is the design satisfactory?
Is P Pallowable? yes, it is; no, it is no good
or Is factual Fc? yes, it is; no, it is no good

Procedure for Design

1. Guess a size by picking a section
2. Calculate Le/dmin (KL/d for each axis and choose largest)
3. Obtain Fc
0.822 Emin

compute FcE = 2
with Emin
= Emin (CM )(Ct )(CT )(Ci )
(L d )
e

where Emin the modulus of elasticity for stability

K E
(or by outdated text: FcE = cE 2 with KcE =0.3 for sawn, = 0.418 for glu-lam)
le
( ) d

4. Compute Fc* Fc C D with CD = 1, normal, CD =1.25 for 7 day roof...

5. Calculate FcE Fc* and get Cp from table or calculation
6. Calculate Fc = Fc*C p
7. Compute Pallowable = FcA or alternatively compute factual = P/A
8. Is the design satisfactory?
Is P Pallowable? yes, it is; no, pick a bigger section and go back to step 2.
or Is factual Fc? yes, it is; no, pick a bigger section and go back to step 2.
282
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Trusses

Timber trusses are commonly manufactured with continuous top or bottom chords, but the
members are still design as compression and tension members (without the effect of bending.)

Stud Walls

Stud wall construction is often used in light frame construction together with joist and rafters.
Studs are typically 2-in. nominal thickness and must be braced in the weak axis. Most wall
coverings provide this function. Stud spacing is determined by the width of the panel material,
and is usually 16 in. The lumber grade can be relatively low. The walls must be designed for a
combination of wind load and bending, which means beam-column analysis.

Columns with Bending (Beam-Columns)

2
fc f bx
The modification factors are included in the form: + 1 .0
Fc
Fbx 1
fc
where: FcEx
fc
1 = magnification factor accounting for P-
FcEx
Fbx = allowable bending stress
f bx = working stress from bending about x-x axis

In order to design an adequate section for allowable stress, we have to start somewhere:
1. Make assumptions about the limiting stress from:
- buckling
- axial stress
- combined stress

2. See if we can find values for r or A or S (=I/cmax)

3. Pick a trial section based on if we think r or A is going to govern the section size.

4. Analyze the stresses and compare to allowable using the allowable stress method or
interaction formula for eccentric columns.

5. Did the section pass the stress test?

- If not, do you increase r or A or S?
- If so, is the difference really big so that you could decrease r or A or S to make it
more efficient (economical)?

6. Change the section choice and go back to step 4. Repeat until the section meets the
stress criteria.

283
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Laminated Arches

The radius of curvature, R, is limited because of residual bending stresses between lams of
thickness t to 100t for Southern pine and hardwoods and 250t for softwoods.

The allowable bending stress for combined stresses is

Fb = F b ( C F CC )
2
where C C = 1 2000 t
r
and r is the radius to the inside of the lamination.

Criteria for Design of Connections

Connections for wood are typically mechanical fasteners. Shear plates and split ring connectors
are common in trusses. Bolts of metal bear on holes in wood, and nails rely on shear resistance
transverse and parallel to the nail shaft. Timber rivets with steel side plates are allowed with
glue laminated timber.
Connections must be able to transfer any axial force, shear, or moment from member to member
or from beam to column.

Bolted Joints
Stress must be evaluated in the member being connected using the load being transferred and the
reduced cross section area called net area. Bolt capacities are usually provided in tables and take
into account the allowable shearing stress across the diameter for single and double shear, and
the allowable bearing stress of the connected material based on the direction of the load with
respect to the grain. Problems, such as ripping of the bolt hole at the end of the member, are
avoided by following code guidelines on minimum edge distances and spacing.

Nailed Joints
Because nails rely on shear resistance, a common problem when nailing is splitting of the wood
at the end of the member, which is a shear failure. Tables list the shear force capacity per unit
length of embedment per nail. Jointed members used for beams will have shear stress across the
connector, and the pitch spacing, p, can be determined from VQ connected area
the shear stress equation when the capacity, F, is known: nFconnector p
I

284
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 1* (pg 328)

Fc = 440 psi , = 36.3 lb/ft3

285
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 1 (continued)

286
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 2* (pg 326)

PLL = 1,500 lb.
Using DF-L No. 1, design the simply supported floor beam shown to meet bending,
shear, and deflection criteria. Fb = 1300 psi; Fv = 85 psi; E = 1.6 x 106 psi; 9 ft
= 35 lb/ft3.

SOLUTION:

Ordinarily, floor joist are closely spaced together, which allows for the use of the repetitive
use factor, Cr. Floor joist also will not have very large uniformly distributed loads because 17,325 lb-ft
the spacing is typically 2 feet apart or less. We will assume this beam is not a joist. But it
does have live load from occupancy which is considered normal, so the load duration factor,
CD, is 1. The other conditions (like temperature and moisture) must be assumed to be
normal (and have values of 1.0). The allowable stresses can be determined from:
2,675 lb
F'b = CDFb = (1.0)(1300) = 1300 psi F'v = CDFv = (1.0)(85) = 85 psi 475 lb

Bending: Shear:
M 17, 325lb ft (12 in ft ) 3V 3(2,825lb) -1,025 lb
S req ' d = = 159.9in 3 Areq ' d = = 49.8in2
Fb 1300 psi 2Fv 2(85 psi)
-2,825 lb
Try a 6 x 14. This satisfies both requirements with the least amount of area. (See the 8 x 12.)
(A = 74.25 in2, S = 167.1 in3, Ix = 11270.7 in4)
35 lb (74.25in 2 )
ft 3
wself wt . = A = = 18.05 lb ft which is additional dead load!
(12 in ft ) 2
Because the maximum moment from the additional distributed load is not at the same location as the maximum moment from the
diagram, we have to find Ms.w. at 11 feet from the end in order to add them:
18.05 lb ft (11 ft )(20 11 ft ) 18, 218.5lb ft (12 in ft )
M adjusted = 17, 325lb ft + = 18, 218.5lb ft *
and S req 'd = 168.2in 3
2 1300 psi

The same holds true for the contribution to the shear:

18.05 lb ft (20 ft ) * 3(3005.5lb)
Vadjusted = 2,825lb + = 3, 005.5lb and Areq 'd = 53.04in2
2 2(85 psi )
Check that the section chosen satisfies the new required section modulus and area:
Is Sthat I have Sthat I need? Is 167.1 in3 168.2 in3? No, NOT OK.
Is Athat I have Athat I need? Is 74.25 in2 53.04 in2? Yes, OK.

Because the section that I have is not adequate, I need to choose one that is. This will have a larger self weight that must be
determined and included in the maximum moment (with the initial maximum). It will make S*reqd and A*reqd bigger as well, and
the new section properties must be evaluated with respect to these new values.

Try a 8 x 14. This satisfies both requirements with the least amount of area. (A = 101.25 in2, S = 227.8 in3, Ix = 1537.7 in4).
35 lb (101.25in 2 )
ft 3
wself wt . = A = = 24.6 lb ft which is more additional dead load!
(12 in ft ) 2
24.6 lb ft (11 ft )(20 11 ft ) 18, 542.7lb ft (12 in ft )
M adjusted = 17,325lb ft + = 18,542.7 lb ft *
and S req 'd = 171.2in 3
2 1300 psi

The same holds true for the contribution to the shear:

24.6 lb ft (20 ft ) * 3(3071lb)
Vadjusted = 2,825lb + = 3, 071lb and Areq 'd = 54.2in 2
2 2(85 psi)

287
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 2 (continued)

Check that the section chosen satisfies the new required section modulus and area:
Is Sthat I have Sthat I need? Is 227.8 in3 171.2 in3? Yes, OK.
Is Athat I have Athat I need? Is 101.25 in2 54.2 in2? Yes, OK.

Deflection:

The total deflection due to dead and live loads must not exceed a limit specified by the building code adopted (for example, the
International Building Code) or recommended by construction manuals. For a floor beam, the usual limits are L/360 for live load
only and L/240 for live and dead load.
20 ft (12 in ft ) 20 ft (12 in ft )
LL-limit = = 0.67in total-limit = = 1.0in
360 240
Superpositioning (combining or superimposing) of several load conditions can be performed, but care must be taken that the
deflections calculated for the separate cases to obtain the maximum must be deflections at the same location in order to be
added together. In this case, the uniform distributed load maximum is at the center, while the concentrated load maximum is not.
When you cant determine the actual location, you will need advice or tools. Multiframe indicates that the maximum is at the
center with the combined loadings (see plot under the V & M diagrams).

concentrated load (live load): (a is the distance from the supports to the load from the left)
Pbx 2 2 1500lb(9 ft )(10 ft )
x ( when x<a ) = (l b x 2 ) = ((20 ft ) 2 (9 ft )2 (10 ft )2 )(12 in ft )3 = 0.173in
6 EI l 6(1.6 x106 psi)(1537.7in 4 )(20 ft )
distributed load (dead load:
5 wl 4 5(100 + 24.6 lb ft )(20 ft ) 4 (12 in ft )3
max ( at center ) = = = 0.182in
384 EI 384(1.6 x10 6 psi )(1537.7in 4 )
distributed load (live load:
5 wl 4 5(100 lb ft )(20 ft ) 4 (12 in ft )3
max ( at center ) = = = 0.146in
384 EI 384(1.6 x106 psi )(1537.7in 4 )

Is live that I have live-limit? Is (0.173 in + 0.146 in) =0.318 in 0.67 in? Yes, OK.
Is total that I have total-limit? Is (0.173 in + 0.146 in + 0.182 in) = 0.501 in 1.0 in? Yes, OK.

USE an 8 x 14.

288
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 3 (pg 379)

Emin = 580 x 103 psi

289
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 4 (pg 381)

Fc = 1650 psi , E = 1.8 x 106 psi,

Emin = 915 x 103 psi
Also verify with allowable load tables

290
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 5

Fb = 2152 psi Fc = 1350 psi Emin = 580 x 103 psi

A = 8.25 in2
Sx* = 7.56 in3

378 LB (D only)

= E (CM )(Ct )(Ci ) = 580,000(1.0)(1.0)(1.0)=580,000 psi

Emin

0.822Emin
0.822(580,000)
FcE = = = 909 psi
2
( le / d) ( 22.9 )2
CD = 1.6 from wind loading

FcE 909
= = 0.383 0.35
* 2376
Fc
= 2376(0.35) = 832 psi

16in
12 in / ft

809
0.399
832

291
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 6

Example 7
A nominal 4 x 6 in. redwood beam is to be supported by
two 2 x 6 in. members acting as a spaced column. The
minimum spacing and edge distances for the inch bolts
are shown. How many in. bolts will be required to
safely carry a load of 1500 lb? Use the chart provided.

292
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 8

293
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

Example 8 (continued)

294
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

295
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

296
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.1 Su2015abn

ASD Beam Design Flow Chart

Collect data: L, , , limits; find beam charts

for load cases and actual equations

Collect data: Fb & Fv and all

adjustment factors (CD, etc.)

Find Vmax & Mmax from

constructing diagrams or
using beam chart formulas

Find Sreqd and pick a section

from a table with Sx greater or
equal to Sreqd

Calculate self wt. using A found

and . Find Mmax-adj & Vmax-adj.

No Calculate Sreqd-adj using Mmax-adj.

Is Sx(picked) Sreqd-adj?
(OR calculate fb. Is fb Fb?)

Yes

Calculate Areqd-adj using Vmax-adj.

No
Is A(picked) Areqd-adj?
pick a new section with a
(OR calculate fv. Is fv Fv?) larger area

Calculate max using

superpositioning and beam chart
equations with the Ix for the
section
too big
I req' d I trial
is max limits? lim it
This may be both the limit for live load No
deflection and total load deflection.) pick a section with a larger Ix

Yes (DONE)

297
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.2 S2015abn

Beam Design and Deflections

Notation:
a = name for width dimension Mmax-adj = maximum bending moment
A = name for area adjusted to include self weight
Areqd-adj = area required at allowable stress Mn nominal flexure strength with the full
when shear is adjusted to include section at the yield stress for LRFD
self weight Mu = maximum moment from factored
Aweb = area of the web of a wide flange loads for LRFD
section P = name for axial force vector
b = width of a rectangle Q = first moment area about a neutral
= total width of material at a axis
horizontal section R = radius of curvature of a deformed
= name for height dimension beam
c = largest distance from the neutral S = section modulus
axis to the top or bottom edge of a Sreqd = section modulus required at
beam allowable stress
c1 = coefficient for shear stress for a T = torque (axial moment)
rectangular bar in torsion V = internal shear force
d = calculus symbol for differentiation Vmax = maximum internal shear force
DL = shorthand for dead load Vmax-adj = maximum internal shear force
E = modulus of elasticity adjusted to include self weight
fb = bending stress Vu = maximum shear from factored loads
fp = bearing stress (see P) for LRFD
fv = shear stress w = name for distributed load
fv-max = maximum shear stress wself wt = name for distributed load from self
Fb = allowable bending stress weight of member
Fv = allowable shear stress x = horizontal distance
Fp = allowable bearing stress y = vertical distance
Fy = yield strength actual = actual beam deflection
Fyweb = yield strength of the web material allowable = allowable beam deflection
h = height of a rectangle limit = allowable beam deflection limit
I = moment of inertia with respect to max = maximum beam deflection
neutral axis bending b = resistance factor for flexure in
Itrial = moment of inertia of trial section LRFD design
Ireqd = moment of inertia required at v = resistance factor for shear for
limiting deflection
J = polar moment of inertia LRFD
L = name for span length = density or unit weight
LL = shorthand for live load = slope of the beam deflection curve
LRFD = load and resistance factor design = radial distance
M = internal bending moment = symbol for integration
Mmax = maximum internal bending moment = summation symbol

299
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.2 S2015abn

Criteria for Design

Mc
Allowable bending stress or bending stress from LRFD should not be Fb f b =
exceeded: I
M
Knowing M and Fb, the minimum section modulus fitting the limit is: S req 'd
Fb

Besides strength, we also need to be concerned about serviceability. This involves things like
limiting deflections & cracking, controlling noise and vibrations, preventing excessive
settlements of foundations and durability. When we know about a beam section and its material,
we can determine beam deformations.

Determining Maximum Bending Moment

Drawing V and M diagrams will show us the maximum values for design. Remember:
V = ( w)dx dV dM
= w =V
M = (V )dx dx dx

Determining Maximum Bending Stress

For a prismatic member (constant cross section), the maximum normal stress will occur at the
maximum moment.

For a non-prismatic member, the stress varies with the cross section AND the moment.

Deflections

If the bending moment changes, M(x) across a beam of constant material and cross 1 M ( x)
section then the curvature will change:
=
R EI
1
EI
The slope of the n.a. of a beam, , will be tangent to the radius of = slope = M ( x)dx
curvature, R:
1 1
The equation for deflection, y, along a beam is: y=
EI dx =
EI M ( x )dx
Elastic curve equations can be found in handbooks, textbooks, design manuals, etc...Computer
programs can be used as well.

Elastic curve equations can be superpositioned ONLY if the stresses are in the elastic range.

300
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.2 S2015abn

The deflected shape is roughly the shame shape as the bending moment diagram flipped but is
constrained by supports and geometry.

Boundary Conditions

The boundary conditions are geometrical values that we know

slope or deflection which may be restrained by supports or
symmetry.

At Pins, Rollers, Fixed Supports: y=0

At Fixed Supports: =0

At Inflection Points From Symmetry: =0

The Slope Is Zero At The Maximum Deflection ymax:.

dy
= = slope = 0
dx

Allowable Deflection Limits

All building codes and design codes limit deflection for beam types and damage that could
happen based on service condition and severity.
y max ( x) = actual allowable = L
value

Use LL only DL+LL

Roof beams:
Industrial (no ceiling) L/180 L/120
Commercial
plaster ceiling L/240 L/180
no plaster L/360 L/240
Floor beams:
Ordinary Usage L/360 L/240
Roof or floor (damageable elements) L/480

301
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.2 S2015abn

Beam Loads & Load Tracing

In order to determine the loads on a beam (or girder, joist, column, frame, foundation...) we can
start at the top of a structure and determine the tributary area that a load acts over and the beam
needs to support. Loads come from material weights, people, and the environment. This area is
assumed to be from half the distance to the next beam over to halfway to the next beam.

The reactions must be supported by the next lower structural element ad infinitum, to the ground.

Design Procedure

The intent is to find the most light weight member satisfying the section modulus size.

1. Know Fb (allowable stress) for the material or Fy & Fu for LRFD.

2. Draw V & M, finding Mmax.
M max
3. Calculate Sreqd. This step is equivalent to determining f b = Fb
bh 2 S
4. For rectangular beams S =
6
- For steel or timber: use the section charts to find S that will work and remember that
the beam self weight will increase Sreqd. And for steel, the design charts show the
lightest section within a grouping of similar Ss. wself wt = A
- For any thing else, try a nice value for b, and calculate h or the other way around.
****Determine the updated Vmax and Mmax including the beam self weight, and verify that the
updated Sreqd has been met.******

5. Consider lateral stability

6. Evaluate horizontal shear stresses using Vmax to determine if f v Fv

3V V VQ
For rectangular beams, Ws, and others: f v max = or
2 A Aweb Ib
P
7. Provide adequate bearing area at supports: f p = Fp
A
T T
8. Evaluate shear due to torsion fv = or Fv
J c1 ab 2
(circular section or rectangular)

9. Evaluate the deflection to determine if max LL LL allowed and/or max Total T allowed

**** note: when calculated > limit, Irequired can be found with: too big
I req' d I trial
and Sreqd will be satisfied for similar self weight ***** lim it
FOR ANY EVALUATION:
Redesign (with a new section) at any point that a stress or serviceability criteria is
NOT satisfied and re-evaluate each condition until it is satisfactory.

302
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.2 S2015abn

Example 1 (changed from pg 284) (superpositioning) 0.75 m

. Investigate using Beam Diagrams and Formulas.

SOLUTION:

By examining the support conditions, we are looking for a cantilevered beam from Cases 18 through 23.

There is a case for uniformly distributed load across the span (19) and for a load at any point (21).

For both these cases, it shows that the maximum shear AND maximum moment
are located at the fixed end. If we add the values, the shear and diagrams should V + M +
look like this:

We can find the maximum shear (at B) from V = P + wl = 10kN + 2kN/m3m = 16kN

The maximum moment (at B) will be M = Pb+wl2/2 = 10kN2.25m + 2kN/m(3m)2/2 = 31.5kN-m

The key values for the diagrams can be found with the general equations (Vx and Mx):
VC = - wx = -2kN/m0.25m = -0.5kN; VC = -P wx = -10kN - 2kN/m0.25m = -10.5kN
MC = -WX2/2 = 2kN/m(0.25m)2/2 = 0.0625kN-m

We can find the maximum deflection by looking at the cases. Both say max. (at free end), so the values can be added directly.
Superpositioning of values must be at the same x location. Assume E = 70x103 MPa and I = 45x106 mm4

= 18.08 mm + 6.43 mm = 24.5 mm

303
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.2 S2015abn

Example 2 (pg 275) (superpositioning)

using Beam Diagrams and Formulas.

SOLUTION:

By examining the support conditions, we are looking for beam with an overhang on one end from Cases 24 through 28. (Even
though the overhang is on the right, and not on the left like our beam, we can still use the information by recognizing that we can
mirror the figure about the left end.)

There is a case for a load at the end (26) but none for a load in between the supports. This is because it behaves exactly like a
simply supported beam in this instance (no shear or bending on the overhang). The case for this is #5 (reversed again).

If we flip the diagrams (both vertically and horizontally) and add the
values, the resulting shear and bending moment should look like this: V + M +

We still have to find the peak values of shear and the location of the
zero shear to find the critical moment values.
(Notice R1 is shown down.)

(from the total downward load R1(D))

VA = -10k VB = -10k + 20k = 10k

VD = 10k 2 k/ft(10ft) = -10k
x (from B) = 10k/2k/ft = 5 ft
MB = -10k(10ft) = -100k-ft
(MC = -100k-ft + 10k(10ft) = 0)
Mx = 0 +10k/ft(5ft)/2 = 25k-ft

VMAX = 10 k MMAX = -100k-ft

We can calculate the deflection

between the supports. (And at the end
for case 5 if we derive the slope!)
Assume E = 29x103 ksi and I = 103 in4

Well investigate the maximum between the supports from case 26 (because it isnt obvious where the maximum will be.)
(to left of D) and with x (11.55ft) greater than a (10ft):

Note: Because there is only negative moment, the deflection is actually up!

= -1.484 in + 1.343 in = -0.141 in (up)

304 304
ARCH 331 Note Set 15.2 S2015abn

Beam Design Flow Chart

Collect data: L, , , llimits; find beam charts

for load cases and actual equations

ASD Allowable Stress or LRFD

LRFD Design?

Collect data: Fb & Fv Collect data: load factors, Fy,

Fu, and equations for shear
capacity with V
Find Vmax & Mmax from
constructing diagrams or
using beam chart formulas Find Vu & Mu from
constructing diagrams or
using beam chart formulas
with the factored loads
Find Sreqd and pick a section
from a table with Sx greater or
equal to Sreqd
Pick a steel section from a chart
having bMn Mu for the known
unbraced length
Calculate self wt. using A found
and . Find Mmax-adj & Vmax-adj.

Is Vu v(0.6FywebAweb) No
pick a section
with a larger
No Calculate Sreqd-adj using Mmax-adj. Yes web area
Is Sx(picked) Sreqd-adj?
(OR calculate fb. Is fb Fb?)

Yes

Calculate Areqd-adj using Vmax-adj.

No
Is A(picked) Areqd-adj?
pick a new section with a
(OR calculate fv. Is fv Fv?) larger area

Calculate max (no load factors!)

using superpositioning and beam
chart equations with the Ix for the
section

too big
I req' d I trial
is max limits? lim it
This may be both the limit for live load No
deflection and total load deflection.) pick a section with a larger Ix

Yes (DONE)

305
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Steel Design

Notation:
a =name for width dimension db = nominal bolt diameter
A =name for area D = shorthand for dead load
Ab =area of a bolt DL = shorthand for dead load
Ae =effective net area found from the e = eccentricity
product of the net area An by the E = shorthand for earthquake load
shear lag factor U = modulus of elasticity
Ag = gross area, equal to the total area fc = axial compressive stress
ignoring any holes fb = bending stress
Agv = gross area subjected to shear for fp = bearing stress
block shear rupture fv = shear stress
An = net area, equal to the gross area fv-max= maximum shear stress
subtracting any holes, as is Anet fy = yield stress
Ant = net area subjected to tension for F = shorthand for fluid load
block shear rupture Fallow(able) = allowable stress
Anv = net area subjected to shear for block Fa = allowable axial (compressive) stress
shear rupture Fb = allowable bending stress
Aw = area of the web of a wide flange Fcr = flexural buckling stress
section Fe = elastic critical buckling stress
AISC = American Institute of Steel FEXX = yield strength of weld material
Construction Fn = nominal strength in LRFD
ASD = allowable stress design = nominal tension or shear strength of
b = name for a (base) width a bolt
= total width of material at a Fp = allowable bearing stress
horizontal section Ft = allowable tensile stress
= name for height dimension Fu = ultimate stress prior to failure
bf = width of the flange of a steel beam Fv = allowable shear stress
cross section Fy = yield strength
B1 = factor for determining Mu for Fyw = yield strength of web material
combined bending and compression F.S. = factor of safety
c = largest distance from the neutral g = gage spacing of staggered bolt
axis to the top or bottom edge of a holes
beam G = relative stiffness of columns to
c1 = coefficient for shear stress for a beams in a rigid connection, as is
rectangular bar in torsion h = name for a height
Cb = lateral torsional buckling hc = height of the web of a wide flange
modification factor for moment in steel section
ASD & LRFD steel beam design H = shorthand for lateral pressure load
Cc = column slenderness classification I = moment of inertia with respect to
constant for steel column design neutral axis bending
Cm = modification factor accounting for Itrial = moment of inertia of trial section
combined stress in steel design Ireqd = moment of inertia required at
Cv = web shear coefficient limiting deflection
d = calculus symbol for differentiation Iy = moment of inertia about the y axis
= depth of a wide flange section J = polar moment of inertia
= nominal bolt diameter

307
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

k = distance from outer face of W N = bearing length on a wide flange

flange to the web toe of fillet steel section
= shape factor for plastic design of = bearing type connection with
steel beams threads included in shear plane
K = effective length factor for columns, p = bolt hole spacing (pitch)
as is k P = name for load or axial force vector
l = name for length Pa = allowable axial force

b = length of beam in rigid joint = required axial force (ASD)

c = length of column in rigid joint Pallowable = allowable axial force
Pc = available axial strength
L = name for length or span length Pe1 = Euler buckling strength
= shorthand for live load Pn = nominal column load capacity in
Lb = unbraced length of a steel beam LRFD steel design
Lc = clear distance between the edge of a Pr = required axial force
hole and edge of next hole or edge Pu = factored column load calculated
of the connected steel plate in the from load factors in LRFD steel
direction of the load design
Le = effective length that can buckle for Q = first moment area about a neutral
column design, as is
e axis
Lr = shorthand for live roof load = generic axial load quantity for
= maximum unbraced length of a LRFD design
steel beam in LRFD design for r = radius of gyration
inelastic lateral-torsional buckling ry = radius of gyration with respect to a
Lp = maximum unbraced length of a y-axis
steel beam in LRFD design for full R = generic load quantity (force, shear,
plastic flexural strength moment, etc.) for LRFD design
L = length of an angle in a connector = shorthand for rain or ice load
with staggered holes = radius of curvature of a deformed
LL = shorthand for live load beam
LRFD = load and resistance factor design Ra = required strength (ASD)
M = internal bending moment Rn = nominal value (capacity) to be
Ma = required bending moment (ASD) multiplied by in LRFD and
Mn = nominal flexure strength with the divided by the safety factor in
full section at the yield stress for ASD
LRFD beam design Ru = factored design value for LRFD
Mmax = maximum internal bending moment design
Mmax-adj = maximum bending moment s = longitudinal center-to-center
adjusted to include self weight spacing of any two consecutive
Mp = internal bending moment when all holes
fibers in a cross section reach the S = shorthand for snow load
yield stress = section modulus
Mu = maximum moment from factored = allowable strength per length of a
loads for LRFD beam design weld for a given size
My = internal bending moment when the Sreqd = section modulus required at
extreme fibers in a cross section allowable stress
reach the yield stress Sreqd-adj = section modulus required at
n = number of bolts allowable stress when moment is
n.a. = shorthand for neutral axis adjusted to include self weight
SC = slip critical bolted connection
308
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

t = thickness of the connected material y = vertical distance

tf = thickness of flange of wide flange Z = plastic section modulus of a steel
tw = thickness of web of wide flange beam
T = torque (axial moment) Zreqd = plastic section modulus required
= shorthand for thermal load Zx = plastic section modulus of a steel
= throat size of a weld beam with respect to the x axis
U = shear lag factor for steel tension = method factor for B1 equation
member design actual = actual beam deflection
Ubs = reduction coefficient for block allowable = allowable beam deflection
shear rupture limit = allowable beam deflection limit
V = internal shear force max = maximum beam deflection
Va = required shear (ASD) y = yield strain (no units)
Vmax = maximum internal shear force
= resistance factor
Vmax-adj = maximum internal shear force
adjusted to include self weight = diameter symbol
Vn = nominal shear strength capacity for b = resistance factor for bending for
LRFD beam design LRFD
Vu = maximum shear from factored loads c = resistance factor for compression
for LRFD beam design for LRFD
w = name for distributed load t = resistance factor for tension for
wadjusted = adjusted distributed load for
equivalent live load deflection limit LRFD
wequivalent = the equivalent distributed load v = resistance factor for shear for
derived from the maximum bending LRFD
moment = load factor in LRFD design
wself wt = name for distributed load from self = pi (3.1415 radians or 180)
weight of member = slope of the beam deflection curve
W = shorthand for wind load = radial distance
x = horizontal distance
= safety factor for ASD
X = bearing type connection with
threads excluded from the shear = symbol for integration
plane = summation symbol

Steel Design

Structural design standards for steel are established

by the Manual of Steel Construction published by the
American Institute of Steel Construction, and uses
Allowable Stress Design and Load and Factor
Resistance Design. With the 13th edition, both
methods are combined in one volume which provides
common requirements for analyses and design and
requires the application of the same set of
specifications.

309
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Materials

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) is the organization responsible for material and
other standards related to manufacturing. Materials meeting their standards are guaranteed to
have the published strength and material properties for a designation.

A36 carbon steel used for plates, angles Fy = 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi, E = 29,000 ksi
A572 high strength low-alloy use for some beams Fy = 60 ksi, Fu = 75 ksi, E = 29,000 ksi
A992 for building framing used for most beams Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi, E = 29,000 ksi
(A572 Grade 50 has the same properties as A992)

ASD Rn
Ra

where Ra = required strength (dead or live; force, moment or stress)
Rn = nominal strength specified for ASD
= safety factor

Factors of Safety are applied to the limit stresses for allowable stress values:

bending (braced, Lb < Lp) = 1.67

bending (unbraced, Lp < Lb and Lb > Lr) = 1.67 (nominal moment reduces)
shear (beams) = 1.5 or 1.67
shear (bolts) = 2.00 (tabular nominal strength)
shear (welds) = 2.00

- Lb is the unbraced length between bracing points, laterally

- Lp is the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding
- Lr is the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-torsional
buckling

LRFD where  Ru = i Ri
Ru Rn
where = resistance factor
= load factor for the type of load
R = load (dead or live; force, moment or stress)
Ru = factored load (moment or stress)
Rn = nominal load (ultimate capacity; force, moment or stress)

Nominal strength is defined as the

capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads, as determined by

computations using specified material strengths (such as yield strength, Fy, or ultimate
strength, Fu) and dimensions and formulas derived from accepted principles of structural
mechanics or by field tests or laboratory tests of scaled models, allowing for modeling
effects and differences between laboratory and field conditions

310
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Factored Load Combinations

The design strength, Rn , of each structural element or structural assembly must equal or exceed
the design strength based on the ASCE-7 (2010) combinations of factored nominal loads:

1.4D
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (L or 0.5W)
1.2D + 1.0W + L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
1.2D + 1.0E + L + 0.2S
0.9D + 1.0W
0.9D + 1.0E

Criteria for Design of Beams

Mc
Allowable normal stress or normal stress from LRFD should not be F b or F n f b =
I
exceeded: ( M a M n / or M u b M n )
Knowing M and Fy, the minimum plastic section modulus fitting the limit is:
Ma M
Z req 'd S req' d
Fy Fb
Determining Maximum Bending Moment

Drawing V and M diagrams will show us the maximum values for design. Remember:
V = ( w)dx dV dM
= w =V
M = (V )dx dx dx

Determining Maximum Bending Stress

For a prismatic member (constant cross section), the maximum normal stress will occur at the
maximum moment.

For a non-prismatic member, the stress varies with the cross section AND the moment.

Deflections
1 M ( x)
If the bending moment changes, M(x) across a beam of constant material and cross =
section then the curvature will change: R EI

1
EI
The slope of the n.a. of a beam, , will be tangent to the radius of = slope = M ( x)dx
curvature, R:
1 1
The equation for deflection, y, along a beam is: y=
EI dx =
EI M ( x)dx

311
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Elastic curve equations can be found in handbooks, textbooks, design manuals, etc...Computer
programs can be used as well. Elastic curve equations can be superimposed ONLY if the stresses
are in the elastic range.

The deflected shape is roughly the same shape flipped as the bending moment diagram but is
constrained by supports and geometry.

Allowable Deflection Limits

All building codes and design codes limit deflection for beam types and damage that could
happen based on service condition and severity.
y max ( x) = actual allowable = L
value

Use LL only DL+LL*

Roof beams:
Industrial (no ceiling) L/180 L/120
Commercial
plaster ceiling L/240 L/180
no plaster L/360 L/240
Floor beams:
Ordinary Usage L/360 L/240
Roof or floor (damageable elements) L/480
* IBC 2012 states that DL for steel elements shall be taken as zero

Lateral Buckling

With compression stresses in the top of a beam, a sudden popping or buckling can happen
even at low stresses. In order to prevent it, we need to brace it along the top, or laterally brace it,
or provide a bigger Iy.

Local Buckling in Steel Wide-flange Beams Web Crippling or Flange Buckling

Concentrated forces on a steel beam can cause the web to buckle (called web crippling). Web
stiffeners under the beam loads and bearing plates at the supports reduce that tendency. Web
stiffeners also prevent the web from shearing in plate girders.

312
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

The maximum support load and interior load can be

determined from:
Pn (max end) = ( 2.5k + N )Fyw t w

Pn (interior) = ( 5k + N )Fyw t w
where tw = thickness of the web
Fyw = yield strength of the web
N = bearing length
k = dimension to fillet found in beam section tables
= 1.00 (LRFD) = 1.50 (ASD)

Beam Loads & Load Tracing

In order to determine the loads on a beam (or girder, joist, column, frame, foundation...) we can
start at the top of a structure and determine the tributary area that a load acts over and the beam
needs to support. Loads come from material weights, people, and the environment. This area is
assumed to be from half the distance to the next beam over to halfway to the next beam.

The reactions must be supported by the next lower structural element ad infinitum, to the ground.

LRFD - Bending or Flexure

For determining the flexural design strength, b Mn , for resistance to pure bending (no axial
load) in most flexural members where the following conditions exist, a single calculation will
suffice:

i R i = M u b M n = 0 . 9 F y Z

where Mu = maximum moment from factored loads

b = resistance factor for bending = 0.9
Mn = nominal moment (ultimate capacity)
Fy = yield strength of the steel
Z = plastic section modulus

f
Plastic Section Modulus
fy = 50ksi
Plastic behavior is characterized by a yield point and an
increase in strain with no increase in stress. E
1

y = 0.001724

313
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Internal Moments and Plastic Hinges

Plastic hinges can develop when all of the material in a cross

section sees the yield stress. Because all the material at that section
can strain without any additional load, the member segments on
either side of the hinge can rotate, possibly causing instability.

For a rectangular section:

2
I bh 2 b(2c ) 2bc 2
Elastic to fy: M y = fy = fy = fy = fy
c 6 6 3

Fully Plastic: M ult or M p = bc 2 f y = 3 M y

2

For a non-rectangular section and internal equilibrium at y, the

n.a. will not necessarily be at the centroid. The n.a. occurs where
the Atension = Acompression. The reactions occur at the centroids of the
tension and compression areas.

Instability from Plastic Hinges

Atension = Acompression

Shape Factor:

The ratio of the plastic moment to the elastic moment at yield:

M
k= p k = 3/2 for a rectangle
My
k 1.1 for an I beam

Plastic Section Modulus

Mp
Z= and k=Z
fy S

314
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Design for Shear

Va Vn / or Vu vVn
The nominal shear strength is dependent on the cross section shape. Case 1: With a thick or stiff
web, the shear stress is resisted by the web of a wide flange shape (with the exception of a
handful of Ws). Case 2: When the web is not stiff for doubly symmetric shapes, singly
symmetric shapes (like channels) (excluding round high strength steel shapes), inelastic web
buckling occurs. When the web is very slender, elastic web buckling occurs, reducing the
capacity even more:
E
Case 1) For h tw 2.24 Vn = 0.6Fyw Aw v = 1.00 (LRFD) = 1.50 (ASD)
Fy

where h equals the clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner
radius for rolled shapes
Vn = nominal shear strength
Fyw = yield strength of the steel in the web
Aw = twd = area of the web

E
Case 2) For h tw > 2.24 Vn = 0.6Fyw AwCv v = 0.9 (LRFD) = 1.67 (ASD)
Fy

where Cv is a reduction factor (1.0 or less by equation)

Design for Flexure

M a M n / or Mu bMn b = 0.90 (LRFD) = 1.67 (ASD)

The nominal flexural strength Mn is the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
E
1. yielding, limited at length Lp = 1.76ry , where ry is the radius of gyration in y
Fy

2. lateral-torsional buckling limited at length Lr

3. flange local buckling
4. web local buckling

Beam design charts show available moment, Mn/ and b Mn , for unbraced length, Lb, of the
compression flange in one-foot increments from 1 to 50 ft. for values of the bending coefficient
Cb = 1. For values of 1<Cb2.3, the required flexural strength Mu can be reduced by dividing it
by Cb. (Cb = 1 when the bending moment at any point within an unbraced length is larger than
that at both ends of the length. Cb of 1 is conservative and permitted to be used in any case.
When the free end is unbraced in a cantilever or overhang, Cb = 1. The full formula is provided
below.)

NOTE: the self weight is not included in determination of Mn/ and b Mn

315
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Compact Sections
For a laterally braced compact section (one for which the plastic moment can be reached before
local buckling) only the limit state of yielding is applicable. For unbraced compact beams and
non-compact tees and double angles, only the limit states of yielding and lateral-torsional
buckling are applicable.
bf E h E
Compact sections meet the following criteria: 0.38 and c 3.76
2t f Fy tw Fy
where:
bf = flange width in inches
tf = flange thickness in inches
E = modulus of elasticity in ksi
Fy = minimum yield stress in ksi
hc = height of the web in inches
tw = web thickness in inches

With lateral-torsional buckling the nominal flexural strength is

Lb L p
M n = C b M p ( M p 0 .7 F y S x ) Mp
L L
r p

where Mp = Mn = FyZx
and Cb is a modification factor for non-uniform moment diagrams where, when both ends of
the beam segment are braced:
12.5M max
Cb =
2.5M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C
Mmax = absolute value of the maximum moment in the unbraced beam segment
MA = absolute value of the moment at the quarter point of the unbraced beam segment
MB = absolute value of the moment at the center point of the unbraced beam segment
MC = absolute value of the moment at the three quarter point of the unbraced beam
segment length.

Available Flexural Strength Plots

Plots of the available moment for the unbraced length for wide flange sections are useful to find
sections to satisfy the design criteria of M a M n / or M u b M n . The maximum moment
that can be applied on a beam (taking self weight into account), Ma or Mu, can be plotted against
the unbraced length, Lb. The limiting length, Lp (fully plastic), is indicated by a solid dot (),
while the limiting length, Lr (for lateral torsional buckling), is indicated by an open dot (
).
Solid lines indicate the most economical, while dashed lines indicate there is a lighter section
that could be used. Cb, which is a lateral torsional buckling modification factor for non-zero
moments at the ends, is 1 for simply supported beams (0 moments at the ends). (see figure)

316
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Design Procedure
The intent is to find the most light weight member (which is economical) satisfying the section
modulus size.

1. Determine the unbraced length to choose the limit state (yielding, lateral torsional buckling
or more extreme) and the factor of safety and limiting moments. Determine the material.
2. Draw V & M, finding Vmax and Mmax.for unfactored loads (ASD, Va & Ma) or from factored
loads (LRFD, Vu & Mu)
3. Calculate Zreqd when yielding is the limit state. This step is equivalent to determining if
M max M max M max Mu
fb = Fb , Z req' d = and Z req 'd to meet the design criteria that
S Fb Fy b Fy

Ma Mn / or Mu bMn
If the limit state is something other than yielding,
determine the nominal moment, Mn, or use plots of
available moment to unbraced length, Lb.

4. For steel: use the section charts to find a trial Z and

remember that the beam self weight (the second number
in the section designation) will increase Zreqd. The
design charts show the lightest section within a grouping
of similar Zs.
**** Determine the updated Vmax and Mmax including the
beam self weight, and verify that the updated Zreqd has been met.******

317
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

5. Consider lateral stability.

6. Evaluate horizontal shear using Vmax. This step is equivalent to determining if f v Fv is

satisfied to meet the design criteria that Va Vn / or Vu vVn
3V V V
For I beams: f v max = = Vn = 0.6 Fyw Aw or V n = 0.6 F yw Aw C v
2 A Aweb t w d
VQ
Others: f v max =
Ib

P
7. Provide adequate bearing area at supports. This step is equivalent to determining if fp = Fp
A
is satisfied to meet the design criteria that Pa Pn / or Pu Pn
T T
8. Evaluate shear due to torsion fv = or Fv (circular section or rectangular)
J c1 ab2
9. Evaluate the deflection to determine if maxLL LLallowed and/or maxTotal Total allowed

**** note: when calculated > limit, Ireqd can be found with: too big
I req' d I trial
and Zreqd will be satisfied for similar self weight ***** lim it

FOR ANY EVALUATION:

Redesign (with a new section) at any point that a stress or serviceability criteria is
NOT satisfied and re-evaluate each condition until it is satisfactory.

Load Tables for Uniformly Loaded Joists & Beams

Tables exist for the common loading situation of uniformly distributed load. The tables provide
the safe distributed loads based on bending and deflection limits. For specific clear spans, they
provide maximum total loads and live loads for a specific deflection limits. wequivalent L2
If the load is not uniform, an equivalent uniform load can be calculated M max =
from the maximum moment equation: 8
If the deflection limit needed is not that of the table,
the design live load must be adjusted. For example: L / 360 table limit
wadjusted = wll have
L / 400 wanted

Criteria for Design of Columns

If we know the loads, we can select a section that is

adequate for strength & buckling.
If we know the length, we can find the limiting load
satisfying strength & buckling.

318
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Allowable Stress Design

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manual of ASD, 9th ed:

Long and slender: [ Le/r Cc, preferably < 200]

F 12 2 E
Fallowable = cr =
F .S . 23 Kl 2
( )
r
The yield limit is idealized into a parabolic curve that blends into the Eulers Formula at Cc.

With Fy = 36 ksi, Cc = 126.1 2 2 E

Cc =
With Fy = 50 ksi, Cc = 107.0 Fy

Short and stubby: [Le/r < Cc]

Kl 2
( )
Fa = 1 r Fy
2Cc2 F.S.

with:
3
( ) ( )
Kl
5 3 r
Kl
r
F .S . = +
3 8C c 8C c3

Design for Compression

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manual 14th ed:

Pa Pn / or Pu c Pn where Pu = i Pi
is a load factor
P is a load type
is a resistance factor
Pn is the nominal load capacity (strength)

= 0.90 (LRFD) = 1.67 (ASD)

For compression Pn = Fcr Ag

where : Ag is the cross section area and Fcr is the flexural buckling stress

319
 ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

The flexural buckling stress, Fcr, is determined as follows:

KL E
when 4.71 or ( Fe 0.44Fy ):
r Fy
Fy

Fcr = 0 .658 Fe F y

KL E
when > 4.71 or ( Fe < 0.44Fy ):
r Fy
Fcr = 0.877Fe
2E
where Fe is the elastic critical buckling stress: Fe = 2
(KL r )
Design Aids

Tables exist for the value of the flexural buckling stress based on slenderness ratio. In addition,
tables are provided in the AISC Manual for Available Strength in Axial Compression based on
the effective length with respect to least radius of gyration, ry. If the critical effective length is
about the largest radius of gyration, rx, it can be turned into an effective length about the y axis
by dividing by the fraction rx/ry.
Sample AISC Table for Available Strength in Axial Compression

320
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Procedure for Analysis

1. Calculate KL/r for each axis (if necessary). The largest will govern the buckling load.
2. Find Fa or Fcr as a function of KL/r from the appropriate equation (above) or table.
3. Compute Pallowable = FaA or Pn = FcrAg
or alternatively compute fc = P/A or Pu/A
4. Is the design satisfactory?
Is P Pallowable (or Pa Pn/) or Pu cPn? yes, it is; no, it is no good
or Is fc Fa (or Fcr/) or cFcr? yes, it is; no, it is no good

Procedure for Design

1. Guess a size by picking a section.
2. Calculate KL/r for each axis (if necessary). The largest will govern the buckling load.
3. Find Fa or Fcr as a function of KL/r from appropriate equation (above) or table.
4. Compute Pallowable = FaA or Pn = FcrAg
or alternatively compute fc = P/A or Pu/A
5. Is the design satisfactory?
Is P Pallowable (Pa Pn/) or Pu cPn? yes, it is; no, pick a bigger section and go
back to step 2.
Is fc Fa ( Fcr/) or cFcr? yes, it is; no, pick a bigger section and go back to
step 2.
6. Check design efficiency by calculating percentage of stress used:

P Pa P
100% 100% or u 100%
Pallowable P
n c Pn

If value is between 90-100%, it is efficient.
If values is less than 90%, pick a smaller section and go back to step 2.

Columns with Bending (Beam-Columns)

In order to design an adequate section for allowable stress, we have to start somewhere:
1. Make assumptions about the limiting stress from:
- buckling
- axial stress
- combined stress

2. See if we can find values for r or A or Z.

3. Pick a trial section based on if we think r or A is going to govern the section size.

321
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

4. Analyze the stresses and compare to allowable using the allowable stress method or
interaction formula for eccentric columns.

5. Did the section pass the stress test?

- If not, do you increase r or A or Z?
- If so, is the difference really big so that you could decrease r or A or Z to make it
more efficient (economical)?

6. Change the section choice and go back to step 4. Repeat until the section meets the
stress criteria.

Design for Combined Compression and Flexure:

The interaction of compression and bending are included in the form for two conditions based on
the size of the required axial force to the available axial strength. This is notated as Pr (either P
from ASD or Pu from LRFD) for the axial force being supported, and Pc (either Pn/ for ASD
or cPn for LRFD). The increased bending moment due to the P- effect must be determined
and used as the moment to resist.

Pr P 8 Mx My Pu 8 M ux M uy
+ + 1.0
M ny
For 0.2 : + 1.0 +
Pc Pn 9 M nx c Pn 9 b M nx b M ny

(ASD) (LRFD)

Pr P Mx My Pu M ux M uy
For < 0. 2 : + + 1.0 + + 1 .0
Pc 2Pn M nx M ny 2 c Pn b M nx b M ny


(ASD) (LRFD)
where:
for compression c = 0.90 (LRFD) = 1.67 (ASD)
for bending b = 0.90 (LRFD) = 1.67 (ASD)
m
C
For a braced condition, the moment magnification factor B1 is determined by B1 = 1.0
1 ( Pu Pe1 )
where Cm is a modification factor accounting for end conditions
When not subject to transverse loading between supports in plane of bending:
= 0.6 0.4 (M1/M2) where M1 and M2 are the end moments and M1<M2. M1/M2 is
positive when the member is bent in reverse curvature (moments the same
direction), negative when bent in single curvature.
When there is transverse loading between the two ends of a member:
= 0.85, members with restrained (fixed) ends
= 1.00, members with unrestrained ends 2 EA
Pe1 = 2
= 1.00 (LRFD), 1.60 (ASD) (Kl r )
Pe1 = Euler buckling strength

322
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Criteria for Design of Connections

Connections must be able to transfer any axial force, shear, or moment from member to member
or from beam to column.

Connections for steel are typically high strength bolts and electric arc welds. Recommended
practice for ease of construction is to specified shop welding and field bolting.

Bolted and Welded Connections

The limit state for connections depends on the loads:

1. tension yielding
2. shear yielding
3. bearing yielding
4. bending yielding due to eccentric loads
5. rupture

Welds must resist shear stress. The design

strengths depend on the weld materials.

Bolted Connection Design

Bolt designations signify material and type of connection where

SC: slip critical
N: bearing-type connection with bolt threads included in shear plane
X: bearing-type connection with bolt threads excluded from shear plane

A307: similar in strength to A36 steel (also known as ordinary, common or unfinished
bolts)
A325: high strength bolts (Group A)
A490: high strength bolts (higher than A325) (Group B)

323
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Bearing-type connection: no frictional resistance in the contact surfaces is assumed and

slip between members occurs as the load is applied. (Load transfer through bolt
only).
Slip-critical connections: bolts are torqued to a high tensile stress in the shank, resulting
in a clamping force on the connected parts. (Shear resisted by clamping force).
Requires inspections and is useful for structures seeing dynamic or fatigue loading.
Class A indicates the faying (contact) surfaces are clean mill scale or adequate paint
system, while Class B indicates blast cleaning or paint for = 0.50.
Bolts rarely fail in bearing. The material with the hole will more likely yield first.
For the determination of the net area of a bolt hole the width is taken as 1/16 greater than the
nominal dimension of the hole. Standard diameters for bolt holes are 1/16 larger than the bolt
diameter. (This means the net width will be 1/8 larger than the bolt.)

Design for Bolts in Bearing, Shear and Tension

Available shear values are given by bolt type, diameter, and loading (Single or Double shear) in
AISC manual tables. Available shear value for slip-critical connections are given for limit states
of serviceability or strength by bolt type, hole type (standard, short-slotted, long-slotted or
oversized), diameter, and loading. Available tension values are given by bolt type and diameter
in AISC manual tables.
Available bearing force values are given by bolt diameter, ultimate tensile strength, Fu, of the
connected part, and thickness of the connected part in AISC manual tables.

For shear OR tension (same equation) in bolts: Ra Rn / or Ru Rn

where Ru = i Ri
 single shear (or tension) Rn = FnAb
 double shear Rn = Fn2Ab
where = the resistance factor
Fn = the nominal tension or shear strength of the bolt
Ab = the cross section area of the bolt
= 0.75 (LRFD) = 2.00 (ASD)

For bearing of plate material at bolt holes: Ra Rn / or Ru Rn

where Ru = i Ri
deformation at bolt hole is a concern
Rn = 1.2 Lc tFu 2.4dtFu
deformation at bolt hole is not a concern
Rn = 1.5 Lc tFu 3.0dtFu
long slotted holes with the slot perpendicular to the load
Rn = 1.0LctFu 2.0dtFu

324
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

where Rn = the nominal bearing strength

Fu = specified minimum tensile strength
Lc = clear distance between the edges of the hole and the next hole or edge in
the direction of the load
d = nominal bolt diameter
t = thickness of connected material
= 0.75 (LRFD) = 2.00 (ASD)

The minimum edge desistance from the center of the outer most bolt to the edge of a member is
generally 1 times the bolt diameter for the sheared edge and 1 times the bolt diameter for the
rolled or gas cut edges.
The maximum edge distance should not exceed 12 times the thickness of thinner member or 6 in.
Standard bolt hole spacing is 3 in. with the minimum spacing of 2 2 3 times the diameter of the
bolt, db. Common edge distance from the center of last hole to the edge is 1 in..

Tension Member Design

In steel tension members, there

may be bolt holes that reduce the
size of the cross section.
g refers to the row spacing or gage
p refers to the bolt spacing or pitch
s refers to the longitudinal spacing of two consecutive holes

Effective Net Area:

The smallest effective are must be determined by subtracting the bolt hole areas. With staggered
holes, the shortest length must be evaluated.
A series of bolts can also transfer a portion of the tensile force, and some of the effective net
areas see reduced stress.
The effective net area, Ae, is determined from the net area, An, multiplied by a shear lag factor, U,
which depends on the element type and connection configuration. If a portion of a connected
member is not fully connected (like the leg of an angle), the unconnected part is not subject to the
full stress and the shear lag factor can range from 0.6 to 1.0: Ae = AnU

325
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

The staggered hole path area is determined by:

s2
An = Ag Aof all holes + t
4g
where t is the plate thickness, s is each stagger spacing, and g is the gage spacing.

For tension elements: Ra Rn / or Ru Rn

where Ru = i Ri

1. yielding Rn = Fy Ag
= 0.90 (LRFD) = 1.67 (ASD)

2. rupture Rn = Fu Ae
= 0.75 (LRFD) = 2.00 (ASD)

where Ag = the gross area of the member

(excluding holes)
Ae = the effective net area (with holes, etc.)
Fy = the yield strength of the steel
Fu = the tensile strength of the steel (ultimate)

Welded Connections

Weld designations include the strength in the name, i.e.

E70XX has Fy = 70 ksi. Welds are weakest in shear and
are assumed to always fail in the shear mode.

The throat size, T, of a fillet weld is determined

trigonometry by: T = 0.707 weld size*
* When the submerged arc weld process is used, welds over 3/8 will have a
throat thickness of 0.11 in. larger than the formula.

Weld sizes are limited by the size of the parts being put
together and are given in AISC manual table J2.4 along
with the allowable strength per length of fillet weld,
referred to as S.

The maximum size of a fillet weld:

a) cant be greater than the material thickness if it is
or less
b) is permitted to be 1/16 less than the thickness of the
material if it is over

326
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

The minimum length of a fillet weld is 4 times the nominal size. If it is not, then the weld size
used for design is the length.

Intermittent fillet welds cannot

be less than four times the weld
size, not to be less than 1 .

For fillet welds: Ra Rn / or Ru Rn

where Ru = i Ri Available Strength of Fillet Welds
per inch of weld (S)
Weld Size E60XX E70XX
for the weld metal: Rn = 0.6 FEXX Tl = Sl (in.) (k/in.) (k/in.)
3
16 3.58 4.18
= 0.75 (LRFD) = 2.00 (ASD)
4.77 5.57
5
where: 16 5.97 6.96
T is throat thickness 3
8 7.16 8.35
l is length of the weld 7
16 8.35 9.74
9.55 11.14
For a connected part, the other limit states for the 5
11.93 13.92
8
base metal, such as tension yield, tension rupture,
14.32 16.70
shear yield, or shear rupture must be considered.
(not considering increase in throat with
submerged arc weld process)

Framed Beam Connections

Coping is the term for cutting away part of the flange to connect a
beam to another beam using welded or bolted angles.

AISC provides tables that give bolt and angle available strength knowing number of bolts, bolt
type, bolt diameter, angle leg thickness, hole type and coping, and the wide flange beam being
connected. For the connections the limit-state of bolt shear, bolts bearing on the angles, shear
yielding of the angles, shear rupture of the angles, and block shear rupture of the angles, and bolt
bearing on the beam web are considered.

Group A bolts include A325, while Group B

includes A490.

There are also tables for bolted/welded

double-angle connections and all-welded
double-angle connections.

327
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Sample AISC Table for Bolt and Angle Available Strength in

All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections

Limiting Strength or Stability States

In addition to resisting shear and tension in bolts and shear in welds, the connected materials
may be subjected to shear, bearing, tension, flexure and even prying action. Coping can
significantly reduce design strengths and may require web reinforcement. All the following
must be considered:
shear yielding
shear rupture
block shear rupture -
failure of a block at a beam as a
result of shear and tension
tension yielding
tension rupture
local web buckling
lateral torsional buckling

Block Shear Strength (or Rupture): Ra Rn / or Ru Rn

where Ru = i Ri
Rn = 0.6 Fu Anv + U bs Fu Ant 0.6 Fy Agv + U bs Fu Ant
= 0.75 (LRFD) = 2.00 (ASD)

328
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

where:
Anv is the net area subjected to shear
Ant is the net area subjected to tension
Agv is the gross area subjected to shear
Ubs = 1.0 when the tensile stress is uniform (most cases)
= 0.5 when the tensile stress is non-uniform

Gusset Plates
Gusset plates are used for truss member connections where the geometry prevents the members
from coming together at the joint point. Members being joined are typically double angles.

Decking
Shaped, thin sheet-steel panels that span several joists or evenly spaced support behave as
continuous beams. Design tables consider a 1 unit wide strip across the supports and
determine maximum bending moment and deflections in order to provide allowable loads
depending on the depth of the material.
The other structural use of decking is to construct what is called a diaphragm, which is a
horizontal unit tying the decking to the joists that resists forces parallel to the surface of the
diaphragm.
When decking supports a concrete topping or floor, the steel-concrete construction is called
composite.

Frame Columns
Because joints can rotate in frames, the effective length of the column in a frame is harder to
determine. The stiffness (EI/L) of each member in a joint determines how rigid or flexible it is.
To find k, the relative stiffness, G or , must be found for both ends, plotted on the alignment
charts, and connected by a line for braced and unbraced fames.

EI l
c
G = =
EI
l
b
where
E = modulus of elasticity for a member
I = moment of inertia of for a member
lc = length of the column from center to center
lb = length of the beam from center to center

For pinned connections we typically use a value of 10 for .

For fixed connections we typically use a value of 1 for .

329
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Braced non-sway frame Unbraced sway frame

330
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

*Hypothetically determine the size of section

Example 1 (pg 330) required when the deflection criteria is NOT met

(unified ASD)
Fy = 50 ksi

1,000+50=1,050 lb/ft = 1.05 k/ft

331
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 2

Use ASD of the Unified Design method.

1. The unbraced length is 0 because it says it is fully braced.

2. Find the maximum shear and moment from unfactored loads: wa = 0.450 k/ft + 0.750 k/ft = 1.20 k/ft
Va = 1.20 k/ft(35 ft)/2 = 21 k
Ma = 1.20 k/ft(35 ft)2/8 = 184 k-ft
If Ma Mn/, the maxmimum moment for design is Ma: Mmax = 184 k-ft
3. Find Zreqd:
Zreqd Mmax/Fb = Mmax()/Fy = 184 k-ft(1.67)(12 in/ft)/50 ksi = 73.75 in3 (Fy is the limit stress when fully braced)
4. Choose a trial section, and also limit the depth to 18 in as instructed:
W18 x 40 has a plastic section modulus of 78.4 in3 and is the most light weight (as indicated by the bold text) in Table 9.1
Include the self weight in the maximum values: w*a-adjusted = 1.20 k/ft + 0.04 k/ft
V*a-adjusted = 1.24 k/ft(35 ft)/2 = 21.7 k
M*a-adjusted = 1.24 k/ft(35 ft)3/8 = 189.9 k
Zreqd 189.9 k-ft(1.67)(12 in/ft)/50 ksi = 76.11 in3 And the Z we have (78.4) is larger than the Z we need (76.11), so OK.
6. Evaluate shear (is Va Vn/): Aw = dtw so look up section properties for W18 x 40: d = 17.90 in and tw = 0.315 in
Vn/ = 0.6FywAw/ = 0.6(50 ksi)(17.90 in)(0.315 in)/1.5 = 112.8 k which is much larger than 21.7 k, so OK.
9. Evaluate the deflection with respect to the limit stated of L/360 for the live load. (If we knew the total load limit we would
check that as well). The moment of inertia for the W18 x 40 is needed. Ix = 612 in4
live load limit = 35 ft(12 in/ft)/360 = 1.17 in
= 5wL4/384EI = 5(0.75 k/ft)(35 ft)4(12 in/ft)3/384(29 x 103 ksi)(612 in4) = 1.42 in! This is TOO BIG (not less than the limit.
Find the moment of inertia needed:
Ireqd too big (Itrial)/limit = 1.42 in(612 in4)/(1.17 in) = 742.8 in4
From the Listing of W Shapes in Descending order of Zx for Beam Design, a W21 x 44 is larger (by Ix = 843 in4), and the most light
weight, but it is too deep!. In the next group up, the W16 x 57 works (Ix = 758 in4, but we arent certain there is a more economical
section. Then W18x50, W12x72, and W18x55, so we stop because the W18x50 has the smallest weight with the depth restriction.
(In order: Ix = 800, 597, and 890 in4)
Choose a W18 x 50

332
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 3
For the same beam and loading of Example 1, select the most economical
beam using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) with the 18 depth
restriction. Assume the distributed load is dead load, and the point load is
live load. Fy = 50 ksi and E = 30x103 ksi

(1.6)20k = 32k
(1.2)1k/ft = 1.2k/ft
1. To find Vu-max and Mu-max, factor the loads, construct a new load diagram,
shear diagram and bending moment diagram.
32.8k 32.8k

+32.8k 2. To satisfy Mu bMn, we find and

+16k

-16 k solve for Z needed:

-32.8k
341.6 k-ft Choose a trial section from the Listing of W Shapes in Descending Order
of Z by selecting the bold section at the top of the grouping satisfying
our Z and depth requirement W18 x 50 is the lightest with Z = 101 in3.
(W22 x 44 is the lightest without the depth requirement.) Include the
additional self weight (dead load) and find the maximum shear and
bending moment:

, so Z (have) of 101 in3 is greater than the Z (needed).

3. Check the shear capacity to satisfy Vu vVn: Aweb = dtw and d=17.99 in., tw = 0.355 in. for the W18x50
So 33.64k 191.6 k OK
4. Calculate the deflection from the unfactored loads, including the self-weight now because it is known,
and satisfy the deflection criteria of LLLL-limit and totaltotal-limit. (This is identical to what is done in
Example 1.) Ix =800 in3 for the W18x50
total-limit = L/240 = 1.4 in., say LL = L/360 = 0.93 in

So 1.26 in. 1.4 in., and 0.658 in. 0.93 in. OK FINAL SELECTION IS W18x50

333
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 4
A steel beam with a 20 ft span is designed to be simply supported at the ends on columns and to carry a floor system
made with open-web steel joists at 4 ft on center. The joists span 28 feet and frame into the beam from one side
only and have a self weight of 8.5 lb/ft. Use A992 (grade 50) steel and select the most economical wide-flange
section for the beam with LRFD design. Floor loads are 50 psf LL and 14.5 psf DL.

334 334
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 5
Select a A992 W shape flexural member (Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) for a beam with distributed loads of 825 lb/ft
(dead) and 1300 lb/ft (live) and a live point load at midspan of 3 k using the Available Moment tables. The beam is
simply supported, 20 feet long, and braced at the ends and midpoint only (Lb = 10 ft.) The beam is a roof beam for
an institution without plaster ceilings. (LRFD)
1.6(3k) =4.8k
SOLUTION: 10 10

To use the Available Moment tables, the maximum moment required is plotted against
the unbraced length. The first solid line with capacity or unbraced length above what is
needed is the most economical.
w = 1.2(825 lb/ft)+1.6(1300 lb/ft) =3.07k/ft
DESIGN LOADS (load factors applied on figure):

Plotting 662 k-ft vs. 10 ft lands just on the capacity of the W21x83, but it is dashed (and not the most economical) AND we need to
consider the contribution of self weight to the total moment. Choose a trial section of W24 x 76. Include the new dead load:

Replot 680.2 k-ft vs. 10ft, which lands above the capacity of the W21x83. We cant look up because the chart ends, but we can
look for that capacity with a longer unbraced length. This leads us to a W24 x 84 as the most economical. (With the additional self
weight of 84 - 76 lb/ft = 8 lb/ft, the increase in the factored moment is only 1.92 k-ft; therefore, it is still OK.)

Evaluate the shear capacity:

so yes, 68 k 338.4k OK

Evaluate the deflection with respect to the limits of L/240 for live (unfactored) load and L/180 for total (unfactored) load:
L/240 = 1 in. and L/180 = 1.33 in.

10 10

w = 825 lb/ft + 1300 lb/ft + 84 lb/ft =2.209k/ft

+

+ So, LLLL-limit and totaltotal-limit:

0.06 in. 1 in. and 0.42 in. 1.33 in.

(This section is so big to accommodate the large

bending moment at the cantilever support that it
deflects very little.)

FINAL SELECTION IS W24x84

335
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 6
Select the most economical joist for the 40 ft
grid structure with floors and a flat roof. The
roof loads are 10 lb/ft2 dead load and 20 lb/ft2
live load. The floor loads are 30 lb/ft2 dead
load 100 lb/ft2 live load. (Live load deflection
limit for the roof is L/240, while the floor is
L/360). Use the (LRFD) K and LH series
charts provided.

(Top values are maximum total factored load in lb/ft, while the lower (lighter) values
are maximum (unfactored) live load for a deflection of L/360)

Shaded areas indicate the bridging requirements.

336
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 6 (continued)

(Top values are maximum total factored load in lb/ft, while the lower (lighter) values
are maximum (unfactored) live load for a deflection of L/360)

Shaded areas indicate the bridging requirements.

337
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 7 (LRFD)

Total dead load

Total live load 13.9 psf X 4 ft o.c. = 55.6 plf
Total factored live snow load + dead load = 1.2(55.6) + 1.6 (57.2) = 158.2 plf

223 plf TFL and 77 plf LL

6.4 plf

6.5 plf 7.3 plf

338
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 8
A floor with multiple bays is to be supported by open-web steel joists spaced at 3 ft. on center and spanning 30 ft.
having a dead load of 70 lb/ft2 and a live load of 100 lb/ft2. The joists are supported on joist girders spanning 30 ft.
with 3 ft.-long panel points (shown). Determine the member forces at the location shown in a horizontal chord and
the maximum force in a web member for an interior girder. Use factored loads. Assume a self weight for the open-
web joists of 12 lb/ft, and the self weight for the joist girder of 35 lb/ft.

339
 ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 9
A floor is to be supported by trusses spaced at 5 ft. on center and spanning 60 ft. having a dead load of 53 lb/ft2 and
a live load of 100 lb/ft2. With 3 ft.-long panel points, the depth is assumed to be 3 ft with a span-to-depth ratio of
20. With 6 ft.-long panel points, the depth is assumed to be 6 ft with a span-to-depth ratio of 10. Determine the
maximum force in a horizontal chord and the maximum force in a web member. Use factored loads. Assume a self
weight of 40 lb/ft.

tributary widths

area loads
Pdead Plive
wdead wlive
(=wdead A) (=wlive A)
(K) (K)

+ 0.14 = 3.49

+ 0.29 = 7.00

self weight 0.04 k/ft (distributed) 3 1.2Pdead = 1.2wdead tributary width = 0.14 K
6 1.2Pdead = 1.2wdead tributary width = 0.29 K
NOTE end panels only have half the tributary width of interior panels

A FBD 3: Maximum web force will be in the end

diagonal (just like maximum shear in a beam)
B Fy = 10P1 0.5P1 FABsin45 = 0
FAB = 9.5P1/sin45 = 9.5(3.49 k)/0.707 = 46.9 k
FBD 1 for 3 ft deep truss
FBD 2: Maximum chord force (top or bottom) will be at midspan

G MG = -9.5P1(27ft) + P1(24ft) + P1(21ft) + P1(18ft) + P1(15ft)

+ P1(12ft) + P1(9ft) + P1(6ft) + P1(3ft) + T1(3ft) = 0
FAB
T1 = P1(148.5ft)/3ft = (3.49 k)(49.5) = 172.8 k

Fy = 10P1 9.5P1 D1sin45 = 0

FBD 2 of cut just to the left of midspan FBD 3 of cut just to right D1 = 0.5(3.49 k)/0.707 = 2.5 k (minimum near midspan)
of left support
Fx =-C1 + T1 + D1cos45 = 0 C1 = 174.5 k

FBD 6: Maximum web force will be in the end

A diagonal

Fy = 5P2 0.5P2 FABsin45 = 0

B
FAB = 4.5P2/sin45 = 4.5(7 k)/0.707 = 44.5 k

FBD 4 for 6 ft deep truss

FBD 5: Maximum chord (top or bottom) force will be at midspan
G MG = -4.5P2(24ft) + P2(18ft) + P2(12ft) + P2(6ft) + T2(6ft) = 0
T2 = P2(72ft)/6ft = (7 k)(12) = 84 k
FAB
Fy = 5P2 4.5P1 Dssin45 = 0
D2 = 0.5(7 k)/0.707 = 4.9 k (minimum near midspan)
FBD 5 of cut just to the left of midspan FBD 6 of cut just to right Fx =-C2 + T2 + D2cos45 = 0 C2 = 87.5 k
of left support

340
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 10 (pg 367) + LRFD

using ASD and LRFD.

Example 11 (pg 371) + chart method

Use LRFD assuming that the load is a dead load

(factor of 1.4)
ALSO: Select the W12 column using the Available Strength charts.

341
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 12

Use both ASD and LRFD. Fy = 50 ksi.

(Not using Available Strength charts)

Solution:

ASD:
1. Pa = 140 k + 420 k = 560 k
2. The effective length in the weak (y-y) axis is 15 ft, while the effective length in the strong (x-x) axis is 30 ft. (K = 1, KL = 130 ft).
To find kL/rx and kL/ry we can assume or choose values from the wide flange charts. rys range from 1 to 3 in., while rxs range from
3 to 14 inches. Lets try ry = 2 in and rx = 9 in. (something in the W21 range, say.)
kL/ry 15 ft(12 in/ft)/2 in. = 90 GOVERNS (is larger)
kL/rx 30 ft(12 in/ft)/9 in. = 40
3. Find a section with sufficient area (which then will give us real values for rx and ry):
If Pa Pn/, and Pn = Fcr A, we can find A Pa/Fcr with = 1.67
The tables provided have Fcr, so we can get Fcr by dividing by = 0.9
Fcr for 90 is 24.9 ksi, Fcr = 24.9 ksi/0.9 = 27.67 ksi so A 560 k(1.67)/27.67 ksi = 33.8 in2
4. Choose a trial section, and find the effective lengths and associated available strength, Fcr :
Looking from the smallest sections, the W14s are the first with a big enough area:
Try a W14 x 120 (A = 35.3 in2) with ry = 3.74 in and rx = 6.24 in.: kL/ry = 48.1 and kL/rx = 57.7 (GOVERNS)
Fcr for 58 is 35.2 ksi, Fcr = 39.1 ksi so A 560 k(1.67)/39.1 ksi = 23.9 in2
Choose a W14 x 90 (Choosing a W14 x 82 would make kL/rx = 59.5, and Areqd = 24.3 in2, which is more than 24.1 in2!)

LRFD:
1. Pu = 1.2(140 k) + 1.6(420 k) = 840 k
2. The effective length in the weak (y-y) axis is 15 ft, while the effective length in the strong (x-x) axis is 30 ft. (K = 1, KL = 130 ft).
To find kL/rx and kL/ry we can assume or choose values from the wide flange charts. rys range from 1 to 3 in., while rxs range from
3 to 14 inches. Lets try ry = 2 in and rx = 9 in. (something in the W21 range, say.)
kL/ry 15 ft(12 in/ft)/2 in. = 90 GOVERNS (is larger)
kL/rx 30 ft(12 in/ft)/9 in. = 40
3. Find a section with sufficient area (which then will give us real values for rx and ry):
If Pu Pn, and Pn = Fcr A, we can find A Pu/Fcr with = 0.9
Fcr for 90 is 24.9 ksi, so A 840 k/24.9 ksi = 33.7 in2
4. Choose a trial section, and find the effective lengths and associated available strength, Fcr :
Looking from the smallest sections, the W14s are the first with a big enough area:
Try a W14 x 120 (A = 35.3 in2) with ry = 3.74 in and rx = 6.24 in.: kL/ry = 48.1 and kL/rx = 57.7 (GOVERNS)
Fcr for 58 is 35.2 ksi, so A 840 k/35.2 ksi = 23.9 in2
Choose a W14 x 90 (Choosing a W14 x 82 would make kL/rx = 59.5, and Areqd = 24.3 in2, which is more than 24.1 in2!)

342
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 13

343
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 14
Investigate the accepatbility of a W16 x 67 used as a beam-column under the unfactored
loading shown in the figure. It is A992 steel (Fy = 50 ksi). Assume 25% of the load is dead
load with 75% live load.

SOLUTION:
DESIGN LOADS (shown on figure):
Axial load = 1.2(0.25)(350k)+1.6(0.75)(350k)=525k
Moment at joint = 1.2(0.25)(60 k-ft) + 1.6(0.75)(60 k-ft) = 90 k-ft
Determine column capacity and fraction to choose the appropriate interaction equation:

and (governs) 525 k 525 k

90 k-ft
90 k-ft

so use

There is no bending about the y axis, so that term will not have any values.
Determine the bending moment capacity in the x direction:
The unbraced length to use the full plastic moment (Lp) is listed as 8.69 ft, and we are
over that so of we dont want to determine it from formula, we can find the beam in the
Available Moment vs. Unbraced Length tables. The value of Mn at Lb =15 ft is 422 k-ft. 525 k 525 k

Determine the magnification factor when M1 = 0, M2 = 90 k-ft:

USE 1.0 Mu = (1)90 k-ft

This is NOT OK. (and outside error tolerance).
The section should be larger.
Finally, determine the interaction value:

344
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 15

, assuming A36 steel with E60XX electrodes.

Example 16

S = 6.96 k/in
8 in + 6 in + 8 in = 22 in.
6.96 k/in = 153.1 k

72.9 k
Pn = FyAg = 0.9
72.9 k 3.31 k/in.
0.9 x 36 k/in2 x 3/8 x 6= 72.9 k
From Available Strength table, use 3/16 weld
Pn = 72.9 k
(S = 4.18 k/in.)

345
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 17

7-1,

required? Also determine the bearing

capacity of the wide flange sections.
tf = 0.575 in.
Factored end beam reaction = 90 k.

Fu = 65 ksi

Example 18
Verify the tensile strength of an L4 x 4 x , ASTM
36, with one line of (4) in.-diameter bolts and
standard holes. The member carries a dead load of
20 kips and a live load of 60 kips in tension.
Assume that connection limit states do not govern,
and U = 0.869.

346
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 19

The steel used in the connection and beams is A992 with Fy = 50 ksi,
and Fu = 65 ksi. Using A490-N bolt material, determine the
maximum capacity of the connection based on shear in the bolts,
bearing in all materials and pick the number of bolts and angle length
(not staggered). Use A36 steel for the angles.

W21x93: d = 21.62 in, tw = 0.58 in, tf = 0.93 in

W10x54: tf = 0.615 in

SOLUTION:

The maximum length the angles can be depends on how it fits between the top and bottom flange with some clearance allowed
for the fillet to the flange, and getting an air wrench in to tighten the bolts. This example uses 1 of clearance:
Available length = beam depth both flange thicknesses 1 clearance at top & 1 at bottom
= 21.62 in 2(0.93 in) 2(1 in) = 17.76 in.
With the spaced at 3 in. and 1 in. end lengths (each end), the maximum number of bolts can be determined:
Available length 1.25 in. + 1.25 in. + 3 in. x (number of bolts 1)
number of bolts (17.76 in 2.5 in. - (-3 in.))/3 in. = 6.1, so 6 bolts.
It is helpful to have the All-bolted Double-Angle
Connection Tables 10-1. They are available for , 7/8,
and 1 bolt diameters and list angle thicknesses of ,
5/16, 3/8, and . Increasing the angle thickness is
likely to increase the angle strength, although the limit
states include shear yielding of the angles, shear rupture
of the angles, and block shear rupture of the angles.

For these diameters, the available shear (double) from

Table 7-1 for 6 bolts is (6)45.1 k/bolt = 270.6 kips,
(6)61.3 k/bolt = 367.8 kips, and (6)80.1 k/bolt =
480.6 kips.

Tables 10-1 (not all provided here) list a bolt and angle
available strength of 271 kips for the bolts, 296 kips
for the 7/8 bolts, and 281 kips for the 1 bolts. It
appears that increasing the bolt diameter to 1 will not
gain additional load. Use 7/8 bolts.
Rn = 367.8 kips for double shear of 7/8 bolts Rn = 296 kips for limit state in angles
We also need to evaluate bearing of bolts on the beam web, and column flange where there are bolt holes. Table 7-4 provides
available bearing strength for the material type, bolt diameter, hole type, and spacing per inch of material thicknesses.

a) Bearing for beam web: There are 6 bolt holes through the beam web. This is typically the critical bearing limit value
because there are two angle legs that resist bolt bearing and twice as many bolt holes to the column. The material is
A992 (Fu = 65 ksi), 0.58 thick, with 7/8 bolt diameters at 3 in. spacing.
Rn = 6 bolts(102 k/bolt/inch)(0.58 in) = 355.0 kips

b) Bearing for column flange: There are 12 bolt holes through the column. The material is A992 (Fu = 65 ksi), 0.615 thick, with
1 bolt diameters.
Rn = 12 bolts(102 k/bolt/inch)(0.615 in) = 752.8 kips

Although, the bearing in the beam web is the smallest at 355 kips, with the shear on the bolts even smaller at 324.6 kips,
the maximum capacity for the simple-shear connector is 296 kips limited by the critical capacity of the angles.

347
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Example 20

SOLUTION:

348
 ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Listing of W Shapes in Descending order of Zx for Beam Design

Zx US Ix US Ix SI Zx SI Zx US Ix US Ix SI Zx SI
(in.3) (in.4) Section (106mm.4) (103mm.3) (in.3) (in.4) Section (106mm.4) (103mm.3)
514 7450 W33X141 3100 8420 289 3100 W24X104 1290 4740
511 5680 W24X176 2360 8370 287 1900 W14X159 791 4700
509 7800 W36X135 3250 8340 283 3610 W30X90 1500 4640
500 6680 W30X148 2780 8190 280 3000 W24X103 1250 4590
490 4330 W18X211 1800 8030 279 2670 W21X111 1110 4570
487 3400 W14X257 1420 7980 278 3270 W27X94 1360 4560
481 3110 W12X279 1290 7880 275 1650 W12X170 687 4510
476 4730 W21X182 1970 7800 262 2190 W18X119 912 4290
468 5170 W24X162 2150 7670 260 1710 W14X145 712 4260
467 6710 W33X130 2790 7650 254 2700 W24X94 1120 4160
464 5660 W27X146 2360 7600 253 2420 W21X101 1010 4150
442 3870 W18X192 1610 7240 244 2850 W27X84 1190 4000
437 5770 W30X132 2400 7160 243 1430 W12X152 595 3980
436 3010 W14X233 1250 7140 234 1530 W14X132 637 3830
432 4280 W21X166 1780 7080 230 1910 W18X106 795 3770
428 2720 W12X252 1130 7010 224 2370 W24X84 986 3670
418 4580 W24X146 1910 6850 221 2070 W21X93 862 3620
415 5900 W33X118 2460 6800 214 1240 W12X136 516 3510
408 5360 W30X124 2230 6690 212 1380 W14X120 574 3470
398 3450 W18X175 1440 6520 211 1750 W18X97 728 3460
395 4760 W27X129 1980 6470 200 2100 W24X76 874 3280
390 2660 W14X211 1110 6390 198 1490 W16X100 620 3240
386 2420 W12X230 1010 6330 196 1830 W21X83 762 3210
378 4930 W30X116 2050 6190 192 1240 W14X109 516 3150
373 3630 W21X147 1510 6110 186 1530 W18X86 637 3050
370 4020 W24X131 1670 6060 186 1070 W12X120 445 3050
356 3060 W18X158 1270 5830 177 1830 W24X68 762 2900
355 2400 W14X193 999 5820 175 1300 W16X89 541 2870
348 2140 W12X210 891 5700 173 1110 W14X99 462 2830
346 4470 W30X108 1860 5670 172 1600 W21X73 666 2820
343 4080 W27X114 1700 5620 164 933 W12X106 388 2690
333 3220 W21X132 1340 5460 163 1330 W18X76 554 2670
327 3540 W24X117 1470 5360 160 1480 W21X68 616 2620
322 2750 W18X143 1140 5280 157 999 W14X90 416 2570
320 2140 W14X176 891 5240 153 1550 W24X62 645 2510
312 3990 W30X99 1660 5110 150 1110 W16X77 462 2460
311 1890 W12X190 787 5100 147 833 W12X96 347 2410
307 2960 W21X122 1230 5030 147 716 W10X112 298 2410
305 3620 W27X102 1510 5000 146 1170 W18X71 487 2390
290 2460 W18X130 1020 4750 (continued)

349
 ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Listing of W Shapes in Descending order of Zx for Beam Design (Continued)

144 1330 W21X62 554 2360 66.5 510 W18X35 212 1090
139 881 W14X82 367 2280 64.2 348 W12X45 145 1050
134 1350 W24X55 562 2200 64.0 448 W16X36 186 1050
133 1070 W18X65 445 2180 61.5 385 W14X38 160 1010
132 740 W12X87 308 2160 60.4 272 W10X49 113 990
130 954 W16X67 397 2130 59.8 228 W8X58 94.9 980
130 623 W10X100 259 2130 57.0 307 W12X40 128 934
129 1170 W21X57 487 2110 54.9 248 W10X45 103 900
126 1140 W21X55 475 2060 54.6 340 W14X34 142 895
126 795 W14X74 331 2060 54.0 375 W16X31 156 885
123 984 W18X60 410 2020 51.2 285 W12X35 119 839
119 662 W12X79 276 1950 49.0 184 W8X48 76.6 803
115 722 W14X68 301 1880 47.3 291 W14X30 121 775
113 534 W10X88 222 1850 46.8 209 W10X39 87.0 767
112 890 W18X55 370 1840 44.2 301 W16X26 125 724
110 984 W21X50 410 1800 43.1 238 W12X30 99.1 706
108 597 W12X72 248 1770 40.2 245 W14X26 102 659
107 959 W21X48 399 1750 39.8 146 W8X40 60.8 652
105 758 W16X57 316 1720 38.8 171 W10X33 71.2 636
102 640 W14X61 266 1670 37.2 204 W12X26 84.9 610
101 800 W18X50 333 1660 36.6 170 W10X30 70.8 600
97.6 455 W10X77 189 1600 34.7 127 W8X35 52.9 569
96.8 533 W12X65 222 1590 33.2 199 W14X22 82.8 544
95.4 843 W21X44 351 1560 31.3 144 W10X26 59.9 513
92.0 659 W16X50 274 1510 30.4 110 W8X31 45.8 498
90.7 712 W18X46 296 1490 29.3 156 W12X22 64.9 480
87.1 541 W14X53 225 1430 27.2 98.0 W8X28 40.8 446
86.4 475 W12X58 198 1420 26.0 118 W10X22 49.1 426
85.3 394 W10X68 164 1400 24.7 130 W12X19 54.1 405
82.3 586 W16X45 244 1350 23.1 82.7 W8X24 34.4 379
78.4 612 W18X40 255 1280 21.6 96.3 W10X19 40.1 354
78.4 484 W14X48 201 1280 20.4 75.3 W8X21 31.3 334
77.9 425 W12X53 177 1280 20.1 103 W12x16 42.9 329
74.6 341 W10X60 142 1220 18.7 81.9 W10X17 34.1 306
73.0 518 W16X40 216 1200 17.4 88.6 W12X14 36.9 285
71.9 391 W12X50 163 1180 17.0 61.9 W8X18 25.8 279
70.1 272 W8X67 113 1150 16.0 68.9 W10X15 28.7 262
69.6 428 W14X43 178 1140 13.6 48.0 W8X15 20.0 223
66.6 303 W10X54 126 1090 12.6 53.8 W10X12 22.4 206
11.4 39.6 W8X13 16.5 187

8.87 30.8 W8X10 12.8 145

350
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Available Critical Stress, cFcr, for Compression Members, ksi (Fy = 36 ksi and c = 0.90)

KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr
1 32.4 41 29.7 81 22.9 121 15.0 161 8.72
2 32.4 42 29.5 82 22.7 122 14.8 162 8.61
3 32.4 43 29.4 83 22.5 123 14.6 163 8.50
4 32.4 44 29.3 84 22.3 124 14.4 164 8.40
5 32.4 45 29.1 85 22.1 125 14.2 165 8.30
6 32.3 46 29.0 86 22.0 126 14.0 166 8.20
7 32.3 47 28.8 87 21.8 127 13.9 167 8.10
8 32.3 48 28.7 88 21.6 128 13.7 168 8.00
9 32.3 49 28.6 89 21.4 129 13.5 169 7.91
10 32.2 50 28.4 90 21.2 130 13.3 170 7.82
11 32.2 51 28.3 91 21.0 131 13.1 171 7.73
12 32.2 52 28.1 92 20.8 132 12.9 172 7.64
13 32.1 53 27.9 93 20.5 133 12.8 173 7.55
14 32.1 54 27.8 94 20.3 134 12.6 174 7.46
15 32.0 55 27.6 95 20.1 135 12.4 175 7.38
16 32.0 56 27.5 96 19.9 136 12.2 176 7.29
17 31.9 57 27.3 97 19.7 137 12.0 177 7.21
18 31.9 58 27.1 98 19.5 138 11.9 178 7.13
19 31.8 59 27.0 99 19.3 139 11.7 179 7.05
20 31.7 60 26.8 100 19.1 140 11.5 180 6.97
21 31.7 61 26.6 101 18.9 141 11.4 181 6.90
22 31.6 62 26.5 102 18.7 142 11.2 182 6.82
23 31.5 63 26.3 103 18.5 143 11.0 183 6.75
24 31.4 64 26.1 104 18.3 144 10.9 184 6.67
25 31.4 65 25.9 105 18.1 145 10.7 185 6.60
26 31.3 66 25.8 106 17.9 146 10.6 186 6.53
27 31.2 67 25.6 107 17.7 147 10.5 187 6.46
28 31.1 68 25.4 108 17.5 148 10.3 188 6.39
29 31.0 69 25.2 109 17.3 149 10.2 189 6.32
30 30.9 70 25.0 110 17.1 150 10.0 190 6.26
31 30.8 71 24.8 111 16.9 151 9.91 191 6.19
32 30.7 72 24.7 112 16.7 152 9.78 192 6.13
33 30.6 73 24.5 113 16.5 153 9.65 193 6.06
34 30.5 74 24.3 114 16.3 154 9.53 194 6.00
35 30.4 75 24.1 115 16.2 155 9.40 195 5.94
36 30.3 76 23.9 116 16.0 156 9.28 196 5.88
37 30.1 77 23.7 117 15.8 157 9.17 197 5.82
38 30.0 78 23.5 118 15.6 158 9.05 198 5.76
39 29.9 79 23.3 119 15.4 159 8.94 199 5.70
40 29.8 80 23.1 120 15.2 160 8.82 200 5.65

351
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Available Critical Stress, cFcr, for Compression Members, ksi (Fy = 50 ksi and c = 0.90)

KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr KL/r c Fcr
1 45.0 41 39.8 81 27.9 121 15.4 161 8.72
2 45.0 42 39.6 82 27.5 122 15.2 162 8.61
3 45.0 43 39.3 83 27.2 123 14.9 163 8.50
4 44.9 44 39.1 84 26.9 124 14.7 164 8.40
5 44.9 45 38.8 85 26.5 125 14.5 165 8.30
6 44.9 46 38.5 86 26.2 126 14.2 166 8.20
7 44.8 47 38.3 87 25.9 127 14.0 167 8.10
8 44.8 48 38.0 88 25.5 128 13.8 168 8.00
9 44.7 49 37.8 89 25.2 129 13.6 169 7.91
10 44.7 50 37.5 90 24.9 130 13.4 170 7.82
11 44.6 51 37.2 91 24.6 131 13.2 171 7.73
12 44.5 52 36.9 92 24.2 132 13.0 172 7.64
13 44.4 53 36.6 93 23.9 133 12.8 173 7.55
14 44.4 54 36.4 94 23.6 134 12.6 174 7.46
15 44.3 55 36.1 95 23.3 135 12.4 175 7.38
16 44.2 56 35.8 96 22.9 136 12.2 176 7.29
17 44.1 57 35.5 97 22.6 137 12.0 177 7.21
18 43.9 58 35.2 98 22.3 138 11.9 178 7.13
19 43.8 59 34.9 99 22.0 139 11.7 179 7.05
20 43.7 60 34.6 100 21.7 140 11.5 180 6.97
21 43.6 61 34.3 101 21.3 141 11.4 181 6.90
22 43.4 62 34.0 102 21.0 142 11.2 182 6.82
23 43.3 63 33.7 103 20.7 143 11.0 183 6.75
24 43.1 64 33.4 104 20.4 144 10.9 184 6.67
25 43.0 65 33.0 105 20.1 145 10.7 185 6.60
26 42.8 66 32.7 106 19.8 146 10.6 186 6.53
27 42.7 67 32.4 107 19.5 147 10.5 187 6.46
28 42.5 68 32.1 108 19.2 148 10.3 188 6.39
29 42.3 69 31.8 109 18.9 149 10.2 189 6.32
30 42.1 70 31.4 110 18.6 150 10.0 190 6.26
31 41.9 71 31.1 111 18.3 151 9.91 191 6.19
32 41.8 72 30.8 112 18.0 152 9.78 192 6.13
33 41.6 73 30.5 113 17.7 153 9.65 193 6.06
34 41.4 74 30.2 114 17.4 154 9.53 194 6.00
35 41.1 75 29.8 115 17.1 155 9.40 195 5.94
36 40.9 76 29.5 116 16.8 156 9.28 196 5.88
37 40.7 77 29.2 117 16.5 157 9.17 197 5.82
38 40.5 78 28.8 118 16.2 158 9.05 198 5.76
39 40.3 79 28.5 119 16.0 159 8.94 199 5.70
40 40.0 80 28.2 120 15.7 160 8.82 200 5.65

352
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Bolt Strength Tables

353
 ARCH 331

A325, A325M A490, A490M

F1858 F2280
A354 Grade BC A354 Grade BD
A449

354
Note Set 18
Su2015abn
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

355
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

356
ARCH 331 Note Set 18 Su2015abn

Beam Design Flow Chart

Collect data: L, , , limits; find beam charts

for load cases and actual equations

ASD
(Unified) Allowable Stress or LRFD
LRFD Design?

Collect data: Fy, Fu, and Collect data: load factors, Fy,
safety factors Fu, and equations for shear
capacity with V
Find Vmax & Mmax from
constructing diagrams or
using beam chart formulas Find Vu & Mu from
constructing diagrams or
using beam chart formulas
with the factored loads
Find Zreqd and pick a section
from a table with Zx greater or
equal to Zreqd
Pick a steel section from a chart having
bMn Mu for the known unbraced length
Determine self wt (last number in OR
name) or calculate self wt. using A find Zreqd and pick a section from a table
found. Find Mmax-adj & Vmax-adj. with Zx greater or equal to Zreqd

Determine self wt (last number in

No name) or calculate self wt. using A
Calculate Zreqd-adj using Mmax-adj.
Is Zx(picked) Zreqd-adj? found. Factor with D.
Find Mu-max-adj & Vu-max-adj.

Yes
No
Is Mu bMn
No
Is Vmax-adj (0.6FywAw)/.?
pick a new section with a
larger web area
Is Vu v(0.6FywAw)
Yes No
pick a section
Yes with a larger
Calculate max (no load factors!)
using superpositioning and beam web area
chart equations with the Ix for the
section

too big
I req' d I trial
is max limits? lim it
This may be both the limit for live load No
deflection and total load deflection.) pick a section with a larger Ix

Yes (DONE)

357
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Reinforced Concrete Design

Notation:
a = depth of the effective compression f = symbol for stress
block in a concrete beam fc = compressive stress
A = name for area fc = concrete design compressive stress
Ag = gross area, equal to the total area fpu = tensile strength of the prestressing
ignoring any reinforcement reinforcement
As = area of steel reinforcement in fs = stress in the steel reinforcement for
concrete beam design concrete design
As = area of steel compression fs = compressive stress in the
reinforcement in concrete beam compression reinforcement for
design concrete beam design
Ast = area of steel reinforcement in fy = yield stress or strength
concrete column design fyt = yield stress or strength of transverse
Av = area of concrete shear stirrup reinforcement
reinforcement F = shorthand for fluid load
ACI = American Concrete Institute Fy = yield strength
b = width, often cross-sectional G = relative stiffness of columns to
bE = effective width of the flange of a beams in a rigid connection, as is
concrete T beam cross section h = cross-section depth
bf = width of the flange H = shorthand for lateral pressure load
bw = width of the stem (web) of a hf = depth of a flange in a T section
concrete T beam cross section Itransformed = moment of inertia of a multi-
c = distance from the top to the neutral material section transformed to one
axis of a concrete beam (see x) material
cc = shorthand for clear cover k = effective length factor for columns
C = name for centroid
b = length of beam in rigid joint
= name for a compression force
Cc = compressive force in the
c = length of column in rigid joint
compression steel in a doubly ld = development length for reinforcing
reinforced concrete beam steel
Cs = compressive force in the concrete of l dh = development length for hooks
a doubly reinforced concrete beam ln = clear span from face of support to
d = effective depth from the top of a face of support in concrete design
reinforced concrete beam to the L = name for length or span length, as is
centroid of the tensile steel l
d = effective depth from the top of a = shorthand for live load
reinforced concrete beam to the Lr = shorthand for live roof load
centroid of the compression steel LL = shorthand for live load
db = bar diameter of a reinforcing bar Mn = nominal flexure strength with the
D = shorthand for dead load steel reinforcement at the yield
DL = shorthand for dead load stress and concrete at the concrete
E = modulus of elasticity or Youngs design strength for reinforced
modulus concrete beam design
= shorthand for earthquake load Mu = maximum moment from factored
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete loads for LRFD beam design
Es = modulus of elasticity of steel
359
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

n = modulus of elasticity transformation wLL = load per unit length on a beam from
coefficient for steel to concrete live load
n.a. = shorthand for neutral axis (N.A.) wself wt = name for distributed load from self
pH = chemical alkalinity weight of member
P = name for load or axial force vector wu = load per unit length on a beam from
Po = maximum axial force with no load factors
concurrent bending moment in a W = shorthand for wind load
reinforced concrete column x = horizontal distance
Pn = nominal column load capacity in = distance from the top to the neutral
concrete design axis of a concrete beam (see c)
Pu = factored column load calculated y = vertical distance
from load factors in concrete design 1 = coefficient for determining stress
R = shorthand for rain or ice load block height, a, based on concrete
= radius of curvature in beam strength, fc
deflection relationships (see ) = elastic beam deflection
Rn = concrete beam design ratio = = strain
Mu/bd2 t = strain in the steel
s = spacing of stirrups in reinforced y = strain at the yield stress
concrete beams = modification factor for lightweight
S = shorthand for snow load concrete
t = name for thickness = resistance factor
T = name for a tension force
= shorthand for thermal load c = resistance factor for compression
U = factored design value = density or unit weight
Vc = shear force capacity in concrete = radius of curvature in beam
Vs = shear force capacity in steel shear deflection relationships (see R)
stirrups = reinforcement ratio in concrete
Vu = shear at a distance of d away from beam design = As/bd
the face of support for reinforced balanced = balanced reinforcement ratio in
concrete beam design concrete beam design
wc = unit weight of concrete c = shear strength in concrete design
wDL = load per unit length on a beam from
dead load

Reinforced Concrete Design

Structural design standards for reinforced concrete are established by the Building Code and
Commentary (ACI 318-14) published by the American Concrete Institute International, and uses
strength design (also known as limit state design).

fc = concrete compressive design strength at 28 days (units of psi when used in equations)

360
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Materials

Concrete is a mixture of cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, and water. The cement
hydrates with the water to form a binder. The result is a hardened mass with filler and pores.
There are various types of cement for low heat, rapid set, and other properties. Other minerals or
cementitious materials (like fly ash) may be added.

ASTM designations are

Type I: Ordinary portland cement (OPC)
Type II: Moderate heat of hydration and sulfate
resistance
Type III: High early strength (rapid hardening)
Type IV: Low heat of hydration
Type V: Sulfate resistant

The proper proportions, by volume, of the mix constituents

determine strength, which is related to the water to cement ratio
(w/c). It also determines other properties, such as workability of
fresh concrete. Admixtures, such as retardants, accelerators, or
superplasticizers, which aid flow without adding more water, may be added. Vibration may also
be used to get the mix to flow into forms and fill completely.

Slump is the measurement of the height loss from a compacted cone of fresh concrete. It can be
an indicator of the workability.

Proper mix design is necessary for durability. The pH of fresh cement is enough to prevent
reinforcing steel from oxidizing (rusting). If, however, cracks allow corrosive elements in water
to penetrate to the steel, a corrosion cell will be created, the steel will rust, expand and cause
further cracking. Adequate cover of the steel by the concrete is important.

Deformed reinforcing bars come in grades 40, 60 & 75 (for 40 ksi, 60 ksi and 75 ksi yield
strengths). Sizes are given as # of 1/8 up to #8 bars. For #9 and larger, the number is a nominal
size (while the actual size is larger).

Reinforced concrete is a composite material, and the average density is considered to be 150 lb/ft3.
It has the properties that it will creep (deformation with long term load) and shrink (a result of
hydration) that must be considered.

Construction

Because fresh concrete is a viscous suspension, it is cast or placed and not poured. Formwork
must be able to withstand the hydraulic pressure. Vibration may be used to get the mix to flow
around reinforcing bars or into tight locations, but excess vibration will cause segregation,
honeycombing, and excessive bleed water which will reduce the water available for hydration
and the strength, subsequently.

After casting, the surface must be worked. Screeding removes the excess from the top of the
forms and gets a rough level. Floating is the process of working the aggregate under the surface

361
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

and to float some paste to the surface. Troweling takes place when the mix has hydrated to the
point of supporting weight and the surface is smoothed further and consolidated. Curing is
allowing the hydration process to proceed with adequate moisture. Black tarps and curing
compounds are commonly used. Finishing is the process of adding a texture, commonly by
using a broom, after the concrete has begun to set.

Behavior

Plane sections of composite materials can still

be assumed to be plane (strain is linear), but
the stress distribution is not the same in both
materials because the modulus of elasticity is
different. (f=E)

E1 y E2 y
f1 = E1 = f 2 = E2 =
R R
where R (or ) is the radius of curvature

In order to determine the stress, we can define n as

the ratio of the elastic moduli: E
n= 2
E1
n is used to transform the width of the second material such that it sees the equivalent element stress.

Transformed Section y and I

In order to determine stresses in all types of material in

the beam, we transform the materials into a single
material, and calculate the location of the neutral axis
and modulus of inertia for that material.

ex: When material 1 above is concrete and material 2 is steel

E2 E
to transform steel into concrete n = = steel
E1 Econcrete
to find the neutral axis of the equivalent concrete member we transform the width of the
steel by multiplying by n

to find the moment of inertia of the equivalent concrete member, Itransformed, use the new
geometry resulting from transforming the width of the steel
My Myn
concrete stress: f concrete = steel stress: f steel =
I transformed I transformed

362
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Reinforced Concrete Beam Members

Strength Design for Beams

Strength design method is similar to LRFD. There is a nominal strength that is reduced by a
factor which must exceed the factored design stress. For beams, the concrete only works in
compression over a rectangular stress block above the n.a. from elastic calculation, and the
steel is exposed and reaches the yield stress, Fy

For stress analysis in reinforced concrete beams

the steel is transformed to concrete
any concrete in tension is assumed to be
cracked and to have no strength
the steel can be in tension, and is placed in
the bottom of a beam that has positive
bending moment

The neutral axis is where there is no stress and no
strain. The concrete above the n.a. is in compression.
The concrete below the n.a. is considered ineffective.
The steel below the n.a. is in tension.

363
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Because the n.a. is defined by the moment areas, we can solve for x (or c) knowing that d is the
distance from the top of the concrete section to the centroid of the steel: x
bx nA s ( d x ) = 0
2

x can be solved for when the equation is rearranged into the generic format with a, b & c in the
b b 2 4 ac
binomial equation: ax 2 + bx + c = 0 by x=
2a

T-sections
f f

If the n.a. is above the bottom of a flange in a T hf hf

section, x is found as for a rectangular section.
bw
If the n.a. is below the bottom of a flange in a T
section, x is found by including the flange and the
stem of the web (bw) in the moment area calculation: bw

h
b f h f x f + ( x h f ) bw
( x h f ) nA (d x) = 0
2 2
s

Load Combinations (Alternative values are allowed)

1.4D
1.2D + 1.6L +0.5(Lr or S or R)
1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (1.0L or 0.5W)
1.2D + 1.0W +1.0L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
1.2D + 1.0E + 1.0L + 0.2S
0.9D + 1.0W
0.9D + 1.0E

364
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Internal Equilibrium b 0.85fc

C a/2 C
C = compression in concrete = c a=
stress x area = 0.85 fcba h d 1c
n.a.
T = tension in steel = As T T
stress x area = Asfy
actual stress Whitney stress block

C = T and Mn = T(d-a/2)
where fc = concrete compression strength
a = height of stress block
f c 4000
1 = factor based on fc 1 = 0.85 (0.05) 0.65
c = location to the neutral axis 1000
b = width of stress block
fy = steel yield strength
As = area of steel reinforcement
d = effective depth of section
= depth to n.a. of reinforcement
As f y
With C=T, Asfy = 0.85 fcba so a can be determined with a = = 1c
0.85 f cb

Criteria for Beam Design

For flexure design:

Mu Mn = 0.9 for flexure (when the section is tension controlled)
so for design, Mu can be set to Mn =T(d-a/2) = Asfy (d-a/2)

Reinforcement Ratio

The amount of steel reinforcement is limited. Too much reinforcement, or over-reinforcing will
not allow the steel to yield before the concrete crushes and there is a sudden failure. A beam
with the proper amount of steel to allow it to yield at failure is said to be under reinforced.

As
The reinforcement ratio is just a fraction: = (or p). The amount of reinforcement is
bd
limited to that which results in a concrete strain of 0.003 and a minimum tensile strain of 0.004.

When the strain in the reinforcement is 0.005 or greater, the section is tension controlled. (For
smaller strains the resistance factor reduces to 0.65 because the stress is less than the yield stress
in the steel.) Previous codes limited the amount to 0.75balanced where balanced was determined
from the amount of steel that would make the concrete start to crush at the exact same time that
the steel would yield based on strain (y) of 0.002.

d c fy
The strain in tension can be determined from t = (0.003) . At yield, y = .
c Es

365
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

The resistance factor expressions for transition and compression controlled sections are:
0.15
= 0.75 + ( t y ) for spiral members (not less than 0.75)
(0.005 y )
0.25
= 0.65 + ( t y ) for other members (not less than 0.65)
(0.005 y )

Flexure Design of Reinforcement

One method is to wisely estimate

a height of the stress block, a, and
solve for As, and calculate a new
value for a using Mu.

1. guess a (less than n.a.)

0 .85 f cba
2. As =
fy from Reinforced Concrete, 7th,
3. solve for a from Wang, Salmon, Pincheira, Wiley & Sons, 2007

setting Mu = Asfy (d-a/2):

M u
a = 2 d
As f y

4. repeat from 2. until a found from
step 3 matches a used in step 2.

Design Chart Method:

Mn Mu
1. calculate R n = R n =
bd 2 bd 2
2. find curve for fc and fy to get
3. calculate As and a, where:
As f y
As = bd and a =
0.85 f cb
Any method can simplify the size of d
using h = 1.1d

Maximum Reinforcement

Based on the limiting strain of

0.005 in the steel, c = 0.375d so
a = 1 (0.375d ) to find As-max
(1 is shown in the table above)
(tensile strain of 0.004)

366
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

367
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

When the web is in tension the minimum reinforcement required is the same as for rectangular
sections with the web width (bw) in place of b. Mn =Cw(d-a/2)+Cf(d-hf/2) (hf is height of flange or t)

When the flange is in tension (negative bending), the 6 f c 3 f c

minimum reinforcement required is the greater value of As = (bw d ) or As = (b f d )
fy fy

where f c is in psi, bw is the beam width, and bf is

the effective flange width

Compression Reinforcement

If a section is doubly reinforced, it means there is steel in

the beam seeing compression. The force in the compression
steel that may not be yielding is
Cs = As(fs - 0.85fc)
The total compression that balances the tension is now:
T = Cc + Cs.

And the moment taken about the centroid of the compression stress is Mn = T(d-a/2)+Cs(a-d)
where As is the area of compression reinforcement, and d is the effective depth to the
centroid of the compression reinforcement

Because the compression steel may not be yielding, the neutral axis x must be found from the force
equilibrium relationships, and the stress can be found based on strain to see if it has yielded.

Slabs

One way slabs can be designed as one unit-

wide beams. Because they are thin, control of
deflections is important, and minimum depths
are specified, as is minimum reinforcement for
shrinkage and crack control when not in
flexure. Reinforcement is commonly small
diameter bars and welded wire fabric.

Maximum spacing between bars is also

specified for shrinkage and crack control as
five times the slab thickness not exceeding 18.

For required flexure reinforcement the spacing

limit is three times the slab thickness not
exceeding 18.

368
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement (and minimum for flexure reinforcement):

A
Minimum for slabs with grade 40 or 50 bars: = s = 0.002 or As-min = 0.002bt
bt
A
Minimum for slabs with grade 60 bars: = s = 0.0018 or As-min = 0.0018bt
bt

Shear Behavior

Horizontal shear stresses occur along

with bending stresses to cause tensile
stresses where the concrete cracks.
Vertical reinforcement is required to
bridge the cracks which are called
shear stirrups (or stirrups).

The maximum shear for design, Vu is the value at a distance of d from the face of the support.

Nominal Shear Strength

The shear force that can be resisted is the shear stress cross section area: Vc = c bw d

The shear stress for beams (one way) c = 2 f c so Vc = 2 f c bw d

where bw = the beam width or the minimum width of the stem.
= 0.75 for shear
= modification factor for lightweight concrete
One-way joists are allowed an increase to 1.1Vc if the joists are closely spaced.

Av f yt d
Stirrups are necessary for strength (as well as crack control): Vs = 8 f c bw d (max)
s
where Av = area of all vertical legs of stirrup
s = spacing of stirrups
d = effective depth

For shear design:

Vu Vc + Vs = 0.75 for shear

369
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

greater of and

NOTE: section numbers are pre ACI 318-14

370
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Torsional Shear Reinforcement

On occasion beam members will see twist along the

axis caused by an eccentric shape supporting a load,
like on an L-shaped spandrel (edge) beam. The
torsion results in shearing stresses, and closed
stirrups may be needed to resist the stress that the
concrete cannot resist.

Development Length for Reinforcement

Because the design is based on the reinforcement attaining the yield stress, the reinforcement
needs to be properly bonded to the concrete for a finite length (both sides) so it wont slip. This
is referred to as the development length, ld. Providing sufficient length to anchor bars that need
to reach the yield stress near the end of connections are also specified by hook lengths. Detailing
reinforcement is a tedious job. The equations for development length must be modified if the bar
is epoxy coated or is cast with more than 12 in. of fresh concrete below it. Splices are also
necessary to extend the length of reinforcement that come in standard lengths. The equations for
splices are not provided here.

Development Length in Tension

With the proper bar to bar spacing and cover, the common development length equations are:
db f y
#6 bars and smaller: ld = or 12 in. minimum
25 f c
db f y
#7 bars and larger: ld = or 12 in. minimum
20 fc
Development Length in Compression
db f y
ld = 0.0003 f y db or 8 in. minimum
50 f c
Hook Bends and Extensions
db f y
The minimum hook length is ldh = but not less than the larger of 8db and 6 in.
50 f c

371
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Modulus of Elasticity & Deflection

Ec for deflection calculations can be used with the transformed section modulus in the elastic
range. After that, the cracked section modulus is calculated and Ec is adjusted.

Code values:
Ec = 57,000 f c (normal weight) Ec = w1c .5 33 f c , wc = 90 lb/ft3 - 160 lb/ft3

Deflections of beams and one-way slabs need not be computed if the overall member thickness
meets the minimum specified by the code, and are shown in Table 7.3.1.1 (see Slabs). The span
lengths for continuous beams or slabs is taken as the clear span, ln.

Criteria for Flat Slab & Plate System Design

Systems with slabs and supporting beams, joists or columns typically have multiple bays. The
horizontal elements can act as one-way or two-way systems. Most often the flexure resisting
elements are continuous, having positive and negative bending moments. These moment and
shear values can be found using beam tables, or from code specified approximate design factors.
Flat slab two-way systems have drop panels (for shear), while flat plates do not.

Criteria for Column Design

(American Concrete Institute) ACI 318-14 Code and Commentary:

Pu cPn where
Pu is a factored load
is a resistance factor
Pn is the nominal load capacity (strength)

Load combinations, ex: 1.4D (D is dead load)

1.2D + 1.6L (L is live load)

For compression, c = 0.75 and Pn = 0.85Po for spirally

reinforced, c = 0.65 and Pn = 0.8Po for tied columns where
Po = 0.85 f c( Ag Ast ) + f y Ast and Po is the name of the
maximum axial force with no concurrent bending moment.

Ast
Columns which have reinforcement ratios, g = , in the
Ag
range of 1% to 2% will usually be the most economical, with
1% as a minimum and 8% as a maximum by code.

Bars are symmetrically placed, typically.

Spiral ties are harder to construct.

372
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Columns with Bending (Beam-Columns)

Concrete columns rarely see only axial force and must be designed for the combined effects of
axial load and bending moment. The interaction diagram shows the reduction in axial load a
column can carry with a bending moment.

Design aids commonly present the

interaction diagrams in the form of
load vs. equivalent eccentricity for
standard column sizes and bars used.

Rigid Frames

Monolithically cast frames with

beams and column elements will
have members with shear, bending
and axial loads. Because the joints
can rotate, the effective length must
be determined from methods like
that presented in the handout on
Rigid Frames. The charts for
evaluating k for non-sway and sway
frames can be found in the ACI code.

Frame Columns

Because joints can rotate in frames, the effective length of the column in a frame is harder to
determine. The stiffness (EI/L) of each member in a joint determines how rigid or flexible it is.
To find k, the relative stiffness, G or , must be found for both ends, plotted on the alignment
charts, and connected by a line for braced and unbraced fames.

EI l
c
G = =
EI
l
b

where
E = modulus of elasticity for a member
I = moment of inertia of for a member
lc = length of the column from center to center
lb = length of the beam from center to center

For pinned connections we typically use a value of 10 for .

For fixed connections we typically use a value of 1 for .

373
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Braced non-sway frame Unbraced sway frame

Slenderness

Slenderness effects can be neglected if kl r 22 for columns not braced against sidesway,
kl 34 + 12(M1/M2) and less than 40 for columns braced against sidesway where M1/M2 is
r
negative if the column is bent in single curvature, and positive for double curvature.

374
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

375
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 3

376
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 3 (continued)

377
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 4
A simply supported beam 20 ft long carries a service dead load of 300 lb/ft and a live load of 500 lb/ft. Design an
appropriate beam (for flexure only). Use grade 40 steel and concrete strength of 5000 psi.

SOLUTION:

Find the design moment, Mu, from the factored load combination of 1.2D + 1.6L. It is good practice to guess a beam size to
include self weight in the dead load, because service means dead load of everything except the beam itself.

Guess a size of 10 in x 12 in. Self weight for normal weight concrete is the density of 150 lb/ft3 multiplied by the cross section
1ft 2
area: self weight = 150 lb (10 in)( 12 in) ( ) = 125 lb/ft
ft 3 12 in

wu = 1.2(300 lb/ft + 125 lb/ft) + 1.6(500 lb/ft) = 1310 lb/ft

wl 2 wu l 2 1310 lb ft (20ft) 2
The maximum moment for a simply supported beam is : Mu = = 65,500 lb-ft
8 8 8

65,500lb ft
Mn required = Mu/ = = 72,778 lb-ft
0.9

Mn
To use the design chart aid, find Rn = , estimating that d is about 1.75 inches less than h:
bd 2

d = 12in 1.75 in (0.375) = 10.25 in (NOTE: If there are stirrups, you must also subtract the diameter of the stirrup bar.)

72,778lbft
Rn = (12 in ft ) = 831 psi
(10in)(10.25in)2

corresponds to approximately 0.023 (which is less than that for 0.005 strain of 0.0319) , so the estimated area required, As, can
be found:

As = bd = (0.023)(10in)(10.25in) = 2.36 in2

The number of bars for this area can be found from handy charts.

(Whether the number of bars actually fit for the width with cover and space between bars must also be considered. If you are at
max do not choose an area bigger than the maximum!)

Try As = 2.37 in2 from 3#8 bars

d = 12 in 1.5 in (cover) (8/8in diameter bar) = 10 in

Check = 2.37 in2/(10 in)(10 in) = 0.0237 which is less than max-0.005 = 0.0319 OK (We cannot have an over reinforced beam!!)

Find the moment capacity of the beam as designed, Mn

a = Asfy/0.85fcb = 2.37 in2 (40 ksi)/[0.85(5 ksi)10 in] = 2.23 in

2.23in 1
Mn = Asfy(d-a/2) = 0.9(2.37in 2 )(40ksi)(1 0in )( ) = 63.2 k-ft >/ 65.5 k-ft needed (not OK)
2 12 in ft
So, we can increase d to 13 in, and Mn = 70.3 k-ft (OK). Or increase As to 2 # 10s (2.54 in2), for a = 2.39 in and Mn of
67.1 k-ft (OK). Dont exceed max or max-0.005 if you want to use =0.9

378
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 5
A simply supported beam 20 ft long carries a service dead load of 425 lb/ft (including self weight) and a live load of
500 lb/ft. Design an appropriate beam (for flexure only). Use grade 40 steel and concrete strength of 5000 psi.

SOLUTION:

Find the design moment, Mu, from the factored load combination of 1.2D + 1.6L. If self weight is not included in the service
loads, you need to guess a beam size to include self weight in the dead load, because service means dead load of everything
except the beam itself.

wu = 1.2(425 lb/ft) + 1.6(500 lb/ft) = 1310 lb/ft

2
wl 2 w l 2 1310 lb ft ( 20 ft )
The maximum moment for a simply supported beam is : Mu = u = 65,500 lb-ft
8 8 8
65,500lb ft
Mn required = Mu/ = = 72,778 lb-ft
0.9
Mn
To use the design chart aid, we can find Rn = , and estimate that h is roughly 1.5-2 times the size of b, and h = 1.1d
bd 2
(rule of thumb): d = h/1.1 = (2b)/1.1, so d 1.8b or b 0.55d.

We can find Rn at the maximum reinforcement ratio for our materials, keeping in mind max at a strain = 0.005 is 0.0319 off of the
chart at about 1070 psi, with max = 0.037. Lets substitute b for a function of d:
lb ft
Rn = 1070 psi = 72,778 (12 in ft ) Rearranging and solving for d = 11.4 inches
(0.55d )(d ) 2

That would make b a little over 6 inches, which is impractical. 10 in is commonly the smallest width.

So if h is commonly 1.5 to 2 times the width, b, h ranges from 14 to 20 inches. (10x1.5=15 and 10x2 = 20)

Choosing a depth of 14 inches, d 14 - 1.5 (clear cover) - (1 diameter bar guess) -3/8 in (stirrup diameter) = 11.625 in.

Now calculating an updated Rn = 72,778 lb ft

(12 in ) = 646.2psi
ft
(10in)(11. 625in) 2

now is 0.020 (under the limit at 0.005 strain of 0.0319), so the estimated area required, As, can be found:

As = bd = (0.020)(10in)(11.625in) = 1.98 in2

The number of bars for this area can be found from handy charts.
(Whether the number of bars actually fit for the width with cover and space between bars must also be considered. If you are at
max-0.005 do not choose an area bigger than the maximum!)

Try As = 2.37 in2 from 3#8 bars. (or 2.0 in2 from 2 #9 bars. 4#7 bars dont fit...)

d(actually) = 14 in. 1.5 in (cover) (8/8 in bar diameter) 3/8 in. (stirrup diameter) = 11.625 in.

Check = 2.37 in2/(10 in)(11.625 in) = 0.0203 which is less than max-0.005 = 0.0319 OK (We cannot have an over reinforced
beam!!)

Find the moment capacity of the beam as designed, Mn

a = Asfy/0.85fcb = 2.37 in2 (40 ksi)/[0.85(5 ksi)10 in] = 2.23 in
2.23in 1
Mn = Asfy(d-a/2) = 0.9(2.37in 2 )(40ksi)(11.625in )( ) = 74.7 k-ft > 65.5 k-ft needed
2 12 in ft
OK! Note: If the section doesnt work, you need to increase d or As as long as you dont exceed max-0.005

379
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 6
A simply supported beam 25 ft long carries a service dead load of 2 k/ft, an estimated self weight of 500 lb/ft and a
live load of 3 k/ft. Design an appropriate beam (for flexure only). Use grade 60 steel and concrete strength of
3000 psi.

SOLUTION:

Find the design moment, Mu, from the factored load combination of 1.2D + 1.6L. If self weight is estimated, and the selected size
has a larger self weight, the design moment must be adjusted for the extra load.
2 7.8 k ft ( 25 ft )2
wu = 1.2(2 k/ft + 0.5 k/ft) + 1.6(3 k/ft) = 7.8 k/ft So, Mu = wu l = 609.4 k-ft
8 8
k ft
609.4
Mn required = Mu/ = = 677.1 k-ft
0.9
Mn
To use the design chart aid, we can find Rn = , and estimate that h is roughly 1.5-2 times the size of b, and h = 1.1d (rule of
bd 2
thumb): d = h/1.1 = (2b)/1.1, so d 1.8b or b 0.55d.

We can find Rn at the maximum reinforcement ratio for our materials off of the chart at about 700 psi with max-0.005 = 0.0135.
Lets substitute b for a function of d:
k ft
Rn = 700 psi = 677.1 ( 1000lb / k ) Rearranging and solving for d = 27.6 inches
( 12 in ft )
( 0.55d )( d )2

That would make b 15.2 in. (from 0.55d). Lets try 15. So,
h d + 1.5 (clear cover) +(1 diameter bar guess) +3/8 in (stirrup diameter) = 27.6 +2.375 = 29.975 in.

Choosing a depth of 30 inches, d 30 - 1.5 (clear cover) - (1 diameter bar guess) -3/8 in (stirrup diameter) = 27.625 in.

677,100 lb ft
Now calculating an updated Rn = (12 in ) = 710 psi This is larger than Rn for the 0.005 strain limit!
ft
(15in)(27. 625in) 2

We cant just use max-.005. The way to reduce Rn is to increase b or d or both. Lets try increasing h to 31 in., then Rn = 661 psi
with d = 28.625 in.. That puts us under max-0.005 . Wed have to remember to keep UNDER the area of steel calculated, which is
hard to do.
From the chart, 0.013, less than the max-0.005 of 0.0135, so the estimated area required, As, can be found:
As = bd = (0.013)(15in)(29.625in) = 5.8 in2

The number of bars for this area can be found from handy charts. Our charts say there can be 3 6 bars that fit when
aggregate is used. Well assume 1 inch spacing between bars. The actual limit is the maximum of 1 in, the bar diameter or 1.33
times the maximum aggregate size.

Try As = 6.0 in2 from 6#9 bars. Check the width: 15 3 (1.5 in cover each side) 0.75 (two #3 stirrup legs) 6*1.128 5*1.128 in. =
-1.16 in NOT OK.
Try As = 5.08 in2 from 4#10 bars. Check the width: 15 3 (1.5 in cover each side) 0.75 (two #3 stirrup legs) 4*1.27 3*1.27 in. =
2.36 OK.
d(actually) = 31 in. 1.5 in (cover) (1.27 in bar diameter) 3/8 in. (stirrup diameter) = 28.49 in.

Find the moment capacity of the beam as designed, Mn

a = Asfy/0.85fcb = 5.08 in2 (60 ksi)/[0.85(3 ksi)15 in] = 8.0 in
8.0in 1
Mn = Asfy(d-a/2) = 0.9(5.08in 2 )(60ksi)(2 8.49in )( ) = 559.8 k-ft < 609 k-ft needed!! (NO GOOD)
2 12 in ft
More steel isnt likely to increase the capacity much unless we are close. It looks like we need more steel and lever arm. Try h = 32 in.
AND b = 16 in., then Mu* (with the added self weight of 33.3 lb/ft) = 680.2 k-ft, 0.012, As = 0.012(16in)(29.42in)=5.66 in2. 6#9s
wont fit, but 4#11s will: = 0.0132
, a = 9.18 in, and Mn = 697.2 k-ft which is finally larger than 680.2 k-ft OK

380
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 7

381
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 8
Design a T-beam for a floor with a 4 in slab supported by 22-ft-span-length beams cast monolithically with the slab.
The beams are 8 ft on center and have a web width of 12 in. and a total depth of 22 in.; fc = 3000 psi and fy = 60 ksi.
Service loads are 125 psf and 200 psf dead load which does not include the weight of the floor system.

SOLUTION:

0.0024(66)(19) = 3.01 in.2

Use 3#9 (As = 3.00 in.2)
7.125 in

1.125
19.56 in.

(O.K.)

1.2(0.625 + 1.60) + 1.6(1.00) = 4.27 kip/ft

4.27(22)2
258 ft-kips
3.00 in2

= 0.0135(66)(19)
= 16.93 in.2 > 3.00 in.2 (O.K)

12. Verify the moment capacity:

(Is )

a = (3.00)(60)/[0.85(3)(66)] = 1.07 in.

= 256.9 ft-kips (Not O.K)

Choose more steel, As = 3.16 in2 from 4-#8s

d = 19.62 in, a = 1.13 in

Mn = 271.0 ft-kips, which is OK

13. Sketch the design

258

258
Rn = 0.1444 ksi

Rn of 0.1444 ksi

required =0.0024

382
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 9
Design a T-beam for the floor system shown for which
bw and d are given. MD = 200 ft-k, ML = 425 ft-k,
fc = 3000 psi and fy = 60 ksi, and simple span = 18 ft.

SOLUTION

Check minimum reinforcing:

3 fc 3 3000 (15)(24)
As min = bw d = = 0.986 in2
fy 60, 000
but not less than
First assume a hf (which is very often the case. Then the design
would proceed like that of a rectangular beam with a width equal to 200bw d 200(15)(24) 2
As min = = = 1.2in
the effective width of the T beam flange. fy 60, 000
Only 2 rows fit, so try 8-#10 bars, As = 10.16 in2
for equilibrium: T = Cw + Cf
T = Asfy = (10.16)(60) = 609.6 k
Cf = 0.85fc(b-bw)hf and Cw = 0.85fcabw
Cw = T-Cf = 609.6 k (0.85)(3)(54-15)3 = 311.25 k
a = 311.25/(0.85*3*15) = 8.14 in
The beam acts like a T beam, not a rectangular beam, and if the
values for and a above are not correct. If the value of a had been Check strain (t) and :
hf, the value of As would have been simply bd = 0.0072(54)(24) = c = a/1 = 8.14 in/0.85 = 9.58
9.33 in2. Now break the beam up into two parts (Figure 5.7) and
design it as a T beam.
t =
d c 24 9.58 (0.003) = 0.0045 > 0.005!
Assuming = 0.90 (0.003) = /
c 9.58
We could try 10-#9 bars at 10 in2, T =600 k, Cw = 301.65 k,
a = 7.89, t = 0.0061; = 0.9!

Finally check the capacity:

a hf
Designing a rectangular beam with bw = 15 in. and d = 24 in. to resist M n = Cw (d ) + C f (d
)
417 k-ft 2 2
= [301.65(24-7.89/2) + 298.35(24-3/2)]1ft/12in
=1063.5 k-ft

So: Mn = 0.9(1063.5) = 957.2 k-ft 920 k-ft (OK)

383
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 10

384
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 11

1.2wDL + 1.6wLL
1.2(0.075) + 1.6(0.400)
0.730 kip/ft

0.73(10)2
9.125 ft-kips

11. Verify the moment capacity:

(Is )
Rn :

Rn =

9.125(12)
0.4257 ksi

Rn = 0.4257, the required = 0.0077. = 10.6 ft-kips OK)

12. A design sketch is drawn:

0.0181 > 0.0077

0.0077.
0.0077(12)(4.88)=0.45 in.2/ft

385
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 12

386
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 13
For the simply supported concrete beam shown in Figure 5-61, determine the stirrup spacing (if required) using No.
3 U stirrups of Grade 60 (fy = 60 ksi). Assume fc = 3000 psi.

with 2 legs, then

(0.75)(1) 32.0

V c + V s

Vs= Vu - Vc = 50 32.0 = 18.0 kips (< 64.1

2
A v F y d ( 0.75 )( 0.22in )( 60ksi )( 32.5in )
sreqd
18.0k

17.875 in.

sreqd , but 16 (d/2) would be the maximum

Vc as well.
when Vc>Vu>
2

Use #3 U @ 16 max spacing

387
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 14
Design the shear reinforcement for the simply supported
reinforced concrete beam shown with a dead load of 1.5 k/ft
and a live load of 2.0 k/ft. Use 5000 psi concrete and Grade
60 steel. Assume that the point of reaction is at the end of the
beam.

SOLUTION:

29.9

15

78 in 111 in

Shear diagram:
Find self weight = 1 ft x (27/12 ft) x 150 lb/ft3 = 338 lb/ft = 0.338 k/ft
wu = 1.2 (1.5 k/ft + 0.338 k/ft) + 1.6 (2 k/ft) = 5.41 k/ft (= 0.451 k/in)
Vu (max) is at the ends = wuL/2 = 5.41 k/ft (24 ft)/2 = 64.9 k
Vu (support) = Vu (max) wu(distance) = 64.9 k 5.4 1k/ft (6/12 ft) = 62.2 k
Vu for design is d away from the support = Vu (support) wu(d) = 62.2 k 5.41 k/ft (23.5/12 ft) = 51.6 k

Concrete capacity:
We need to see if the concrete needs stirrups for strength or by requirement because Vu Vc + Vs (design requirement)
Vc = 2 f c bwd = 0.75 (2)(1.0) 5000 psi (12 in) (23.5 in) = 299106 lb = 29.9 kips (< 51.6 k!)
Locating end points:
Stirrup design and spacing 29.9 k = 64.9k 0.451 k/in x (a)
We need stirrups: Av = Vss/fyd a = 78 in
15 k = 64.9k 0.451 k/in x (b)
Vs Vu - Vc = 51.6 k 29.9 k = 21.7 k b = 111 in.
Spacing requirements are in Table 3-8 and depend on Vc/2 = 15.0 k and 2Vc = 59.8 k
2 legs for a #3 is 0.22 in2, so sreqd Avfytd/Vs = 0.75(0.22 in2)(60 ksi)(23.5 in)/21.7 k = 10.72 in Use s = 10
our maximum falls into the d/2 or 24, so d/2 governs with 11.75 in Our 10 is ok.
This spacing is valid until Vu = Vc and that happens at (64.9 k 29.9 k)/0.451 k/in = 78 in
We can put the first stirrup at a minimum of 2 in from the
support face, so we need 10 spaces for (78 2 - 6 in)/10 in =
7 even (8 stirrups altogether ending at 78 in)
After 78 we can change the spacing to the required (but not 2 in
more than the maximum of d/2 = 11.75 in 24in);
s = Avfyt / 50bw = 0.22 in2 (60,000 psi)/50 (12 in) =
22 in Avfyt/0.75 f c bw =
8 - #3 U stirrups
0.22 in2 (60,000 psi)/[0.75 5000 psi(12 in)] = 20.74 in at 10 in 3 - #3 U stirrups at 11 in

We need to continue to 111 in, so (111 78 in)/ 11 in = 3 even

388
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 15

389
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 15 (continued)

As-min = 0.12 in2/ft

No. 3 at 11 temperature reinforcement
No. 3 at 8 No. 3 at 8 No. 3 at 8

No. 3 at 9 No. 3 at 11

Example 16

1.2 1.6 = 1.2(93.8) + 1.6(250) = 112.6 + 400.0 = 516.2 psf (design load)

Because we are designing a slab segment that is 12 in. wide, the foregoing loading is the same as 512.6 lb/ft
or 0.513 kip/ft.
390
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 16 (continued)

(0.513)(11)2 = 4.43 ft-kips (end span)

(0.513)(11)2 = 3.88 ft-kips (interior span)

(0.513)(11)2 = 6.20 ft-kips (end span - first interior support)

(0.513)(11)2 = 5.64 ft-kips (interior span both supports)

(0.513)(11)2 = 2.58 ft-kips (end span exterior support)

Similarly, the shears are determined using the ACI shear equations. In the end span at the face of the first
interior support,
1.15(0.513) 3.24 kips (end span first interior support)

=(0.513) 2.82 kips

4. Design the slab. Assume #4 bars for main steel with in. cover: d = 5.5 0.75 (0.5) = 4.5 in.
5. Design the steel. (All moments must be considered.) For example, the negative moment in the end span at the
first interior support:
Mu 6.20( 12 )( 1000 )
Rn = 2
= = 340 ft kips so 0.006
bd 0.9( 12 )( 4.5 ) 2
As = bd = 0.006(12)(4.5) = 0.325 in2 per ft. width of slab Use #4 at 7 in. (16.5 in. max. spacing)
The minimum reinforcement required for flexure is the same as the shrinkage and temperature steel.
(Verify the moment capacity is achieved: a 0.67 in. and Mn = 6.38 ft-kips > 6.20 ft-kips)
For grade 60 the minimum for shrinkage and temperature steel is:
As-min = 0.0018bt = 0.0018 (12)(5.5) = 0.12 in2 per ft. width of slab Use #3 at 11 in. (18 in. max spacing)
6. Check the shear strength.
V c = 2 f c bd = 0.75( 2 ) 3000 ( 12 )( 4 .5 ) = 4436 .6lb = 4.44 kips
V u V c Therefore the thickness is O.K.

7. Development length for the flexure reinforcement is required. (Hooks are required at the spandrel beam.)
For example, #6 bars:
db Fy #3 at 11 o.c. temperature reinforcement
ld = or 12 in. minimum
25 f c #3 at 11 o.c. #4 at 7 o.c. #4 at 8 o.c.

With grade 40 steel and 3000 psi concrete:

6
8 in(40,000 psi)
ld = = 21.9in #4 at 12 o.c. #4 at 15 o.c.
25 3000 psi

(which is larger than 12 in.)

8. Sketch:

391
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 17
A building is supported on a grid of columns that is spaced at 30 ft on center in both the north-south and east-west
directions. Hollow core planks with a 2 in. topping span 30 ft in the east-west direction and are supported on precast
L and inverted T beams. Size the hollow core planks assuming a live load of 100 lb/ft2. Choose the shallowest
plank with the least reinforcement that will span the 30 ft while supporting the live load.

SOLUTION:

The shallowest that works is an 8 in. deep hollow core plank.

The one with the least reinforcing has a strand pattern of 68-S, which contains 6 strands of diameter 8/16 in. = in. The S
indicates that the strands are straight. The plank supports a superimposed service load of 124 lb/ft2 at a span of 30 ft with an
estimated camber at erection of 0.8 in. and an estimated long-time camber of 0.2 in.

The weight of the plank is 81 lb/ft2.

392
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 18

Also, design for e = 6 in.

393
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 19
Determine the capacity of a 16 x 16 column with 8- #10 bars, tied. Grade 40 steel and 4000 psi concrete.

SOLUTION:

Find Pn, with =0.65 and Pn = 0.80Po for tied columns and
Po = 0.85 f c( Ag Ast ) + f y Ast
Steel area (found from reinforcing bar table for the bar size):
Ast = 8 bars (1.27 in2) = 10.16 in2
Concrete area (gross):
Ag = 16 in 16 in = 256 in2
Grade 40 reinforcement has fy = 40,000 psi and f c = 4000psi

Pn = (0.65)(0.80)[0.85(4000 psi )(256 in2 10.16 in2) + (40,000 psi)(10.16 in2)] = 646,026 lb = 646 kips

Example 20
16 x 16 precast reinforced columns support inverted T girders
on corbels as shown. The unfactored loads on the corbel are
81 k dead, and 72 k live. The unfactored loads on the column
are 170 k dead and 150 k live. Determine the reinforcement
required using the interaction diagram provided. Assume that
half the moment is resisted by the column above the corbel and
the other half is resisted by the column below. Use grade 60
steel and 5000 psi concrete. corbel

394
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 21

395
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Example 22

ACI 7.7: Concrete exposed to earth or weather:

No. 6 through No. 18 bars....... 2 in. minimum

0.808
(0.75)(4)(452)

0.103
(0.75)(4)(452)(24)
0.02
0.75
(0.02)(452) = 9.04 in.2
#8, Ast = 9.48 in.2
17 bars of #8 can be arranged in

ACI 10.12: In nonsway frames it shall be permitted to ignore slenderness effects for
compression members that satisfy: u 34 12 M 1 M
kl
r 2

396
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Factored Moment Resistance of Concrete Beams, Mn (k-ft) with fc = 4 ksi, fy = 60 ksia

Approximate Values for a/d
0.1 0.2 0.3
Approximate Values for
b x d (in) 0.0057 0.01133 0.017
10 x 14 2 #6 2 #8 3 #8
53 90 127
10 x 18 3 #5 2 #9 3 #9
72 146 207
10 x 22 2 #7 3 #8 (3 #10)
113 211 321
12 x 16 2 #7 3 #8 4 #8
82 154 193
12 x 20 2 #8 3 #9 4 #9
135 243 306
12 x 24 2 #8 3 #9 (4 #10)
162 292 466
15 x 20 3 #7 4 #8 5 #9
154 256 383
15 x 25 3 #8 4 #9 4 #11
253 405 597
15 x 30 3 #8 5 #9 (5 #11)
304 608 895
18 x 24 3 #8 5 #9 6 #10
243 486 700
18 x 30 3 #9 6 #9 (6 #11)
385 729 1074
18 x 36 3 #10 6 #10 (7 #11)
586 1111 1504
20 x 30 3 # 10 7#9 6 # 11
489 851 1074
20 x 35 4 #9 5 #11 (7 #11)
599 1106 1462
20 x 40 6 #8 6 #11 (9 #11)
811 1516 2148
24 x 32 6 #8 7 #10 (8 #11)
648 1152 1528
24 x 40 6 #9 7 #11 (10 #11)
1026 1769 2387
24 x 48 5 #10 (8 #11) (13 #11)
1303 2426 3723
a
Table yields values of factored moment resistance in kip-ft with reinforcement indicated. Reinforcement choices
shown in parentheses require greater width of beam or use of two stack layers of bars. (Adapted and corrected from
Simplified Engineering for Architects and Builders, 11th ed, Ambrose and Tripeny, 2010.)

397
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Column Interaction Diagrams

398
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Column Interaction Diagrams

399
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Beam / One-Way Slab Design Flow Chart

Collect data: L, , , llimits, hmin (or tmin); find

beam charts for load cases and actual equations
(estimate wself weight = x A)

Collect data: load factors, fy, f'c

Find Vu & Mu from constructing diagrams

or using beam chart formulas with the
factored loads (Vu-max is at d away
from face of support)

Determine Mn required by
Assume b & d (based Mu/ , choose method
on hmin or tmin for slabs) Chart (Rn vs )

Find Rn off chart with fy, fc and

Select min max
select min max

Choose b & d combination based

on Rn and hmin (tmin slabs),
estimate h with 1 bars (#8)

Calculate As = bd

Select bar size and spacing to fit

width or 12 in strip of slab and not Increase h, find d*
exceed limits for crack control

Find new d / adjust h; NO

Is min max ?

YES or provide As min

Increase h, find d
Calculate a, Mn

NO
Is Mu Mn?

Yes (on to shear reinforcement for beams)

400
 ARCH 331 Note Set 22.1 Su2015abn

Beam / One-Way Slab Design Flow Chart - continued

Beam, Adequate for Flexure

Determine shear capacity of plain

concrete based on fc, b & d, Vc

NO NO
Is Vu (at d for beams) Vc? Beam?

YES

Determine Vs = (Vu - Vc) Increase h and re-evaluate

NO
Beam? flexure (As and Mn of
previous page)*

YES NO
Is Vs ?
NO (4Vc)
Is Vu < Vc?
YES

YES Determine s & Av

Find where V = Vc
and provide minimum
Av and change s

Find where V = Vc
and provide stirrups
just past that point

Yes (DONE)

401
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.2 S2009aba

403
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.2 S2009aba

404
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.2 S2009aba

405
ARCH 331 Note Set 22.2 S2009aba

406
ARCH 331 Note Set 24 F2009abn

Torsion

Notation:
a = name for width dimension G = shear modulus
a = area bounded by the centerline of a
J
L
=
=
polar moment of inertia
length
thin walled section subjected to
s = length of a segment of a thin walled
torsion
section
b = name for height dimension
t = name for thickness
c = radial distance to shear stress
T = torque (axial moment)
location
= angle of twist
ci = inner radial distance to shear stress
location = pi (3.1415 radians or 180)
co = outer radial distance to shear stress = radial distance
location = engineering symbol for shearing
c1 = coefficient for shear stress for a stress
rectangular bar in torsion = summation symbol
c2 = coefficient for shear twist for a
rectangular bar in torsion

Deformation in Torsionally Loaded Members

Axi-symmetric cross sections subjected to axial moment or torque

will remain plane and undistorted.

At a section, internal torque (resisiting applied torque) is made up of

shear forces parallel to the area and in the direction of the torque.
The distribution of the shearing stresses depends on the angle of
twist, . The cross section remains plane and undistored.

Shearing Strain

Shearing strain is the angle change of a straight line segment along the axis. =
L
where
is the radial distance from the centroid to the point under strain.
c
The maximum strain is at the surface, a distance c from the centroid: max =
L

G is the Shear Modulus or Modulus of Rigidity: = G

407
ARCH 331 Note Set 24 F2009abn

Shearing Strain and Stress

In the linear elastic range: the torque is the summation of torsion stresses over
the area:
J T
T= gives: =
J

Maximum torsional stress, max, occurs at the outer diameter (or perimeter).

Polar Moment of Inertia

For axi-symmetric shapes, there is only one value for polar moment of inertia,
J, determined by the radius, c:

c4 ( co 4 ci 4 )
solid section: J= hollow section: J=
2 2

Combined Torsion and Axial Loading

Just as with combined axial load and shear, combined torsion and
axial loading result in maximum shear stress at a 45 oblique plane
of twist.

Shearing Strain
TL Ti Li
In the linear elastic range: = and for composite shafts: =
JG i J i Gi

Torsion in Noncircular Shapes

J is no longer the same along the lateral axes. Plane sections do not
remain plane, but distort. max is still at the furthest distance away from
the centroid. For rectangular shapes:

T TL
max = =
c1ab 2 c2 ab3G
b
For a/b > 5:
1 a
c1 = c2 = 1 0.630 b
( )
3 a

a>b

408
ARCH 331 Note Set 24 F2009abn

Open Sections

For long narrow shapes where a/b is very large

(a/b ) c1 = c2 = 1/3 and:

T TL
max = 2
= 3
3 ab 3 ab G
1 1

Shear Flow of Closed Thin Walled Sections

q is the internal shearing force per unit length, and is constant on a cross section
even though the thickness of the wall may very. a
is the area bounded by the
centerline of the wall section; si, is a length segment of the wall and ti is the
corresponding thickness of the length segment.

T TL si
=
2t a =
4t 2 a t
i i

Shear Flow in Open Sections

The shear flow must wrap around at all edges, and the total torque is distributed
among the areas making up the cross section in proportion to the torsional rigidity
of each rectangle (ab2/3). The total angle of twist is the sum of the values from each
rectangle. ti is the thickness of each rectangle and bi is the length of each rectangle.

Ttmax TL
max = =
1 b t 3 1 G b t 3
3 i i 3 i i

409
ARCH 331 Note Set 24 F2009abn

Example 1

J (14 ksi )( 393.7 in 4 ) 1 ft

T= = = 87.5 k ft
5.25 in 12 in
4 4
( c o4 c i4 ) (( 5.25 in ) ( 4.75 in ) )
J= = = 393.7 in 4
2 2
T
=
a
2t
1 ft
T = 2t a = (14 ksi )2( 0.5in )( 72in 2
)
12in
= 84 k ft

a (12in )( 6in ) = 72in 2

Tt max J (14 ksi )( 4.08 in 4 ) 1 ft

max = T= = 4.8 k ft
1
3
bi t i3 t max 1in 12 in

J= 1
3
[10in( 0.5in ) 3
]
+ ( 5.5 in )( 1in )3 + ( 5.5 in )( 1in ) 3 = 4.08 in 4

410
ARCH 331 Note Set 25.1 F2012abn

One-Way Frame Analysis

Simplified Design, 3rd ed., PCA 2004

Notation:
D = shorthand for dead load wd = load per unit length on a beam from
ln = clear span from face of support to dead load
face of support in concrete design wl = load per unit length on a beam from
L = shorthand for live load live load
wu = load per unit length on a beam from
load factors

411
ARCH 331 Note Set 25.1 F2012abn

412
ARCH 331 Note Set 25.2 F2008abn

Thickness and Cover Requirements for Fire Protection

Simplified Design, PCA 1993

413
ARCH 331 Note Set 25.3 Su2011abn

Openings in Concrete Slab Systems

from Notes on ACI 318-99, Portland Cement Association, 1999

415
ARCH 331 Note Set 25.3 Su2011abn

416
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Foundation Design

Notation:
a = name for width dimension p = pressure
A = name for area pA = active soil pressure
b = width of retaining wall stem at base P = name for axial force vector
= width resisting shear stress = force due to a pressure
bo = perimeter length for two-way shear PD = dead load axial force
in concrete footing design PL = live load axial force
B = spread footing or retaining wall Pu = factored axial force
base dimension in concrete design q = soil bearing pressure
cc = shorthand for clear cover qa = allowable soil bearing stress in
d = effective depth from the top of a allowable stress design, as is
reinforced concrete member to the qallowable
centroid of the tensile steel qg = gross soil bearing pressure
= name for diameter qnet = net allowed soil bearing pressure, as
e = eccentric distance of application of is qn
a force (P) from the centroid of a qu = ultimate soil bearing strength in
cross section allowable stress design
f = symbol for stress = factored soil bearing capacity in
fc = concrete design compressive stress concrete footing design from load
Fhorizontal-resisting = total force resisting factors, as is qnu
horizontal sliding R = name for reaction force vector
Fsliding = total sliding force SF = shorthand for factor of safety
Fx = force in the x direction t = thickness of retaining wall stem at top
F.S. = shorthand for factor of safety T = name of a tension force
hf = height of a concrete spread footing V = name for volume
H = height of retaining wall Vc = shear force capacity in concrete
HA = horizontal force due to active soil Vu = factored shear for reinforced
pressure concrete design
ld = development length for reinforcing w = name for width
steel wu = load per unit length on a beam from
L = name for length or span length load factors
M = moment due to a force W = name for force due to weight
Mn = nominal flexure strength with the x = horizontal distance
steel reinforcement at the yield y = the distance in the y direction from
stress and concrete at the concrete a reference axis to the centroid of a
design strength for reinforced shape
concrete beam design = modification factor for lightweight
Moverturning = total overturning moment concrete
Mresisting = total moment resisting = resistance factor
overturning about a point c = density or unit weight of concrete
Mu = maximum moment from factored
loads for LRFD beam design s = density or unit weight of soil
n = name for number = pi (3.1415 radians or 180)
N = name for normal force to a surface = reinforcement ratio in concrete
o = point of overturning of a retaining beam design = As/bd
wall, commonly at the toe = coefficient of static friction

417
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Foundations

A foundation is defined as the engineered interface between the earth and the structure it
supports that transmits the loads to the soil or rock. The design differs from structural design in
that the choices in material and framing system are not available, and quality of materials cannot
be assured. Foundation design is dependent on geology and climate of the site.

Soil Mechanics

Soil is another building material and the properties, just like the ones necessary for steel and
concrete and wood, must be known before designing. In addition, soil has other properties due to
massing of the material, how soil particles pack or slide against each other, and how water affects
the behavior. The important properties are

specific weight (density)

allowable soil pressure
factored net soil pressure allowable soil pressure less surcharge with a factor of safety
shear resistance
backfill pressure
cohesion & friction of soil
effect of water
settlement
rock fracture behavior
slip zone

Structural Strength and Serviceability

There are significant serviceability

considerations with soil. Soils can settle
considerably under foundation loads, which
can lead to redistribution of moments in
punched wedge
continuous slabs or beams, increases in
stresses and cracking. Excessive loads can cause the soil to fail in
bearing and in shear. The presence of water can cause soils to swell or shrink and freeze and
thaw, which causes heaving. Fissures or fault lines can cause seismic instabilities.

A geotechnical engineer or engineering service can use tests on soil bearings from the site to
determine the ultimate bearing capacity, qu. Allowable stress design is utilized for soils because
of the variability do determine the allowable bearing capacity, qa = qu/(safety factor).

Values of qa range from 3000 4000 psi for most soils, while clay type soils have lower
capacities and sandy soils to rock have much higher capacities.

418
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Soil acts somewhat like water, in that it exerts a lateral pressure because
of the weight of the material above it, but the relationship is not linear.
Soil can have an active pressure from soil behind a retaining wall and
a passive pressure from soil in front of the footing. Active pressure is active
typically greater than passive pressure. (trying to
move wall)
passive
Foundation Materials (resists
movement)
Typical foundation materials include:

plain concrete
reinforced concrete
steel
wood
composites, ie. steel tubing filled with concrete

Foundation Design

Generalized Design Steps

Design of foundations with variable conditions and variable types of foundation structures will
be different, but there are steps that are typical to every design, including:

1. Calculate loads from structure, surcharge, active & passive pressures, etc.
2. Characterize soil hire a firm to conduct soil tests and produce a report that includes soil
material properties
3. Determine footing location and depth shallow footings are less expensive, but the
variability of the soil from the geotechnical report will drive choices
4. Evaluate soil bearing capacity the factor of safety is considered here
5. Determine footing size these calculations are based on working loads and the allowable
soil pressure
6. Calculate contact pressure and check stability
7. Estimate settlements
8. Design the footing structure design for the material based on applicable structural
design codes which may use allowable stress design, LRFD or limit state design
(concrete).

419
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Shallow Foundation Types

Considered simple and cost effective because little soil is removed

or disturbed.
Spread footing A single column bears on a square or rectangular
pad to distribute the load over a bigger area.
Wall footing A continuous wall bears on a wide pad to distribute
the load.
Eccentric footing A spread or wall footing that also must resist a
moment in addition to the axial column load.
Combined footing Multiple columns (typically two) bear on a
rectangular or trapezoidal shaped footing.
Unsymmetrical footing A footing with a shape that does not
evenly distribute bearing pressure from column loads and
moments. It typically involves a hole or a non-rectangular shape influenced by a boundary or
property line.
Strap footing A combined footing consisting of two spread footings with a beam or strap
connecting the slabs. The purpose of this is to limit differential settlements.
Mat foundation A slab that supports multiple columns. The mat can be stiffened with a grid or
grade beams. It is typically used when the soil capacity is very low.

Deep Foundation Types

Considerable material and excavation is required, increasing cost and effort.

Retaining Walls A wall that retains soil or other materials, and must resist sliding and
overturning. Can have counterforts, buttresses or keys.
Basement Walls A wall that encloses a basement space, typically next to a floor slab, and that
may be restrained at the top by a floor slab.
Piles Next choice when spread footings or mats wont work, piles are used to distribute loads
by end bearing to strong soil or friction to low strength soils. Can be used to resist uplift, a
moment causing overturning, or to compact soils. Also useful when used in combination to
control settlements of mats or slabs.
Pa = A p fa
Drilled Piers Soil is removed to the P P P
shape of the pier and concrete is
added. Rs =(adhesion) T
Caissons Water and possibly wet N
soil is held back or excavated RP 0
while the footing is constructed Rp
or dropped into place.
end friction tapered uplift/tension
bearing friction
Pile Types

420
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Loads and Stresses

Bearing loads must be distributed to the soil materials, but because of their
variability and the stiffness of the footing pad, the resulting stress, or soil
pressure, is not necessarily uniform. But we assume it is for design
because dealing with the complexity isnt worth the time or effort. RIGID footing on sand

The increase in weight when replacing soil with concrete is called the
overburden. Overburden may also be the result of adding additional soil to
the top of the excavation for a retaining wall. It is extra uniformly
distributed load that is considered by reducing the allowable soil pressure
(instead of increasing the loads), resulting in a net allowable soil pressure,
qnet: q =q h ( ) RIGID footing on clay
net allowable f c s

In order to design the footing size, the actual stress P/A must be less than
or equal to the allowable pressure: P
qnet
A
Design Stresses IDEAL stress

The result of a uniform pressure on the underside of a

footing is identical to a distributed load on a slab over
a column when looked at upside down. The footing
slab must resist bending, one-way shear and two-way
shear (punching).
one-way shear two-way shear
Stresses with Eccentric Loading

Combined axial and bending stresses increase the P

M
pressure on one edge or corner of a footing. We assume
again a linear distribution based on a constant relationship
to settling. If the pressure combination is in tension, this
effectively means the contact is gone between soil and
footing and the pressure is really zero. To avoid zero
pressure, the eccentricity must stay within the kern. The
maximum pressure must not exceed the net allowable
soil pressure.
p
If the contact is gone, the maximum pressure can be
determined knowing that the volume of the pressure
wedge has to equal the column load, and the centroid of
the pressure wedge coincides with the effective eccentricity.

wpx
Wedge volume is V = where w is the width, p is the soil pressure, and x w
2
2P 2N M M
is the wedge length (3a), so p = or (and e = or and a= width - e)
wx wx P N

421
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Overturning is considered in design such that the resisting moment from the soil pressure
(equivalent force at load centroid) is greater than the overturning moment, M, by a factor of
safety of at least 1.5
M resist
SF = 1 .5
M overturnin g
where
Mresist = average resultant soil pressure x width x location of load centroid with respect to
column centroid
Moverturning = P x e

Combined Footings

The design of combined footing requires that the centroid of the

area be as close as possible to the resultant of the two column
loads for uniform pressure and settling.
P1 P2

Retaining Walls

The design of retaining walls must consider overturning, y

settlement, sliding and bearing pressure. The water in the retained R = P1+P2
soil can significantly affect the loading and the active pressure of
the soil. The lateral force acting at a height of H/3 is determined
from the active pressure, pA, (in force/cubic area) as: p H2 A
HA =
2
HA
Overturning is considered the same as for eccentric footings: H/3
pA
M resist
SF = 1 .5 2
M overturning
where
Mresist = summation of moments about o to resist rotation, typically including the
moment due to the weight of the stem and base and the moment due to the
passive pressure.
Moverturning = moment due to the active pressure about o. W

Sliding must also be avoided: Fx

o
Fhorizontal resist
SF = 1.25 2 R Fresist
F sliding

where:
Fhorizontal-resist = summation of forces to resist sliding, typically including the force from
the passive pressure and friction (F=N where is a constant for the materials
in contact and N is the normal force to the ground acting down and shown as R).
Fsliding = sliding force as a result of active pressure.

422
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

For sizing, some rules of thumbs are: t

footing size, B
H
reinforced concrete, B 2/5 - 2/3 wall height (H)
b
footing thickness, hf 1/12 - 1/8 footing size (B) hf
base of stem, b 1/10 - 1/12 wall height (H+hf) B

top of stem, t 12 inches

Example 1 PD = 200k PL = 300k

Soil density = 100 lb/ft3, Concrete density = 150 lb/ft3 15 square column

hf

423
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

hf

424
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Example 2
For the 16 in. thick 8.5 ft. square reinforced concrete footing carrying 150 kips dead load and 100 kips live load on a
24 in. square column, determine if the footing thickness is adequate for 4000 psi . A 3 in. cover is required with
concrete in contact with soil.
Also determine the moment for reinforced concrete design.

SOLUTION:
Pu
1. Find design soil pressure: qu =
A
Pu = 1.2D + 1.6L = 1.2 (150 k) + 1.6 (100 k) = 340 k
340k
qu = = 4.71 k/ft2
(8.5 ft ) 2

2. Evaluate one-way shear at d away from column face (Is Vu < Vc?)

d = hf c.c. distance to bar intersection

presuming #8 bars:

d = 16 in. 3 in. (soil exposure) - 1 in. x (1 layer of #8s) = 12 in.

Vu = total shear = qu (edge area)

Vu on a 1 ft strip = qu (edge distance) (1 ft)

Vu = 4.71 k/ft2 [(8.5 ft 2 ft)/2 (12 in.)(1 ft/12 in.)] (1 ft) = 10.6 k

Vn = one-way shear resistance = 2 f c bd

for a one foot strip, b = 12 in.

Vc = 0.75(2)(1) 4000 psi)(12 in.)(12 in.) = 13.7 k > 10.6 k OK

3. Evaluate two-way shear at d/2 away from column face (Is Vu < Vc?)

bo = perimeter = 4 (24 in. + 12 in.) = 4 (36 in.) = 144 in

Vu = total shear on area outside perimeter = Pu qu (punch area)

Vu = 340 k (4.71 k/ft2)(36 in.)2(1 ft/12 in.)2 = 297.6 kips

Vn = two-way shear resistance = 4 f c bod = 0.75(4)(1) 4000 psi)(144 in.)(12 in.) = 327.9 k > 297.6 k OK

4. Design for bending at column face

Mu = wuL2/2 for a cantilever. L = (8.5 ft 2 ft)/2 = 3.25 ft, and wu for a 1 ft strip = qu (1 ft)

Mu = 4.71 k/ft2(1 ft)(3.25 ft)2/2 = 24.9 k-ft (per ft of width)

To complete the reinforcement design, use b =12 in. and trial d = 12 in., choose , determine As, find if Mn > Mu.....

5. Check transfer of load from column to footing:

Pn = 0.85fcA1 A2 0.85fc2A1 = 0.65(0.85)(4000psi)(2)(12 in.)(12 in.) = 636.5 k > 340 k OK

A1

425
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.1 Su2015abn

Example 3

= 6.25 kips/ft2 < qn = 7 1(0.150-0.125) = 6.975 kips/ft2 O.K.

Example 4
Determine the depth required for the group of 4 friction piles having 12 in. diameters if the column load is 100 kips
and the frictional resistance is 400 lbs/ft2.
P = 100 kips
SOLUTION:
The downward load is resisted by a friction force. Friction is determined by multiplying the friction
resistance (a stress) by the area: F = fASKIN
d
The area of n cylinders is: ASKIN = n(2 L )
2
Our solution is to set P F and solve for length:
12in 1 ft 1k
100k 400 lb ft 2 ( 4 piles )( 2 )( )L ( )( )
2 12in 1000lb
L 19.9 ft pile

P = 300 kips
Example 5
Determine the depth required for the friction and bearing pile having a 36 in. diameter if the column load is
300 kips, the frictional resistance is 600 lbs/ft2 and the end bearing pressure allowed is 8000 psf.

SOLUTION:
The downward load is resisted by a friction force and a bearing force, which can be determined from multiplying the
bearing pressure by the area in contact: F = fASKIN + qATIP
d2
The area of a circle is: ATIP =
4
Our solution is to set P F and solve for length:
36in 1 ft 1k ( 36in ) 2 1 ft 2 1k
300k 600 lb ft 2 2 ( )L ( )( ) + 8000 lb ft 2 ( ) ( )
2 12in 1000lb 4 12in 1000lb
L 43.1 ft

426
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.2 Su2015abn

Design of Isolated Square and Rectangular Footings (ACI 318-14)

Notation:
a = equivalent square column size in lsc = lap splice length in compression for
spread footing design reinforcement
= depth of the effective compression L = name for length or span length
block in a concrete beam Lm = projected length for bending in
Ag = gross area, equal to the total area concrete footing design
ignoring any reinforcement L = length of the one-way shear area in
Areq = area required to satisfy allowable concrete footing design
stress Mn = nominal flexure strength with the
As = area of steel reinforcement in steel reinforcement at the yield
concrete design stress and concrete at the concrete
A1 = area of column in spread footing design strength for reinforced
design concrete flexure design
A2 = projected bearing area of column Mu = maximum moment from factored
load in spread footing design loads for LRFD beam design
b = rectangular column dimension in P = name for axial force vector
concrete footing design Pdowels = nominal capacity of dowels from
= width, often cross-sectional concrete column to footing in
bf = width of the flange of a steel or concrete design
cross section PD = dead load axial force
bo = perimeter length for two-way shear PL = live load axial force
in concrete footing design Pn = nominal column or bearing load
B = spread footing dimension in capacity in concrete design
concrete design Pu = factored axial force
= dimension of a steel base plate for qallowable = allowable soil bearing stress in
concrete footing design allowable stress design
Bs = width within the longer dimension qnet = net allowed soil bearing pressure
of a rectangular spread footing that qu = factored soil bearing capacity in
reinforcement must be concentrated concrete footing design from load
within for concrete design factors
c = rectangular column dimension in Vc = shear force capacity in concrete
concrete footing design Vn = nominal shear force capacity
C = dimension of a steel base plate for Vu1 = maximum one-way shear from
concrete footing design factored loads for LRFD beam
d = effective depth from the top of a design
reinforced concrete member to the Vu2 = maximum two-way shear from
centroid of the tensile steel factored loads for LRFD beam design
db = bar diameter of a reinforcing bar = ratio of long side to short side of the
df = depth of a steel column flange column in concrete footing design
(wide flange section) = resistance factor
f c = concrete design compressive stress c = density or unit weight of concrete
fy = yield stress or strength
hf = height of a concrete spread footing s = density or unit weight of soil
ld = development length for reinforcing = reinforcement ratio in concrete
steel beam design = As/bd
ldc = development length for column c = shear strength in concrete design

427
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.2 Su2015abn

NOTE: This procedure assumes that the footing is concentrically loaded and carries no moment so that the soil
pressure may be assumed to be uniformly distributed on the base.

1) Find service dead and live column loads:

PD = Service dead load from column
PL = Service live load from column
P = PD + PL (typically see ACI 5.3)
2) Find design (factored) column load, Pu:
PU = 1.2PD + 1.6PL
3) Find an approximate footing depth, hf
hf = d + 4" and is usually in multiples of 2, 4 or 6 inches.

Pu
a) For rectangular columns 4d 2 + 2(b + c)d =
c

Pu d 2
b) For round columns d 2 + ad = a=
c 4
where: a is the equivalent square column size

c = 4 fc for two-way shear

= 0.75 for shear
= 1.0 for normalweight
concrete
4) Find net allowable soil pressure, qnet:
By neglecting the weight of any
additional top soil added, the net
allowable soil pressure takes into
account the change in weight when
soil is removed and replaced by concrete:
qnet = qallowable hf ( c s )
where c is the unit weight of concrete (typically 150 lb/ft3)
and s is the unit weight of the displaced soil
5) Find required area of footing base and establish length and width:
P
Areq
q net

For square footings choose B Areq

For rectangular footings choose B L Areq

428
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.2 Su2015abn

6) Check transfer of load from column to footing: ACI 16.3

a) Find load transferred by bearing on concrete in column: ACI 22.8
basic: Pn = 0.85fcA1 where = 0.65 and A1 is the area of the column

A2 A2
with confinement: Pn = 0.85 f cA1 where cannot exceed 2.
A1 A1

IF the column concrete strength is lower than the

footing, calculate Pn for the column too.
loaded area A1
b) Find load to be transferred by dowels:
Pdowels= Pu Pn
IF Pn Pu only nominal dowels are required.
A2 measured on
c) Find required area of dowels and choose bars this plane

Pdowels
Req. dowel As = where = 0.65 and fy is the reinforcement grade
f y
Choose dowels to satisfy the required area and nominal requirements:
i) Minimum of 4 bars
ii) Minimum As = 0.005Ag ACI 16.3.4.1

where Ag is the gross column area

d) Check dowel embedment into footing for compression: ACI 12.3

f y db
ldc = but not less than 0.0003f y db or 8 where db is the bar diameter
50 fc

NOTE: The footing must be deep enough to accept ldc. Hooks are not considered effective in compression
and are only used to support dowels during construction.

e) Find length of lapped splices of dowels with column bars: ACI 25.5.5
5 l sc is the largest of:

i) larger of ldc or 0.0005f ydb (fy of grade 60 or less)

of smaller bar (0.0009f y 24)db (fy over grade 60)

ii) ldc of larger bar

iii) not less than 12
See ACI 10.7.5 for possible reduction in lsc

429
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.2 Su2015abn

7) Check two-way (slab) shear:

a) Find dimensions of loaded area:
i) For concrete columns, the area coincides
with the column area, if rectangular, or
equivalent square area if circular
(see 3)b))
ii) For steel columns an equivalent loaded
area whose boundaries are halfway
between the faces of the steel column
and the edges of the steel base plate is df
used: ACI 13.2.7.1.

( B bf )
b = bf + where bf is the width of column flange and B is base plate side
2
(C d f )
c = df + where df is the depth of column flange and C is base plate side
2
b) Find shear perimeter: ACI 22.6.4
Shear perimeter is located at a distance of d outside boundaries of loaded area and
2

length is bo = 2(c + d) + 2(b + d)

(average d = hf 3 in. cover 1 assumed bar diameter)

c) Find factored net soil pressure, qu:

Pu Pu
qu = 2
or
B BL
d) Find total shear force for two-way shear, Vu2:
Vu2 = Pu qu (c + d)(b + d)

e) Compare Vu2 to two-way capacity, Vn:

4
Vu2 2 + fcbo d 4 fcbo d ACI 22.6.5.1

where = 0.75 and is the ratio of long side to short
side of the column
NOTE: This should be acceptable because the initial footing
size was chosen on the basis of two-way shear limiting. If it is
not acceptable, increase hf and repeat steps starting at b).

430
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.2 Su2015abn

8) Check one-way (beam) shear:

The critical section for one-way shear extends across the
width of the footing at a distance d from the face of the
loaded area (see 7)a) for loaded area). The footing is
treated as a cantilevered slab. ACI 7.4.3.2

a) Find projection, L:
i) For square footing:
B
L = ( d + b ) where b is the smaller dim. of
2 2

the loaded area

ii) For rectangular footings:
L
L = ( d + ) where is the dim. parallel to
2 2

the long side of the footing

b) Find total shear force on critical section, Vu1:
Vu1 = BLqu

c) Compare Vu1 to one-way capacity, Vn: u

Vu1 2 fc Bd Vu1 2 f cBd ACI 22.5.5.1

where = 0.75
NOTE: If it is not acceptable, increase hf .

9) Check for bending stress and design reinforcement:

Square footings may be designed for moment in one direction and the same reinforcing used
in the other direction. For rectangular footings the moment and reinforcing must be
calculated separately in each direction. The critical section for moment extends across the
width of the footing at the face of the loaded area. ACI 13.2.7.1.

a) Find projection, Lm:

B
Lm =
2 2
where is the smaller dim. of column for a square footing. For a
rectangular footing, use the value perpendicular to the critical
section.
b) Find total moment, Mu, on critical section:
BL2m
Mu = qu (find both ways for a rectangular footing)
2

431
ARCH 331 Note Set 27.2 Su2015abn

c) Find required As:

Mn M
Rn = 2
= u2 , where = 0.9, and can be found
bd bd
from Figure 3.8.1 of Wang & Salmon.
or:
u
i) guess a
0.85 f cba
ii) As =
fy

M
iii) solve for a = 2 d u
A f
s y
u
iv) repeat from ii) until a converges, solve for As
Minimum As
= 0.0018bh Grade 60 for temperature and shrinkage control
= 0.002bh Grade 40 or 50
ACI 7.6.1.1 specifies the requirements of 7.6.4 must be met, and max. spacing of 18
d) Choose bars:
For square footings use the same size and number of bars uniformly spaced in each
direction (ACI 13.3.3.2). Note that required As must be furnished in each direction.

For rectangular footings bars in long direction should be uniformly spaced. In the short
direction bars should be distributed as follows (ACI
13.3.3.3):

i) In a band of width Bs centered on column:

2
# bars = (# bars in B ) (integer)
L +1
B
ii) Remaining bars in short direction should be
uniformly spaced in outer portions of footing.
e) Check development length:
Find required development length, ld, in tension from handout or from equations in ACI
25.4. ld must be less than (Lm 2) (end cover). If not possible, use more bars of smaller
diameter.

432
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.1 Su2014abn

Masonry Design

Notation:
A = name for area j = multiplier by effective depth of
An = net area, equal to the gross area masonry section for moment arm, jd
subtracting any reinforcement k = multiplier by effective depth of
Anv = net shear area of masonry masonry section for neutral axis, kd
As = area of steel reinforcement in L = name for length or span length
masonry design M = internal bending moment
Ast = area of steel reinforcement in = type of masonry mortar
masonry column design Mm = moment capacity of a reinforced
ACI = American Concrete Institute masonry beam governed by steel
ASCE = American Society of Civil Engineers stress
b = width, often cross-sectional Ms = moment capacity of a reinforced
C = name for a compression force masonry beam governed by
Cm = compression force in the masonry masonry stress
for masonry design MSJC = Masonry Structural Joint Council
CMU = shorthand for concrete masonry unit n = modulus of elasticity transformation
d = effective depth from the top of a coefficient for steel to masonry
reinforced masonry beam to the n.a. = shorthand for neutral axis (N.A.)
centroid of the tensile steel N = type of masonry mortar
e = eccentric distance of application of NCMA = National Concrete Masonry
a force (P) from the centroid of a Association
cross section O = type of masonry mortar
fa = axial stress P = name for axial force vector
fb = bending stress Pa = allowable axial load in columns
fm = calculated compressive stress in r = radius of gyration
masonry S = section modulus
fm = masonry design compressive stress
= type of masonry mortar
Sx = section modulus with respect to an
fs = stress in the steel reinforcement for x-axis
masonry design t = name for thickness
fv = shear stress T = name for a tension force
Fa = allowable axial stress Ts = tension force in the steel
Fb = allowable bending stress reinforcement for masonry design
Fs = allowable tensile stress in TMS = The Masonry Society
reinforcement for masonry design w = name for distributed load
Ft = allowable tensile stress 1 = coefficient for determining stress
Fv = allowable shear stress block height, c, in masonry LRFD
Fvm = allowable shear stress of the design
masonry
m = strain in the masonry
Fvs = allowable shear stress of the shear
reinforcement s = strain in the steel
h = name for height = reinforcement ratio in masonry
= effective height of a wall or column design
Ix = moment of inertia with respect to an
x-axis

433
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.1 Su2014abn

Reinforced Masonry Design

Structural design standards for reinforced masonry are established by the Masonry Standards
Joint Committee consisting of ACI, ASCE and The Masonry Society (TMS), and presents
allowable stress design as well as limit state (strength) design.

Materials

fm = masonry prism compressive strength from testing

Reinforcing steel grades are the same as those used for reinforced concrete beams.

Units can be brick, concrete or stone.

Mortar consists of masonry cement, lime, sand, and water. Grades are named from the word
MASONWORK, with average strengths of 2500psi, 1800 psi, 750 psi, 350 psi, and 75 psi,
respectively.

Grout is a flowable mortar, usually with a high amount of water to cement material. It is used to
fill voids and bond reinforcement.

Clay and concrete masonry units are porous, and their durability with respect to weathering is an
important consideration. The amount of water in the mortar is important as well as the
absorption capacity of the units for good bond; both for strength and for weatherproofing.
Because of the moisture and tendency for shrinkage and swelling, it is critical to provide control
joints for expansion and contraction.

Sizes

Common sizes for clay

brick and concrete
masonry units (CMU) are Standard Modular Clay Brick 4 in. Normal Clay Brick
shown in the figure,
along with definitions.

Typical section
properties for CMUs are
provided for reference at
the end of the document.
Two Core Stretch Unit Three Core Stretch Unit

Allowable Stress Design

For unreinforced masonry, like masonry walls, tension stresses are allowed in flexure. Masonry
walls typically see compression stresses too.

434
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.1 Su2014abn

For reinforced masonry, the steel is presumed to resist all tensile stresses and the tension in the
masonry is ignored.

Factors of Safety are applied to the limit stresses for allowable stress values:

bending (unreinforced) Fb = 1/3 f m

bending (reinforced) Fb = 0.45 f m
bending (tension/unreinforced) table 2.2.3.2
beam shear (unreinforced for flexure) Fv = 1.5 f m 120 psi
beam shear (reinforced) M/(Vd) 0.25 Fv = 3.0 f m
beam shear (reinforced) M/(Vd) 1.0 Fv = 2.0 f m
Grades 40 or 50 reinforcement Fs = 20 ksi
Grades 60 reinforcement Fs = 32 ksi
Wire joint reinforcement Fs = 30 ksi
where fm = specified compressive strength of masonry

Internal Equilibrium for Bending

b (kd )
Cm = compression in masonry = stress x area = f m
2
Ts = tension in steel = stress x area = Asfs
b STRAIN STRESS
Cm = Ts and m fm
Cm=fmb(kd)/2
kd
Mm = Ts(d-kd/3) = Ts(jd) d n.a. jd
t M
Ms =Cm(jd) s fs/n Ts=Asfs
grout As
unit

BIA Teknote 17 series

where
fm = compressive stress in the masonry from flexure
fs = tensile stress in the steel reinforcement
kd = the height to the neutral axis
b = width of stress area
d = effective depth of section = depth to n.a. of reinforcement
jd = moment arm from tension force to compression force
As = area of steel
n = Es/Em used to transform steel to equivalent area of masonry for elastic stresses
= reinforcement ratio

435
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.1 Su2014abn

Criteria for Beam Design

For flexure design:

kd
M m = f mb jd = 0.5 f m bd 2 jk or M s = As f s jd = bd 2 jf s
2
The design is adequate when f b Fb in the masonry and f s Fs .in the steel.

Shear stress is determined by fv = V/Anv where Anv is net shear area. Shear strength is determined
from the shear capacity of the masonry and the stirrups: Fv = Fvm + Fvs. Stirrup spacings are
limited to d/2 but not to exceed 48 in.

where:
1 M P
Fvm = 4.0 1.75 f m + 0.25 where M/(Vd) is positive and cannot exceed 1.0
2 Vd An
A Fd (Fv = 3.0 f m when M/(Vd) 0.25 )
Fvs = 0.5 v s
Anv s (Fv = 2.0 f m when M(Vd) 1.0.) Values can be linearly interpolated.

Load and Resistance Factor Design

The design methodology is similar to reinforced concrete ultimate strength

design. It is useful with high shear values and for seismic design. The limiting
masonry strength is 0.80fm.

Criteria for Column Design

(Masonry Joint Code Committee) Building Code Requirements and Commentary for Masonry
Structures define a column as having b/t < 3 and h/t > 4.
where
b = width of the wall
t = thickness of the wall
h = height of the wall
A slender column has a minimum dimension of 8 on one side and h/t 25.
Columns must be reinforced, and have ties. A minimum eccentricity (causing bending) of 0.1
times the side dimension is required.

Allowable Axial Load for Reinforced Masonry

h 2
Pa = [0.25 f m An + 0.65 Ast Fs ]1 for h/t 99
140r
2
70r
Pa = [0.25 f m An + 0.65 Ast Fs ] for h/t > 99
h

436
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.1 Su2014abn

Allowable Axial Stresses for Unreinforced Masonry

h 2
Fa = 0.25 f m 1 for h/t 99
140r
2
70r
Fa = 0.25 f m for h/t > 99
h
where
h = effective length
r = radius of gyration
An = effective (or net) area of masonry
Ast = area of steel reinforcement
f m = specified masonry compressive strength
Fs = allowable compressive stress in column reinforcement with lateral confinement.

Combined Stresses
When maximum moment occurs somewhere other than at the end of the column or wall, a
virtual eccentricity can be determined from e = M/P.

Masonry Columns and Walls

fa fb
There are no modification factors, but in addition to satisfying + 1.0 , the tensile stress
Fa Fb
cannot exceed the allowable: fb f a Ft or the compressive stress exceed allowable for
reinforced masonry: f a + fb Fb provided f a Fa .

437
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.1 Su2014abn

Example 1

Determine if the unreinforced CMU wall can sustain its loads

with the wind. Specify a mortar type and unit strength per
MSJC.

fa f M P
+ b 1.0 Fb = 1 3 f m fb = fa =
Fa Fb S A
h 2
h
Fa = 0.25 f m 1 for 99
140r r
2
14-1B:
70r h
Fa = 0.25 f m for > 99
h r

h 12 ft ( 12in ) 12 12in 2 3.21

= = 44 .9 so Fa = 0.25 f m 1 = 0.224 f m
r 3.21in 140 3.21in
4k ( 1000 lb k )
fa = = 133 psi
30in 2

(1 ftkips/ft2) (ft)
(in/ft)
Mmax = Pe

fb 1/3fm
fm 154/(1/3) = 462 psi M = Pe/2 Mmax = wL2/8

psi
Moment distribution Moment distribution from
from eccentricity distributed wind load
1; 1056 psi
0.224

25 psi

1038 psi fm = 1056 psi (governs)

0.224

438
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.1 Su2014abn

439
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

441
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

442
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

443
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

444
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

445

445
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

446
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

447

447
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

448
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

449
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

450
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.2 F2008abn

451

451
 ARCH 331 Note Set 28.3 F2012abn

Excerpts from NCMA TEK Manual for Concrete Masonry Design and Construction

Section Properties (14-1B 2007)

Table for Horizontal Cross Sections (net)

Units Grouted Mortar Bedding A Ix Sx r

Spacing in2/ft in4/ft in3/ft in
(103mm2/m) (106 mm4/m) (106 mm3/m) (mm)
4 Inch Single Wythe Walls, in. Face Shells (standard)
Hollow No grout Faceshell 18.0 (38.1) 38.0 (51.9) 21.0 (1.13) 1.45 (36.9)
Hollow No grout Full 21.6 (45.7) 39.4 (53.8) 21.7 (1.17) 1.35 (34.3)
100 % solid/grouted Full 43.5 (92.1) 47.4 (64.7) 26.3 (1.41) 1.04 (26.5)
6 Inch Single Wythe Walls, 1 in. Face Shells (standard)
Hollow No grout Faceshell 24.0 (50.8) 130.3 (178) 46.3 (2.49) 2.33 (59.2)
Hollow None Full 32.2 (68.1) 139.3 (190) 49.5 (2.66) 2.08 (52.9)
100% Solid/grouted Full 67.5 (143) 176.9 (242) 63.3 (3.40) 1.62 (41.1)
Hollow 16" o. c. Faceshell 46.6 (98.6) 158.1 (216) 55.1 (2.96) 1.79 (45.5)
Hollow 24" o. c. Faceshell 39.1 (82.7) 151.8 (207) 52.2 (2.81) 1.87 (47.4)
Hollow 32" o. c. Faceshell 35.3 (74.7) 148.7 (203) 50.7 (2.73) 1.91 (48.5)
Hollow 40" o. c. Faceshell 33.0 (69.9) 146.8 (200) 49.9 (2.68) 1.94 (49.3)
Hollow 48" o. c. Faceshell 31.5 (66.7) 145.5 (199) 49.3 (2.65) 1.96 (49.8)
Hollow 72" o. c. Faceshell 29.0 (61.45) 143.5 (196) 51.0 (2.74) 2.00 (50.8)
Hollow 96" o. c. Faceshell 27.8 (58.8) 142.4 (194) 50.6 (2.72) 2.02 (51.3)
Hollow 122" o. c. Faceshell 27.0 (57.1) 141.8 (194) 50.4 (2.71) 2.03 (51.5)
8 Inch Single Wythe Walls, 1 in. Face Shells (standard)
Hollow No grout Faceshell 30.0 (63.5) 308.7 (422) 81.0 (4.35) 3.21 (81.5)
Hollow No grout Full 41.5 (87.9) 334.0 (456) 87.6 (4.71) 2.84 (72.0)
100% solid/grouted Full 91.5 (194) 440.2 (601) 116.3 (6.25) 2.19 (55.7)
Hollow 16" o. c. Faceshell 62.0 (131) 387.1 (529) 99.3 (5.34) 2.43 (61.6)
Hollow 24" o. c. Faceshell 51.3 (109) 369.4 (504) 93.2 (5.01) 2.53 (64.3)
Hollow 32" o. c. Faceshell 46.0 (97.3) 360.5 (492) 90.1 (4.85) 2.59 (65.8)
Hollow 40" o. c. Faceshell 42.8 (90.6) 355.2 (485) 88.3 (4.75) 2.63 (66.9)
Hollow 48" o. c. Faceshell 40.7 (86.0) 351.7 (480) 87.1 (4.68) 2.66 (67.6)
Hollow 72" o. c. Faceshell 37.1 (78.5) 345.8 (472) 85.0 (4.57) 2.71 (69.0)
Hollow 92" o. c. Faceshell 35.3 (74.7) 342.8 (468) 89.9 (4.83) 2.74 (69.6)
Hollow 120" o. c. Faceshell 34.3 (72.6) 341.0 (466) 89.5 (4.81) 2.76 (70.1)

453
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.3 F2012abn
Units Grouted Cores Mortar Bedding A Ix Sx r
in2/ft in4/ft in3/ft in
(103mm2/m) (106 mm4/m) (106 mm3/m) (mm)
10 Inch Single Wythe Walls, 1 in. Face Shells (standard)
Hollow No grout Faceshell 30.0 (63.5) 530.0 (724) 110.1 (5.92) 4.20 (107)
Hollow No grout Full 48.0 (102) 606.3 (828) 126.0 (6.77) 3.55 (90.2)
100% solid/grouted Full 115.5 (244) 891.7 (1218) 185.3 (9.96) 2.78 (70.6)
Hollow 16" o. c. Faceshell 74.8 (158) 744.7 (1017) 154.7 (8.32) 3.04 (77.2)
Hollow 24" o. c. Faceshell 59.8 (127) 698.6 (954) 145.2 (7.81) 3.16 (80.3)
Hollow 32" o. c. Faceshell 52.4 (111) 675.5 (923) 140.4 (7.55) 3.24 (82.3)
Hollow 40" o. c. Faceshell 47.9 (101) 661.6 (904) 137.5 (7.39) 3.29 (83.6)
Hollow 48" o. c. Faceshell 44.9 (95.0) 652.4 (891) 135.6 (7.29) 3.33 (84.6)
Hollow 72" o. c. Faceshell 39.9 (84.5) 637.0 (870) 132.4 (7.12) 3.39 (86.1)
Hollow 96" o. c. Faceshell 37.5 (79.4) 629.3 (859) 130.8 (7.03) 3.43 (87.1)
Hollow 120" o. c. Faceshell 36.0 (76.2) 624.7 (853) 129.8 (6.98) 3.45 (87.6)
12 Inch Single Wythe Walls. 1 in. Face Shells (standard)
Hollow No grout Faceshell 30.0 (63.5) 811.2 (1108) 139.6 (7.50) 5.20 (132)
Hollow No grout Full 53.1 (112) 971.5 (1327) 167.1 (8.98) 4.28 (109)
100% solid/grouted Full 139.5 (295) 1571.0 (2145) 270.3 (14.5) 3.36 (85.3)
Hollow 16" o. c. Faceshell 87.3 (185) 1262.3 (1724) 217.2(11.7) 3.64 (92.5)
Hollow 24" o. c. Faceshell 68.2 (144) 1165.4 (1591) 200.5 (10.7) 3.79 (96.3)
Hollow 32" o. c. Faceshell 58.7 (124) 1116.9 (1525) 192.2 (10.3) 3.88 (98.6)
Hollow 40" o. c. Faceshell 52.9 (112) 1087.8 (1486) 187.2 (10.1) 3.95 (100)
Hollow 48" o. c. Faceshell 49.1 (104) 1068.4 (1459) 183.8 (9.88) 3.99 (101)
Hollow 72" o. c. Faceshell 42.7 (90.4) 1036.1 (1415) 178.3 (9.59) 4.07 (103)
Hollow 96" o. c. Faceshell 39.6 (83.8) 1020.0 (1393) 175.5 (9.44) 4.12 (105)
Hollow 120" o. c. Faceshell 37.6 (79.6) 1010.3 (1380) 173.8 (9.34) 4.15 (105)
14 Inch Single Wythe Walls. 1 in. Face Shells (standard)
Hollow No grout Faceshell 30.0 (63.5) 1152.5 (1574) 169.2 (9.09) 6.20 (157)
Hollow No grout Full 58.2 (123) 1442.9 (1970) 211.8 (11.4) 4.98 (126)
100% solid/grouted Full 163.5 (346) 2529.4 (3454) 371.3 (20.0) 3.93 (99.8)
Hollow 16" o. c. Faceshell 99.9 (211) 1970.0 (2690) 289.2(15.5) 4.25 (108)
Hollow 24" o. c. Faceshell 76.6 (162) 1794.3 (2450) 263.4 (14.2) 4.41 (112)
Hollow 32" o. c. Faceshell 64.9 (137) 1706.4 (2330) 250.5 (13.5) 4.51 (115)
Hollow 40" o. c. Faceshell 58.0 (123) 1653.7 (2258) 242.8 (13.0) 4.59 (117)
Hollow 48" o. c. Faceshell 53.3 (113) 1618.6 (2210) 237.6 (12.8) 4.64 (118)
Hollow 72" o. c. Faceshell 45.5 (96.3) 1560.0 (2130) 229.0 (12.3) 4.74 (120)
Hollow 96" o. c. Faceshell 41.6 (88.1) 1530.7 (2090) 224.7 (12.1) 4.79 (122)
Hollow 120" o. c. Faceshell 39.3 (83.2) 1513.2 (2067) 221.1 (11.9) 4.83 (123)
16 Inch Single Wythe Walls. 1 in. Face Shells (standard)
Hollow No grout Faceshell 30.0 (63.5) 1553.7 (2122) 198.9 (10.2) 7.20 (183)
Hollow No grout Full 63.2 (134) 2030.6 (2773) 259.9 (13.9) 5.67 (144)
100% solid/grouted Full 187.5 (397) 3814.7 (5209) 488.3 (26.3) 4.51 (115)
Hollow 16" o. c. Faceshell 112.4 (238) 2896.2 (3955) 370.7(19.9) 4.84 (123)
Hollow 24" o. c. Faceshell 85.0 (180) 2607.7 (3561) 333.8 (17.9) 5.02 (127)
Hollow 32" o. c. Faceshell 71.2 (151) 2463.4 (3364) 315.3 (17.0) 5.14 (131)
Hollow 40" o. c. Faceshell 63.0 (133) 2376.9 (3246) 304.2 (16.4) 5.22 (133)
Hollow 48" o. c. Faceshell 57.5 (122) 2319.1 (3167) 296.9 (16.0) 5.28 (134)
Hollow 72" o. c. Faceshell 48.3 (102) 2223.0 (3036) 284.5 (15.3) 5.39 (137)
Hollow 96" o. c. Faceshell 43.7 (92.5) 2174.9 (3970) 278.4 (15.0) 5.45 (138)
Hollow 120" o. c. Faceshell 41.0 (86.8) 2146.0 (2931) 274.7 (14.8) 5.49 (139)

454
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.3 F2012abn
Allowable Stresses for Unreinforced Concrete Masonry (14-7C 2012)

Compression
Axial.................................Fa = 1/4 f 'm[1-(h/140r)2], where h/r 99
..........................................Fa = 1/4 f 'm (70r/h)2, where h/r > 99
Flexural ............................Fb = 1/3 f 'm

Shear
VQ
where fv =
I nb
1.5 f m 120 psi

Allowable Stresses for Reinforced Concrete Masonry (14-7C 2012)

Compression
h 2
Axial................................. Pa = [0.25 f m An + 0.65 Ast Fs ]1 , where h/r 99
140r
2
70r
.......................................... Pa = [0.25 f m An + 0.65 Ast Fs ] , where h/r > 99
h
Flexural ............................Fb = 0.45 f 'm

455
ARCH 331 Note Set 28.3 F2012abn

Shear
V
where fv = and Fv = Fvm + Fvs
Anv
M/Vd 0.25 ..................Fv = 3 f m
M/Vd 1.0 ....................Fv = 2 f m
M/Vd falls between ........may be linearly interpolated

and
1 M P
Fvm = 4.0 1.75 f m + 0.25
2 Vd An
AFd
Fvs = 0.5 v s
An s

Steel Reinforcement
Tension
Grade 40...................... Fs = 20,000 psi (137.9 MPa)
Grade 60...................... Fs = 32,000 psi (220.7 MPa)
Joint reinforcement..... Fs = 30,000 psi (206.9 MPa)

NOTATIONS
An net cross-sectional area of masonry, in.2 (mm2)
Anv net shear area, in.2 (mm2)
Av cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement, in.2 (mm2)
b width of section, in. (mm)
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension reinforcement, in. (mm)
Fa allowable compressive stress due to axial load only, psi (MPa)
Fb allowable compressive stress due to flexure only, psi (MPa)
Fs allowable tensile or compressive stress in reinforcement, psi (MPa)
Fv allowable shear stress in masonry, psi (MPa)
Fvm allowable shear resisted by the masonry, psi (MPa)
Fvx allowable shear resisted by the shear reinforcement, psi (MPa)
f m specified compressive strength of masonry, psi (MPa)

fs calculated shear stress in the masonry, psi (MPa)
h effective height of column, wall, or pilaster, in. (mm)
In moment of inertia of net cross-sectional area of a member, in.4 (mm4)
M maximum moment occurring simultaneously with design shear force, V, at section under
consideration, in.-lb (N.m)
P axial compression load, lb (N)
Pa allowable axial compressive force in a reinforced member, lb (N)
Q first moment of inertia about the neutral axis of an area between the extreme fiber and the
plane at which the shear stress is being calculated, in.3(mm3)
r radius of gyration, in. (mm)
s spacing of shear reinforcement, in. (mm)
V design shear force, lb (N)

456
ARCH 331 Appendix Su2015abn

Table of Reference Figures and Charts

Framing System Selection Chart .......................................................Note Set 2.1, pg. 37

Design Criteria Summary Chart .......................................................Note Set 2.1, pg. 38
Common Span Lengths & Depths by System ..................................Note Set 2.2, pg. 49
Common Span Lengths & Depths for Timber .................................Note Set 2.2, pg. 50
Common Span Lengths & Depths for Reinforced Concrete ..........Note Set 2.2, pg. 51
Common Span Lengths & Depths for Steel ......................................Note Set 2.2, pg. 52
Coefficients of Friction .......................................................................Note Set 4.1, pg. 82
Reactions and Support Conditions ....................................................Note Set 5.1, pg. 100
Elastic Moduli of Selected Materials .................................................Note Set 6.2, pg. 121
Beam Diagrams and Formulas (for various static loading conditions)
...................................................................................................Note Set 8.2, pg. 163-169
Centroids of Common Shapes............................................................Note Set 9.1, pg. 173
Geometric Properties of Areas ..........................................................Note Set 9.2, pg. 180
Alignment Chart for Effective Length of Columns in Continuous Frames
...................................................................................................Note Set 12.1, pg. 206
Theoretical and Recommended Effective Length Factors ..............Note Set 12.2, pg. 215
Minimum Concentrated Loads (from on ASCE 7)..........................Note Set 13.1, pg. 230
Minimum Uniformly Distributed Loads (from ASCE 7) ................Note Set 13.1, pg. 231-233
Building Material Weights .................................................................Note Set 13.1, pg. 234-235
Minimum Uniformly Distributed Live Loads, Lo, and Minimum Concentrated Live Loads
(from International Building Code) ......................................Note Set 13.2, pg. 237
Live Load Element Factor, KLL .........................................................Note Set 13.2, pg. 238
Ground Snow Loads, ps, for the United States .................................Note Set 13.2, pg. 240
Deflection Limits (from International Building Code) ....................Note Set 13.2, pg. 242
Design Wind Pressures (Method 2) ...................................................Note Set 13.3, pg. 243-245
Risk Category of Buildings and Other Structures for Flood, Wind, Snow, Earthquake, and
Ice Loads ..................................................................................Note Set 13.3, pg. 246
Basic Wind Speeds for Occupancy Category II Buildings and Other Structures
...................................................................................................Note Set 13.3, pg. 247
Earthquake Ground Motion, 0.2 Second Spectral Response..........Note Set 13.4, pg. 249
Load Duration Factor, CD ..................................................................Note Set 15.1, pg. 277

457
ARCH 331 Appendix Su2015abn

Common Allowable Deflection Limits ..............................................Note Set 15.1, pg. 279

Common Allowable Deflection Limits ..............................................Note Set 15.2, pg. 301
Beam Design Flow Chart....................................................................Note Set 15.2, pg. 305
Common Allowable Deflection Limits ..............................................Note Set 18, pg. 312
Minimum Size of Fillet Welds............................................................Note Set 18, pg. 327
Available Strength of Fillet Welds.....................................................Note Set 18, pg. 327
Alignment Chart for Effective Length of Columns in Continuous Frames
...................................................................................................Note Set 18, pg. 330
Listing of W Shapes in Descending order of Zx for Beam Design ..Note Set 18, pg. 349-350
Available Critical Stress, Fcr, for Compression Members ............Note Set 18, pg. 351-352
Available Shear Strength of Bolts (Table 7-1)..................................Note Set 18, pg. 353
Available Tensile Strength of Bolts (Table 7-2) ...............................Note Set 18, pg. 353
Available Shear Strength of Slip-Critical Connections (Table 7-3)
...................................................................................................Note Set 18, pg. 354
Available Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes Based on Bolt Spacing (Table 7-4)
...................................................................................................Note Set 18, pg. 354
Available Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes Based on Edge Distance
...................................................................................................Note Set 18, pg. 355
Beam Design Flow Chart for Steel ....................................................Note Set 18, pg. 357
ASTM Standard Reinforcing Bars ....................................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 364
Maximum Reinforcement Ratio .....................................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 366
Strength Curves (Rn vs ) for singly reinforced rectangular sections
...................................................................................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 366
Minimum Thickness of Nonprestressed Beams or One-way Slabs unless Deflections are
Computed (Table 7.3.1.1) .......................................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 368
ACI Provisions for Shear Design (Table 3-8) ...................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 370
Alignment Chart for Effective Length of Columns in Continuous Frames
...................................................................................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 374
Factored Moment Resistance of Concrete Beams, Mn with fc = 4 ksi, fy = 60 ksi
...................................................................................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 397
Column Interaction Diagrams ...........................................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 398-399
Beam / One-Way Slab Design Flow Chart .......................................Note Set 22.1, pg. 400-401
Steel Reinforcement Information ......................................................Note Set 22.2, pg. 403-405
458
ARCH 331 Appendix Su2015abn

Coefficients for Rectangular Bars in Torsion (Table 3.1) ...............Note Set 24, pg. 408
Moment and Shear Coefficients for Continuous Beams and One-Way Slabs
...................................................................................................Note Set 25.1, pg. 412
Thickness and Cover Requirements for Fire Protection.................Note Set 25.2, pg. 413
Openings Permitted in Slab Systems without Beams ......................Note Set 25.3, pg. 416
Average Bearing Capacities of Various Foundation Beds (Table 7-1)
...................................................................................................Note Set 27.1, pg. 419
Allowable Flexural Tensile Stresses for Clay and Concrete Masonry
...................................................................................................Note Set 28.1, pg. 439
Minimum Development Lengths for Reinforced Brick Masonry Beams (Table 1)
...................................................................................................Note Set 28.2, pg. 445
Design Curves for Masonry Beams ..................................................Note Set 28.2, pg. 447-451
Section Properties for Concrete Masonry Walls..............................Note Set 28.3, pg. 453-454
Allowable Flexural Tensile Stresses for Clay and Concrete Masonry (Table 1)
...................................................................................................Note Set 28.3, pg. 455

459